IIFO^ ,A\tf UNIVERS^ 
 Nfe ^f 
 
^l-UBRARY 
 
 ^MINIVERS/A 
 
^3n 
 AMSRCW J GRAHAM 
 
Emered, according to Acf j^ Congress, in Hie year 
 
 m the Clerk's Ojjice of Hie District Ccuft of tlie United 
 for the Southern District of New York. 
 
 . 
 
] 
 v 
 
 .%,. 
 
 t y? ), ^ 
 
 
 - 
 
 / 
 > 
 
 \ 
 
* 
 
 b ~ >. 
 
 * 
 
 
 . 
 
 , (_v fi ..).. 
 
 U, ' 
 
^ / 
 
 ,--<l u -. 
 
 ", ( 
 
 ; -9 -^ t/C, 
 
 \ 
 
 x 
 
 Geology, 
 
 i ' - 
 
 / v 
 
>.<M 
 
 
 - x 
 
 1 r ll [ ll r I 
 
 ienceo die xUireylflHon o tde|j!U. 
 
 V 
 
 
V 
 
 M e/%. ^-""X' <x / ^ J-^ 
 
 -1 ^o ^ I ^ -^ , N 
 
ligion and 
 
 
 ( ^i> 
 
 7 I- ) N 
 
 7 ' t " V- 
 
 ^ . . 
 
 t 
 
 ' / 0- "\ X 
 
 / j_ I ~ 
 
 x__ , q. s ! ^v 
 
 > ^ 
 
 ^ A^ s*V) 
 
 I ^ -n> ^ 
 
 / V 
 
 r/ 
 
 'X 
 
 
 v - 
 r 
 
K 
 
 \ 
 
 V 
 
 k_< O 
 
 v 
 > 
 
 -J N . 
 
 /I 
 
 5 r 
 
 / -r 
 
 ds, in >/T 
 
 ur / r lens, in >/\) eavei) ^ 
 
 * 
 
 < 
 
10 
 
 /L 
 
 K, 
 
 ( 
 
 N>; 
 
 { 
 vi 
 
 -N/ 
 
 , r 
 
^o 
 
 u 
 
 V. 
 
 K^- 
 
 V 
 
IZ 
 
 1- < 
 
 c ^u" L 
 
 
 
 
 -7 
 
 V, 
 
 "^ ~ x 5 N J-.^ ^ r i 
 / ^ ^ -y^5 K ) l s 7 
 ^ \^' . 1 1._^ V/ i^s 
 

 *> ^ 
 .., \A^A f 
 
 ^ '-o u_ 
 
 i? 
 
 
 " fi 1 - 
 
 V V 
 
 W- It i) W 
 
 ())ie Ae o It (A 
 3 ' 
 
 -f 
 
 ^.< ?J..>.X^^/n^ 
 
t,/ 
 
 . >r 
 
 ' r -v.- 
 
 /\ " ' 1 
 
 ' \. 
 
 ' 
 
 1 /\ t - 
 
 - ' \ .~ 
 
 v- v 
 
 "*> ; 
 
 . 
 
 p x ^x. 
 
 L/^^ - ( 
 Mf^*^' 
 
 T 
 
 ^^^^ " -^.^r/^-^* 
 
IS 
 
 %^ J I V 
 
 \ / I ~~Xo J 
 
 fd .^ i ,<i-Y 
 
 U 
 
 1'H 
 
 mom o 
 
 
 ft <! 6 
 
 -^-^vX>V x ^ 
 
 TI 
 
 r 7 ^. . < -N _ 
 
 ^-C 'v *T 
 
 ^. > .rr. (TI v ) <. X- *v j ,^-^ _- / 
 
\ 
 -*- V 
 
 C ^ -j Q. . \^ i^ i / 
 
f'7 
 
 
 AUDI ALTERAM PARTEM. 
 
 ,- ' Vl ./V^C V .] 
 x 
 
 ^..% W-, 'N^NAx^/.^V.C. 
 
l 
 
 >- 
 
 (V 
 
 1 
 
 ^ 
 
 iv^ ^ .^. 
 
 
 V 
 
 
 J 
 
 J 
 
 
** 
 
 :/*. 
 Trt 
 
 fc^/""!/'- 
 
 ,-/<_/_; 
 
 ^^"/-) ( 
 
 No 
 
 (. ? 
 ^ 
 
20 
 
 VI 
 
 u ? 
 
 a. Hi 
 
 - ' / 
 
 / t.jr./ 
 
 v 1 
 
 r 
 
 \ x^ 7 '"w 
 
 I 
 
3.1 
 
 6 Ss,."^- 
 
 akciio r 
 
 1.0 
 
 T ""N ^~^~~ ~~ ' s i '^ 
 
 ^/ 
 ...^.rr^/CAv 
 
 k. 
 
 sr 
 
2.2. 
 
 
 
 
 
 v. 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 5 X/ 1 ^^ 
 
 V \ : ' 
 y I X ' 
 
23 
 
 b 
 
 n 
 t) 
 
 ericafj' 
 
 L, 
 
^V^-t~>^v-"/ 
 
 ^ l C- ^$ 
 
SL6 
 
27 
 
 T. L, 
 
 
 *> 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 *~^\ ' "~ 
 
22 
 
 V- 
 
 s 
 
 ' 
 
 / 
 
 V 
 
 -\/ 
 
 
 \, - v 
 
 r 
 
 f N N -:t-'.*S- ^ u r^l 
 
 1 ' 
 
 o>peeen of !|/nr. Lfauloe-n, of (j 
 '^\-\ 
 
 
2.9 
 
 >f 
 
 v/-^ v 
 
 A 
 
 V~^ 
 
 y^ 
 
 
 -7 
 
 ?$> 6- 
 
 ^r , 
 
 -t.^^D 
 
 *.- 
 
 \X ^\ f 
 
 T X' _ x V _ 
 
 ^* 
 
 L 
 
 t ^r 
 
 ' 
 
 " <. / 
 
 
 V. . 
 
 \ 
 
 ; > 
 
^Tc Jlyaw j-o 
 
 
O =- 4 
 
 "NO 
 
 V > 
 
 i 
 
 31 
 
 vA ? 
 
 i y ? 
 
32 
 
 
 
 7 
 
' ^ ^ r ^ ^"/ 
 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 -o 
 
J* 
 
 i, \s-\ %> ^~ v 
 
 1c ^ IV 
 
 '^1 ,^- 
 
 T> 
 
 <A<, 
 
 
 . ^ 
 
 , L 
 
 ru. 
 
 VI ~- - 
 
 v 
 
 v. 
 
v 
 
 x?( 
 
 V^._tV-.^ 
 
 c ^TVv, -\ L- ^ ^ 4 [5 v/: 
 
 > 
 
 /- s L 1 ( 
 
- 
 
 
 lv_ ^- V I > 
 
 H- > / 
 
 - ' 
 
 / 
 
 V 
 J T 
 
 M 
 
 - 
 
 N. "-V-/ 
 
 
 
 / f 
 
 / / 
 
VI 
 
 X C/6. q. _/ 
 
 ^ 7 /" , ' 
 
 " / " *t/ 
 
 -C 
 
 
 37 
 
 V 
 
 ^y z 
 
 r 
 
 ~r 
 
 
^r 
 
 " 1 
 
 L 
 
 1 *-y ~c ~f 
 
 V. ' " \_^ I 
 
 . * I V - , //T -7 
 
 cL, v -7^ 
 
 y -\j^__ / 
 
 u- \ */:.^< 
 
-\ * 
 
 ^ . } 
 
 . L a, 6" 
 ^ 
 
 A ^ 
 
 ^ o 
 
kc 
 
 f.-.~~^ 57 V r x_^ sr 
 
 ^ a. ' 
 
 \. 
 
 Lnarae io ine Jury. 
 
 A, .*^.. -k* x 
 
 \ 
 
 ~-Z~* 
 
 '/S... 
 
 <K ^> 
 
Ui 
 
 ' 
 
 >r>.> ~U c- 
 
 \ 
 
 ^- s 
 
 ^ 
 
 ia;*** 
 
 /\ 
 
 v^-^^ -~~\j >- L^ 
 
 "i" 
 
 ^^ ^\ ^ ^ /..^'4H/..r T r > ^ /^ v/ W* 
 
V 
 
 >/K c 
 
 L "\\ * ^f ^ ^ y "CA- r-7 NO- i 
 
 f v N3 -t ^-*~\ I I -- \ 
 
 J^~* L- -i^ v < -N .v.N s ^ * 
 
 1 "% 
 
 
 ^-^C 
 
 / 
 ~l*^ / ^ 
 
 "4^ *- r ^^T^ ^ 
 
 V ^/L^~-^ L -"-I ^'fj/'^"^^. -V. 
 
 /t,W*->O-..^ .r -v- s\(^ ^ ^.^>>i 
 
 CX^^^^ 
 
 S N ^ ' 7 Y^ ^-^ ^^T^S / - f/'-J --i'^l_^r\ 
 ^ 
 
 X 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^/' ^"C^, ^ 
 
 V^-jv-^-*..^ j ; &}/* 
 
 i^^> ^r 
 
 ^ 
 
 K 
 
AT 5 ^ t 
 
 c^lexanoer on 
 
 fry Pr>of. Francis Liefer. 
 V Y > ^ ] 
 
 X 
 
 <. 
 
 I 
 
 t 
 
 
 ^ 
 -/ 
 

 ^ _ \ N, _^ c .r: n 
 
 ; ^ ^-<7 i ^^ L - 
 
 -a- 
 
 ^ ...^. .^W f .- 
 
 / 1 
 
 s 
 
fr "l> V ^i ^ r ' 
 V* 
 
 u 
 
 / , 
 
 > 
 
 / 
 
 ^vt. f rv. 
 
 7 / \j> -V" V ._ 
 
 "/?/ ""7 v 
 
 r*^. , f s~* 
 
 ^ -^1 
 
 ^ 
 
 / 
 
 v- ^ v ^> \ru 
 
 s 
 
 .^- f 
 
 > 
 
 >t-=^ 
 
 ^ L,/^-^ 
 
 s4 
 
 yv 
 
 ^V 
 
 ^^- ^V 
 
 *rV 
 
 / 
 
 %"- - 
 
 ^/^/, 
 
 L^V-'..-^ ' 
 
 * /? ^_* 
 
 1 i...-rf..^ r ^/%jf ^ i-.*}. 
 x.^.^-.^.^.U 
 
 ' ^^~ 
 
 , f ..\..>. ^.jf 
 -x ^^ ? ^^ .r 
 
 ^ iv Y r 
 
 V fe^ / ! 
 
 ^ -L ^-5.. 
 
 r/ t- 
 
 -h 
 
 u 
 
 t>J 
 
 J^ 
 
 _^ -/ 
 
 ^ 
 ^/ 
 
 -^ ^-^^r 
 
 .^4^-^v* 
 
 --^r ^^\ 
 
 _ . 3.._^/ -^ V-^ 1 vl^.! Nj -) ^^ *^ -^ 
 
 -i i s^- /v (y ^ ^ ^-i ^ ^; 
 
 Y^/^^q/..^ _.^. 7 . l-/^^ 
 
' * '"V - J) 
 
 
 u- 
 
 5A 
 
 I- 
 
 r 
 
 
c 
 
 s. > 
 
 "V 
 
 ) : 
 
 A 
 
 
 
 , ' A.. ., 
 
 ( r 
 
 rv. 
 
c J 
 
 < 
 
 
 
 - 
 
 A, 
 
 
 
 ; 
 
 
 
 
 -V 
 
 o . 
 
PREFACE. 
 
 THIS, the fourth volume of the Series of Standard-Phonographic 
 Text-Books, is designed for reading and study, after the student has read 
 and copied the First Reader, and studied the Compendium thoroughly 
 from 265 to 280, inclusive, having committed to memory the word- 
 signs and contractions, and familiarized the list of words distinguished 
 by difference of outline or position. 
 
 But if it should seem too tedious to commit the lists to memory, be- 
 fore commencing to read these reporting exercises, the study may be 
 varied and rendered more attractive by alternating the study of the 
 lists with reading in this work. 
 
 But, of course, if the reading is commenced before learning the lists, 
 there will be required much more frequent reference to the Key ; but 
 in this manner many word-signs and contractions will be easily and 
 pleasantly familiarized. 
 
 But no method of stiuty can obviate the absolute necessity of acquiring the utmost 
 familiarity with the reporting lists. 
 
 And, in no case, should the learner allow himself, or be allowed, to 
 proceed to a second reading lesson, until the first can be read with the 
 utmost rapidity of articulation. 
 
 Considerable assistance will be derived before commencing to read 
 the Reporting Exercises, from the examination of the chapter on the 
 Characteristics of the Reporting Style. 
 
 As soon as a page or exercise can be read easily, it should be placed 
 in view as a " copy," and copied many times, with both pen and pen- 
 cil, until all the characters are familiarized and can be easily and 
 gracefully formed, and especially until the forms and position of word- 
 signs, contractions, and phrase-signs are carefully impressed upon the 
 memory. 
 
 The engraving is designed as a good example for close imitation, 
 both as to the size of characters and the spacing of word-;. A consid- 
 erable loss of speed will be incurred either by making the letters larger 
 than is necessary for a proper distinction between the different lengths 
 of strokes, or by writing the words a considerable distance apart. By 
 
52 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 making the characters quite large there is no greater distinction secured 
 between the different lengths, than when they are made of the size in 
 these exercises ; for, though it sometimes happens in small v.-riting 
 that a doubt arises as to the intended length of a particular stroke, the 
 same doubt is as liable to occur in reading large writing, and even more 
 so, for the loss of time resulting from wri'ing large necessitates a haste 
 and movement of hand which are rather inconsistent with making due 
 distinctions in length. 
 
 After an exercise has been copied several times, let it be written from 
 the reading of some other person, the rate of reading being such as to 
 require considerable effort to keep up, but not so fast as to require 
 illegible and incorrect writing, or to induce a confused, hesitating morement of 
 the hand -for the hand should move with regular and uniform tpeed. 
 
 Compare the "notes" thus made with the engraved exercises, ob- 
 serve all the differences, and write again from reading, and again cor- 
 rect ; and so proceed until the exercise can be reported correclly and 
 rather neatly at a speed of from 80 to 100 words per minute. 
 
 Then let these "notes" be read repeatedly until they can be read 
 with the utmost rapidity of articulation. 
 
 The student should next, especially if he wishes to become a reporter, 
 make a longhand transcript of his notes, precisely as if he were to fur- 
 nish it for publication. (See remarks on the reporter's longhand 
 writing, in the Phonographic Intelligencer, p. 183.) The Key, of 
 course, will enable him to correct any orthographical, punctuational. 
 or other errors in his transcript. He should persevere in this tran- 
 scribing until his transcripts coincide with the Key, though he should 
 not require of himself precise agreement therewith in respect of minor 
 particulars of punctuation. 
 
 Considerable time, and perhaps more patience, will be required to 
 finish one exercise in accordance with this plan. But he that rules 
 himself is greater than he that rules a city. Don't allow any impa- 
 tience, or wearisomeness of labor, to overcome you. Rule yourself in 
 this phonographic study in the very first lesson ; and, instead of diffi- 
 culties thickening as you proceed, the way will constantly become 
 more easy ; and you will acquire a habit that will be invaluable to you 
 as a reporter or in any other undertaking or profession ; and, what will 
 be of great moment, you will possess a thoroughly practical knowledge 
 of a highly useful art. 
 
 The learner should be examined by himself, or by his teacher, as to 
 the principles involved hi each exercise, after the manner of syntactical 
 examinations. 
 
 After this Reader has been thoroughly studied through in accordance 
 
PREFACE. 53 
 
 with the preceding directions, and through again and again, until every 
 page of the exercises can be written with a speed of from 150 to 200 
 words per minute, the student may write from dictation from other 
 books, etc. , in all cases of doubt as to the proper reporting outlines 
 referring to the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. (That work gives 
 an immense number of phrases and their signs, which it will be well to 
 write repeatedly from dictation.) This practice of writing from dicta- 
 tion, reading notes, and transcribing should be continued until suffi- 
 cient speed has been attained to commence the reporting of moderate 
 speakers. But whatever opportunities may be offered to report from 
 public speakers, the practice of writing from dictation should not be 
 discontinued until a speed has been acquired of from 150 to 200 words 
 per minute in new reading 
 
 To attain a speed greatly surpassing the powers of the Old (or 
 English) Phonography, or any modification that has been made of it 
 since the issue of the Hand-Book, all that is necessary is, that the 
 student, having commenced with Standard Phonography, shall per- 
 fectly familiarize it, not meddling with works on the Old or any Com- 
 promise system to introduce causes of confusion and hesitation. 
 
 The author's system of Phonographic Nomenclature is of great 
 service in the study of Phonography, by enabling conversation to be 
 carried on easily and understandingly between the student and his 
 teacher or fellow-learner as to phonographic outlines. It will be espe- 
 cially useful in the study of the Reporting Style. This system famil- 
 iarized describes word-forms and phrase-signs with perfect certainty. 
 It is as much better than the former circumlocutory descriptions (as for 
 instance, " p with an -hook and a circle on it and an w-hook") as the 
 modem chemical nomenclature is better than the old alchemistic 
 names for elements and compounds. For convenience of reference, a 
 resume [razuma-] of the system will be presented in a following chapter, 
 there being added to the system ag presented in the Hand-Book the 
 method employed in the Dictionary of naming ' ticks. ' Another chap- 
 ter will show the application of the system, by describing a page of 
 the engraving in the Reader, 
 
 In the Notes, the aim has been to answer every question, and to clear 
 away every difficulty, that the author supposed could present itself. 
 
 In the Notes, also, he has, in a comparatively few cases, pointed out 
 the difference between the Old and the New Phonography, and shown 
 the advantages of the latter over the former. He has also exhibited 
 the reasons for and against various phonographic devices, because the 
 student, in learning the reasons in any case, becomes possessed of use- 
 ful principles to guide him in analogous cases ; and these reasons being 
 
54: SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 understood, and a knowledge of them diffused, will perhaps save Pho- 
 nography from the mischief of attempted changes by persons ignorant 
 of the principles involved in the art. 
 
 Throughout this work, it should be observed 
 
 1. That the references, unless otherwise specified, are to the Com- 
 pendium, Part n. of the Hand-Book. 
 
 2. That the references are to the sections and their subdivisions, 
 unless preceded by p = page. Two or more references are separated 
 by a semicolon ; thus, 48 ; 150. 
 
 In making the selections for this Reader, the aim has not been to 
 make those with which everybody would agree, for that would be impos- 
 sible, but to make such as would afford as great a variety as possible 
 of styles of expression and thought (for the reporter must study styles 
 of thought as well as of expression), and embrace a variety of the 
 general subjects of public speaking, so as to introduce an extended 
 vocabulary, and thus prepare the student for ACTUAL reporting, by 
 causing him to familiarize a large number of the most useful outlines, 
 word-signs, contractions, and phrase-signs, and by acquainting him 
 somewhat with the conflicting thoughts which he must be prepared to 
 report. If any one should be disposed to object to these selections be- 
 cause he does not, perchance, find his own views represented, or because 
 be finds views expressed with which he does not agree, let him philo- 
 sophically reflect, that if he should seek to convince an opponent, it 
 could be done only upon the condition of a patient hearing which he is 
 disposed to refuse to the expression of opinions differing from his own, 
 in this instance even when the object of presenting them is not to propa- 
 gate any particular opinion, but to furnish the most useful exercises for the pupil. 
 
 ANDREW J. GRAHAM. 
 HBW TOES August IS, I860. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 PHONOGRAPHIC NOMENCLATURE. 
 
 1. THE names of the simple-consonant strokes are Pee, Bee, Tee, 
 Dee, Chay, Jay, Kay, Gay, Ef, Vee, Ith, Dhee, Es, Zee, Ish (sh writ- 
 ten downward), Shay (sh written upward), Zhay, El (I written down- 
 ward), Lay (I written upward), Ar (r written downward), Ray (the 
 upward r), Em, En, Ing, Way, Yay, Hay. 
 
 2. The circle for s or z, in order to distinguish it from the stroke, is 
 named Iss, where its sound can not- be conveniently spoken in one 
 syllable with the name of the stroke to which it is joined. Skay is 
 the s-circle and the stroke for k. Es-Kay, the stroke for s and the 
 stroke for k. Iss-Bee, the s-circle and the stroke for b. 
 
 3. The large circle is named Ses or Sez, printed either in a separate 
 syllable, or added to the name of a stroke without a preceding hyphen. 
 Thus, Ses-Tee, Chay- Ses or Chay'sez. 
 
 4. The loop for st is named Steh (e as in met), or the sound of the 
 letters si is spoken in connection with the name of the stroke to which 
 the loop is joined; thus, Steh-Tee, Steh-Pee, Star (sMoop and the 
 downward r), Chayst, Kayst, Enst, Wayst. 
 
 5. The loop for sir is named Ster. To distinguish it from the name 
 of another letter (Iss and Ter, or simply Ster), it is made to form, with 
 the name of the preceding letter, a single word, accented on the first 
 syllable. For example, En, Bees, and Kay form with the name for the 
 loop Ster, the words En'ster, Bee'ster, Kay'ster. 
 
 6. The brief sign for w is called Brief Way, or, in order to distin- 
 guish between the different facings of the sign, Weh, when facing to 
 the right, and Wuh, when facing to the left. When joined as a hook 
 to Em, En, Lay, Ray, the characters thus formed are named Wem, 
 Wen, Wei, Wer. 
 
 7. The brief sign for y is named Brief Yay, or, in order to distinguish 
 between the different directions, Yeh, when the sign opens upward, 
 and Yuh, when it opens downward. 
 
 8. The brief Way and Yay, when written in the vowel-places to in- 
 dicate a following vowel, are called we, ye, wa, ya, etc., the w and y 
 being printed with a small letter. 
 
 9. The tick for h may be called Heh, or named in accordance with 
 a plan, hereafter explained (23) of naming ticks, vowel-dashes, etc. 
 
56 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The dot for h may be called Hetch, or spoken in connection with the 
 vowels ; thus, he, ha, ha, etc. 
 
 10. The El-hook signs are named, Pel, Bel, Tel, Del, Kel, Gel (g as 
 in gay), Fel, Vel, Thel, Dhel, Shel, Zhel, Yel, Mel, Nel, Rel. 
 
 11. The Ar-hook signs are named, Per, Ber, Ter, Der, Cher, Jer, 
 Ker, Ger, Fer, Ver, Ther, Dher, Sher, Zher, Mer, Ner. 
 
 12. The back hook for in, en, or un, written at the beginning of Iss- 
 Per or Sper, Iss-Ter or Ster, and some other letters, is named In ; thus, 
 In-Sper=In-Iss-Per=Ins-Per, In-Ster, In-Sker. In-Iss-Lay=In-Slay 
 =-Ins-Lay. 
 
 13. The enlarged El-hook signs, t. e. , the Ler-hook signs, are 
 named, Pier, Bier, Tier, Dler, etc. See Comp., 175. 
 
 14. The enlarged Ar-hook signs, t. e., the Rel-hook signs, are named, 
 Prel, Trel, etc. See Comp., 175. 
 
 15. The simple, or group, signs with an Ef-hook, are named by pre- 
 fixing the sounds they represent to the syllable Ef, if this can be done 
 conveniently ; if not, add the sound of/ to the syllable-name of the 
 stroke ; thus, Pef, Chef, Ref, Plef, lief or Telf, Chref or Cherf, Prelf, 
 Plerf, Chlerf. 
 
 16. The simple, and the group, signs with the En-hook, are named 
 by prefixing the sounds they represent to the syllable En, or, if more 
 convenient, or better for distinction's sake, by prefixing the syllable- 
 name of the stroke to the syllable En, or to the sound of n, the accent 
 being placed upon the name of the stroke ; thus, Pen, Ken, Plen, 
 Chlen or Chel'en, Pren, Chren or Chern, Prel'en, Plern,. Chlern, Es'en 
 (not Sen=Iss-En), Wayn (instead of Wen, which is En with the Way- 
 hook), Yayn. 
 
 17. The name of a Shon-hook or Tlv-hook sign is formed by adding 
 the syllable Shon or Tiv, as the case may be, to the name of the 
 stroke ; thus, Pee'shon, Dee'shon, Ray'shon, Pel'shon, Per'shon, 
 Pler'shon, Prel'shon, Wer'shon, Rel'shon ; Pee'tiv, Dee'tiv, Chay'tiv, 
 Pel'tiv, Rel'tiv, Per'tiv, Cher'tiv, Pler'tiv, Prel'tiv. 
 
 18. The small hook for shon, is named Esh'on ; thus, Dees-Eshon, 
 decision ; Pees-Eshon, position, possession ; Perseshon, persuasion ; 
 Trenseshon, transition. See Comp., 197, 1. 
 
 19. The widened Em is named Emp or Emb. according as it repre- 
 sents mp 01 mb. 
 
 20. Lengthened strokes, doubled or trebled, are named by prefixing 
 the name of the stroke to the sound added by lengthening; thus, 
 Ing'ker, Ing'ger, Lay'ter, Lay'ther or Lay'dher ; Wuy'ter, Wcn'dhcr, 
 i'el'ther, Fer'dher ; Chay'dher, Kay'dher ; Chay'dherdhcr, Way 'dher- 
 dher. See Comp., 207 ; 264 ; 204, R. 9. 
 
INTRODUCTION. 57 
 
 21. The syllables ter, der, tlier, dher, Ler, ger, when they indicate 
 strokes, are commenced with capital letters, and are separated from 
 the name of any preceding stroke to which they are joined, by a 
 hyphen ; thus, En-Tor, entry ; Sen-Der, sundry ; Ver-Ther, over- 
 l,,. in ; Ll'-ijlier, feathery; Ing-Ger, angry. 
 
 22. The half-lengths are named by adding the syllable Et or Ed to 
 the sound of the full-length, except when it is more convenient, or 
 butter for distinction's sake, to add the sound of t or d to the syllable- 
 ., ,.i, .,i the full-length; thus, Pet or Fed, Bet or Bed, Let, Eld, Met, 
 Mod, Net or Ent, Ned or End, Art, Ard, Berd or Bred, Mert or Merd, 
 Pee'&hont or Pee'shond, Dee'shond, etc. ; Weint or Wemd, Wert or 
 Word, Plet or Pled, Tlet or Telt, Belt or Deld, Pret, Bret. 
 
 23. The dash-vowel word-signs, and similar small signs, may be 
 named by the words they represent, as 'all,' 'of,' 'to,' 'I,' ' he,' etc. ; 
 or names may be formed for them by adding the syllable oid (signifying 
 like, or resembling) to the names of the half-lengths which these small 
 signs resemble. Bcd'oid 1 is the sign for all; Ded'oid 1 is the sign for 
 already ; Kret'oid 2 is the horizontal and- tick with the Ar-hook ; 
 Peft'oid 2 is the word-sign for to with the Ef-hook. 
 
 24. Prefix and Affix signs are indicated by quoting them, thus, 
 'con,' 'com,' 'accom,' 'discon,' 'ing,' 'ingly,' ' bility ;' or, their 
 signs may be indicated by their syllable-names. 
 
 25. Enlarged Way is named, when opening to the East, "Weh'weh ; 
 to the West, Wuh'wuh ; to the North-east, Weh'yeh ; to the South- 
 west, Wuh'yuh. Way may be substituted for the first syllable of 
 these names, if the sign is heavy. Weh'wernt is the name of Rent 
 with Weh'weh joined as an initial hook. See Comp., 202. 
 
 20. Enlarged Yay is named, when opening upward, Yeh'weh ; when 
 opening downward, Yuh'wuh ; when the sign is heavy, ' Yay' may be 
 substituted for the first syllable of these names ; thus, Yay'weh. 
 
 POSITION. 
 
 27. The figures 1, 2, 3 are used to denote respectively the first, 
 second, and third position. The figure 4 is employed to indicate that 
 the letter after whose name it is placed is to be written to imply a 
 preceding to, according to the Comp. , 250, Eem. 2. Thus, Es 4 is Es 
 commencing at the line of writing, as in writing ' to say' in the Re- 
 porting Style. 
 
 LETTERS DISJOINED, OR CROSSING, ETC. 
 
 28. To indicate that a sign is to be written disjoined near the other 
 portion of the word, it is preceded or followed by a colon. En:Bcest, 
 indicates that En is to be written near, but not joined, to Beest. 
 
58 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 29. The dagger (f) is printed between two signs to indicate that the 
 character following it is to be written through the preceding one : 
 thus, ' EnfEf ' indicates that the Ef is to be written through the En. 
 
 30. By inclosing one or more letters (not vowels) in curves, it is indi- 
 cated that the writer may, if he choose, dispense with the sign or signs 
 for such letters. 
 
 KEY TO THE PRONUNCIATION. 
 
 As pronunciation will need to be indicated occasionally in the subse- 
 quent pages, the following Key should be observed by the student : 
 
 a, e, etc., long; a, e, etc., short ; u as in full, and as o in to; u as in 
 up; 33 as ai in air ; o as a in all; 6 as o in for, long ; a as a in ah; a as a in 
 art; a as a in ask; ra as oo in too ; dh for the spoken th, as in then; and 
 th for the whispered th, as in thin; zh for the spoken sound correspond- 
 ing to the whispered *A. () Accent; thus, ak'sent. (.) Syllable- 
 mark; thus, in.kwlr. 
 
 For ordinary purposes I do not distinguish between o and 6 ; a, a, 
 and a ; e and e ; simply because the different situations of these sounds 
 are sufficient distinction for ordinary purposes. In the Standard-Pho- 
 nographic Dictionary these distinctions are always carefully indicated. 
 
 EXAMPLES OF PHONOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION. 
 
 THE following paragraphs are designed to exhibit the application of 
 Phonographic Nomenclature, by describing p. 8 of this Reader. The 
 sign (:) may be read "near" when in the place of of, of a-n, of the, or 
 implied con, com, cog, and " disjoined," when preceding affixes or follow- 
 ing prefixes. 
 
 Net-Els- Dees-Pee-Jay:'ing' Geds*-Zed-Em Dhee 3 -Lays Dee 2 -Strcf 
 Petsoid-'-Ged-Ens Zee ? -Retoid Jel 2 -Jay Ith'-Ray En- Vent 3 Ketoid-Pet 3 - 
 Ef En '3Q Nel 2 15 Yeh'-Gay Bee'-Chetoid Ray*-Vee-Dcr Pce(i) 1 - 
 Sem-Ith Nerd'-Petoid-Ray:Slay> 'the' Dhen* Kay '-Ent-Pret: first' 
 Chay 3 :Jay--Enses Weh'-Chetoid Dee 2 -Em-Stershons:Jel--Jay-Es-Ens. 
 Der'-Sem-Ith Sded 1 Es 2 Chays Es 4 -Ens Iss 2 Dee 4 -Met Dhet'-Ray-Gel-Bee 
 Deeses'-Ted Ef* Ken t^-Lays- Jays Ketoid-I)ee :! -Ben-En-Bet Bee'-Vee- 
 Rays-Rayses:En'--Mcls Bef 2 Dee ? -Em Zee-Kret(ya) [to be readKret voc. 
 w ya, or kreat-] ; Tetoid* Ef--Skay:Vcnd'-Ket:' ing-a' Layter'-Ent- 
 
INTRODUCTION. Otf 
 
 Pret:Em-Zee--Kay Kent 3 :Kershon 2 Kred l -Chay 2 Sen 2 Men 3 Stars* 
 Plents 3 En'-Mels Ketoid-Men 2 Ems 2 Weh 2 Kret 2 Net'-Ket 6 Ith 3 -Yeh- 
 Gay Kletoid 2 Dhen'-Petoid 'com': Pees 2 : 6 Dee 2 -Ren-Lay Dees 2 :24 
 Ar ;3 -Iss Chay' Chetoid 2 -Ment-End-Dhet Sem-Ray 2 Per 2 -Pees In-Sem 2 
 Senter 3 -Pref-Ens:(a)Ish 2 Nen 3 Ens 2 -Tees Let 3 -Ted Tetoid 1 El?-En-Jet 
 Ketoid-En'-Jay-Ger Tetoid 1 Jel 2 -Jay Iss 2 -Dees-Kef En-Ters(a) 2 -Vet 
 Dher^-Zee Ketoid-Spet(o) ' Sem 2 10 Em-Lays 2 Skay-Wer 2 Lay'-Kay- 
 Chetoid Dees 2 -Kel Wer 2 Wei 1 Bedoid 1 Tees 3 -Det En-Dheedher 2 -Prets- 
 Gel-Bce " Zee 2 Lay'-Ef Ketoid-Let' Dher 2 -Rend(a) Ef 2 -Tee .Nel 2 Dce 2 - 
 Ith Ketoid-Drens 3 (a)Med'-Eetoid. Welters-Ings :Kay-Tee 2 -Kay-Es' ; 
 Ketoid-Chay 2 Tee3-Retoid Def>:End 2 Zee' J -Pent-Ret Bee'-Let Tetoid- 
 Kay-Ped 1 Bee '-Der(I) -Lend Ketoid-Elt 2 -Met (a)Ar 2 -Retoid-End:Kertiy2 
 Wuh-Kayi Bee 2 -Kay-Tetoid Senter 2 En-Chay 2 Iss-Ret-Plents Ketoid- 
 Ens-Mels Ketoid-Ef '-Nel Men 2 Ems 5 Weh 2 Kret 2 . ' ' En 2 -Petoid, Wuh'- 
 Ketoid-Dees-Gays-Ef En-Stens 2 Iss-Dhees 3 :Tee?-Ens-Tee Weh-Chay 
 Ith--Jay Per 2 :Sj)eeshons 2 Ar--Eld En-Def'--(I)Ens:Fels s -Ef-Ter. Spees 4 - 
 Dhet Wei' Bedoid'-Chetoid Jel-'-Jay-(e)Ar-Iss Wen?-Eft-Endher Weh 
 Pees 3 :' ing' Therdher 2 Em^-Ens Skcls' Ketoid-Wel' Bedoid > -Ray st : 
 Rays-Ith Zee 2 -Def 3 :' ing ' Steh-Tee 4 :Per 2 -Pee-Ray Ef 2 -Chetoid Rays 2 - 
 Dens:Men 2 Ketoid-Let'-Pers-Ray:Ka)--Es 2 Sem-Ray 2 Retoid 3 -Bee-Kerf 
 Ef 2 -Enst En' Ketoid-Chays'-El Kay-Pet 2 Tel" 6 Ith 3 -Yeh-Gay Wen'- 
 Chetoid Wer 3 Zce-Den En'-Skays-Uees Chef-Dee Lays 2 -Ar Kay-Pet 1 
 Kent-Lays 2 -Jays Pref 4 Ketoid-Dhet 1 Emses 2 En 3 -Chetoid Bedoid 1 Bet 3 - 
 Dhees Skays-Dees 2 Wer 2 Tetoid 2 Dent'-En Bet 3 -Dheedher Teftoid 1 - 
 Petoid-Ded En 2 Bet 3 -Tee Kay-Pet 2 Iss 1 En-Jay 2 Ems 4 . Retoid 3 Ef 2 -Kay- 
 Ish Wuh 2 -Bee-Chctoid Nen 3 Tetoid-Kay-Pershon 2 :Ter 3 -Jen Ketoid- 
 Ter 3 -Es-Eus En-Pref 3 -Ent:'ing' Schay 2 -Ray-Kreds:Ish-Em Fer 2 -Bee- 
 Ing In-Sker 1 Retoid-Pee 7 -Jays:Est'-Ray. 
 
 Ver'--Bed Ens ? -Chetoid Ef 2 -Kay:Tee 2 -En-Dee ' inter ' :Em-Ray- Jays 
 Em 2 -Ing-Perses Rel 2 Bee 1 Sen-Gay-En-Tee a . ' The ' ' cog ' :Nefc2 Bled 2 
 En-En-Ray 2 -Chet Ketoid-En-Stee=-Em-Let Ferdher 2 Fent 3 -Ens Sen^ 
 Breds 1 Wuh-Kay'-Ens Deeses 1 Ketoid-Embs-Let 1 . Jays ? -Ests Weh 1 - 
 Tetoid Sket 2 Dhet 1 Ishts'-Tee Ter 2 Kays-Tee 2 -Zee-Net Em-Berst 2 En 1 - 
 Skay-Em Vets' Fend 3 -Rays. 'The' !-Dees 2 :Schay 2 -Sket Vee 2 -En Lay- 
 ter*-En-Tef Efdher^ Tee 2 -En-Deeses-Tens Tetoid 2 Bred(e) 4 En'-Ketoid- 
 En Ketoid-Dhees 2 Bee'-Tetoid Skel-Jay--Lay Iss 3 (I)Em-Tee 2 -Bel Iss 2 - 
 Chetoid Efs 2 -Jay Sen 3 Bee 2 -Gets Per^-Jay-EniEfs-Ith Ray 2 ,Ens Bees- 
 Ard Embs-Lay 1 Ketoid-Det'-Kay. Tetoid 2 Chetoid :! -Kay-' we ' Way 3 
 Jen 1 Weh 4 -Dee Es--Ens. Chetoid 3 -Ken-' we ' Ray-iSlay 1 Es--Ens Es-- 
 Ing Ester 2 -En-Jcd Ketoid-En 2 -Petoid Retoid-Ef'-Ar Mer 2 Ester 2 -En-Jed 
 Dhen :! -Vee Es*-I'ees Jen' Ketoid-Dhees 3 Spet 3 -Chetoid Nel 2 Bred'-Ger- 
 Em Dhets'-Wer-DheeiAr 1 Ken'-Lay Bet 2 Tetoid-Ar' Em'-Gay Dee 3 - 
 
60 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC KEADEB. 
 
 Bay. Retoid '-Ens-Ray Es'-Ens Snet' Skef. Tee 2 -Dees-Net:Fen Tecs 3 
 En 4 -Sgay-Ment:Iss-Rel?:Fels--Ef-Ter Tetoid* Skays' Ein 4 -Bere-Chctoid 
 Enter' Sef 2 -Rens. TeeS-Pere-Dee Ketoid-Bee'-Get En'-Ea-Ens Kcnt 1 - 
 Lay-Vee. 
 
 CHARACTERISTICS OF THE REPORTING STYLE. 
 
 THE Corresponding Style of Standard Phonography contains, in germ 
 at least, nearly every principle of the Reporting Style. The latter is 
 distinguished from the former principally by the following-mentioned 
 characteristics. 
 
 I. By usually omitting the A'owels. 
 
 n. By the extension of the use of three positions for outlines. 
 
 HE. By additions to the word-signs and contractions of the Corre- 
 sponding Style. 
 
 By means of improvements in word-signs and contractions alone 
 (many of which improvements, however, are dependent upon the new 
 principles embodied in Standard Phonography) a great gain over the 
 Old or English Phonography is made in respect of speed. This specifi- 
 cation is inclusive of the general principles of contraction of Standard 
 Phonography, but exclusive of anything specified in the following 
 paragraphs. 
 
 IV. By substituting, for convenience of phrase- writing, briefer word- 
 signs for some of the Corresponding word-signsnamely 
 
 (1) By expressing He by a tick, whether standing alone or in phrase- 
 writing. This makes an important gain over the Old reporting st} le, 
 in which fie was expressed by a dot, or (as improved by the writer, for 
 convenience of phrase- writing) by Hay, the some as in the Correspond- 
 ing Style of Standard Phonography. This method of writing he secures 
 thousands of phrase-signs which were either difficult or impossible upon 
 any former plan of writing this word. See. in the Standard-Phono- 
 graphic Dictionary, the phrases commencing with He. 
 
 (2) By expressing How by the Hay-tick in the third position. This 
 makes a gain of fifty per cent, upon the Old Phonography in the ex- 
 pression of this word, and secures a large number of phrase-signs which 
 were impossible in the Old Phonography. See the phrases beginning 
 with How, in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 (3) By expressing / when standing alone by a perpendicular tick 
 
 L 
 
LNTKODTJCTIOiX. 61 
 
 (271) ; and when joined to a preceding word, by a perpendicular 01 
 horizontal tick (103, R. 1). This makes a considerable gain over the 
 Old Phonography, securing many valuable phrase-signs where none 
 were possible in the Pitman Phonography. 
 
 (1) Dy <:Apii;of.;iig You in phrase-writing by Ych whenever Yuh can 
 not be employe 1 at all, or without difficulty ; thus, I send you. 
 Retoid'-Send-Ych. 
 
 V. By implying 7b, followed or not by a-n or the (which are 
 by means of the context). 
 
 (1) Either by joining the following word to the preceding ; thus, 
 Ish'-Bee, wish to be ; Kred-Dhet 1 , according to that. 
 
 (2) Or, by commencing the following word where the word sign for 
 to would stop (i. e., so as to just touch the lower edge of the line of 
 writing), p. 130, R. 2; 260, b. 
 
 This single principle adds greatly to the speed secured by the Old 
 Phonography. 
 
 VI. By implying Of, followed or not by a, an, or the (which are sup- 
 plied by aid of the context), by writing the following word near or 
 joined to the preceding. This principle adds considerably to the speed 
 of the Old Phonography. This principle is also valuable on account 
 of its distinguishing, almost always, between of and /at the beginning 
 of phrases. 
 
 VII. By writing the present time for the past tense or time when- 
 ever a stroke or more can be saved thereby. 
 
 This principle makes a great gain over the Old Phonography. It 
 is a gene/al principle of contraction of Standard Phonography, not in- 
 cluded in specification III. 
 
 VIII. By using a large hook on Em, En, Ray for I. 
 
 This principle obviates many inconvenient forms of the Old Phonog- 
 raphy. 
 
 IX. By enlarging the small El-hook to add r, and the Ar-hook to 
 add/. 
 
 This new principle secures a great advantage over the Old Phonog- 
 raphy in respect of brevity, analogy, and distinctions. 
 
 X. By enlarging Brief Way and Yay. 262 and 263. This new prin- 
 ciple renders easy the writing of many phrases which by the Old Pho- 
 nography were written slowly and with comparative difficulty such 
 expressions, for instance, as the following : "If we can not do wh:it 
 we would, let us do what we can We were with difficulty What were 
 
62 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 you thinking What you would What you were You were You 
 would. See Phonographic Intelligencer, 198. 
 
 XI. By frequently prefixing you by a Yuh-hook, and by frequently 
 joining we by the Way-hook, even to certain straight lines, p. 167, 
 R. 2; p. 168, R. 3. 
 
 This partially new principle also obviates in many cases the slowness 
 and difficulty of writing phrases which are spoken with great rapidity 
 such as, " We can we can not we give we may be you do \< /u 
 do not if you choose if you desire if you wish if we can if we 
 can not." 
 
 By this principle many such phrases can be written much faster 
 than in the Old Phonography. See, in the Standard-Phonographic 
 Dictionary, the phrases beginning with Have you, If you, If we, Are you, 
 Cxause you, Because we, Can we, Can you, Could you, Shall you, May you, 
 You do. 
 
 XII. By lengthening the straight lines to add thr (and by the ad- 
 vanced reporter sometimes to add Ir, dr), and trebling them to add 
 thrlhr ; and also by lengthening Ing and the other curves to acid 
 dhr = there, their, they are, they were, other. See Dim in the Stand- 
 ard-Phonographic Dictionary. All this is new, with the exception of 
 lengthening the curves to add there, their, and they are. 
 
 The new part of this principle makes a great gain over the Old Pho- 
 nography. 
 
 By expressing dhr ( = their, there, they are, they were, 
 other ; see DHK in the Standard-Phononographic Dictionary) by a 
 heavy tick (272) when it can not be more conveniently expressed other- 
 wise. This frequently gams considerably over the Old Phonography. 
 
 XIV. By the frequent expression of all or will by an El- hook or by 
 enlarging an Ar-hook. This principle makes considerable gain over 
 the Old Phonography in many cases, by securing a condensed and 
 brief expression for many phrases which were written too slowly in the 
 Old Phonography, and by enabling the reporter to avail himself of 
 other valuable principles, as in writing By att, Bel 1 ; by all its, Blets 1 ; 
 by all (Jir, Beldher' ; by all (of) our, Bier 1 . 
 
 XV By the frequent expression of are, were, or owr-by an Ar-hook, 
 or by enlarging an El-hook. This principle makes considerable gain 
 over the Old Phouogiaphj, by rendering possible a condensed and 
 brief expression for many phrases which were written too slowly in the 
 Old Phonography, and by securing the advantages of other principles 
 
INTRODUCTION. 63 
 
 as in writing By our, Ber 1 ; by our other, Berdher 1 ; which are, Cher 2 ; 
 which were, Cher 3 ; which are there/ore, Cherdherf 2 ; which are had, Cherd 2 ; 
 which are of, Cherf 2 ; for all are (or our), Fler 2 . 
 
 XVI. By making it a general principle to add it, had, what, or would 
 (and occasionally, in the writing of the practiced reporter, at, out), by 
 shortening a letter. This very frequently makes a great gain over the 
 Old Phonography. 
 
 XVII. By using the Ef-hook on curves, both to express simple /or v, 
 and to express have, ever, fore (sometimes for-th), of, and the affixes ful- 
 ly -ness. This method frequently makes a considerable gain over the 
 Old Phonography. For example Lef-Kend, loving kindness ; Nef-Get, 
 navigate; Dhef-, they have; Emdherf 2 , may there ever, or may therefore; 
 Es'ef 3 , useful-ty-ness. 
 
 XVIII. By frequently adding than to comparatives by an En-hook, as 
 in writing more than, Mern 2 ; older than, Laydern 2 ; longer than, Indhern 3 ; 
 better than, Bet 2 -Ren. This principle frequently makes a great gain 
 over the Old Phonography. 
 
 XIX. By omitting to a greater extent than in the Corresponding 
 Style words which may be supplied ; as in writing more than one, Mer 2 - 
 Wen ; over and above, Ver"-Bee-Vee ; from place to place, Pels-Pels ; from 
 time to time, Tee'iTee 1 ; in connection with, En':Kayshon 2 . 
 
 XX. By the uses of the mode of expressing repetitions explained in the 
 Compendium, 276. This principle is very valuable to the reporter, be- 
 cause the repetitions for the expression of which it provides are usually 
 spoken with such rapidity that it was at least very difficult to report 
 them by the Old Phonography. See an instance of this on p. 20 of 
 this Reader, line 17, where Standard Phonography gains over the Old 
 Phonography in writing what would be spoken in two seconds seven 
 strokes and three liftings of the pen. 
 
 XXI. By the extensive use of phrase-writing. See, and carefully 
 study, the Compendium from 244-246 inclusive. 
 
 The following rather inelegant yet forcible statement of the advan- 
 tages of phrase- writing is commended to the reader's attention : 
 
 " Phraseography is of special importance to the reporter. Whatever 
 may be the amount of his practice, the reporter will sometimes find 
 himself engaged in a chase with the speaker ; [.] it is then that the 
 use of this principle will be felt and appreciated, [;] for [,] perhaps a 
 single convenient phraseograph [phraseograrn] will bring him, as with 
 a bound, close up to the speaker." 
 
Oi 8ECOKD STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC EEADER. 
 
 Standard Phonography, by its new principles of writing, independent 
 of its peculiar powers of phrase-writing, renders the s]Krt.nle <;f "a 
 chase with the speaker" far less necessary than with the OKI I J hoiu,g- 
 raphy ; and, by furnishing in abundance those convenient phrase-sijrns 
 which "bring the writer, as with a bound, close up to the speaker," 
 and which in the Old Phonography were frequently absent when most 
 needed, enables the reporter to keep pace with the spea/ .er, and places 
 the reporting ability within the reach c thousands rho otherwise 
 could not attain it. 
 
 Standard Phonography, by many of its lew principles, greatly facili- 
 tates phrase-writing ; and it is fully ada^d to the easy expression of 
 frequent and rapidly-spoken phrases of ordinary speaking, which by 
 the Old Phonography were often written with great comparative slow- 
 ness. Many phrases are of frequent occurrence in public speaking, 
 especially if extemporaneous, which rarely occur in books ; and a sys- 
 tem of shorthand, when applied to the writing of the language of 
 elaborate compositions, might seem sufficiently rapid for reporting 
 purposes, and yet prove very deficient or fail entirely when applied to 
 actual reporting. Any one who will observe the wonderful phraseo- 
 graphic power of Standard Phonography, as exhibited in the exercises 
 in this work, must see that it is greatly superior to any other system 
 of shorthand, and that it is fully adequate to the requirements of actual 
 reporting. 
 
KEY 
 
 TO THE 
 
 REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 ANCIENT AND MODERN PHILOSOPHY. 
 PAGB 
 
 ') THE end which the great Lord Bacon proposed to himself 1 was 
 ^ the multiplying" of human enjoyments 3 and the mitigating 
 
 P<.OK 
 
 O i to himself. p. 130, R. 2. The caution of this Remark" Provided, th"t 
 *-* the, word no written would not f>e liable to J/e mistaken for some other word 
 in the third position" may be complied with in respect of horizontals by writing 
 them, for the fourth position (i. e., to imply to), clos-e against ihe lower edge of the 
 line ; and, for the third position, a little below the line. See an example of the 
 third and Ihe fourth posiiion, in accordance with this plan, in the bottom line of 
 p. 8 "new securities 3 to-the-mariner 4 ." It matters little, however, if there Is no 
 distinciion made between the third and the fourth position; for reference to the 
 context will usually determine, at once, whether or not to was meant to be implied. 
 
 2 multiplying of human enjoyments. Melt 2 as a word-sign for multi- 
 ply-'ed, multitude, is nearly three times as fast as the old forms, Em-Let-Pel, Em-Let- 
 Pled, and Em-Let-Ted. This gain is, of course, dependent upon the new principle 
 of writing a large initial hook on En, En, Eay, for I. Experience shows that a 
 large initial hook may be written as readily at least as a large final one. The Old 
 Phonogr.-iphy prohibited the shortening of a large-hook letter, but there was no 
 sufficient reason for such prohibition. The shorten ing of large-hook letters obviates 
 many difficult or needlessly long outlines of the Old Phonography, and constitutes 
 one of the valuable and characteristic features of Standard Phonography. (b) A 
 little practice will show any one who may think that a large initial hook Is difficult, 
 thnl it is so for just the same reason that the making of Pee or Gay is difficult to the 
 beginner namely, thai it is new. 
 
 3 of human enjoyments. The implying of <yby writing the following word 
 near the preceding, which is a novel feature of Standard Phonography, secuies the 
 advantage of leaving the following word in its proper position, and thus sidding to 
 legibility, as well for this cause as by usually securing a different indication of / 
 and Of at the beginning of phrase-sinns. " Of human enjoyments" expressed by 
 the OH Phonography, Petoi J'-Men-En-Jay-Mcnts, not only requires an additional 
 stroke and angle (for angles of themselves consume time, and must be taken into 
 
66 SECOND STANDARD-PHOITOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 of human sufferings. The ancient* philosophy disdained to be* use- 
 ful," and was 1 content* to be stationary.* It dealt largely in theories 
 of moral perfection," which were so" sublime, that they never could 
 be 12 more than" theories ; in attempts to solve 14 insoluble enigmas, in 
 
 acconnt), but human must be brought out of its proper (third) position, and, of 
 cuur.-e, its legibility somewhat impaired. 
 
 < ancient See Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, under ANCIENT. The 
 Old-Phonographic outline for this word was En-Shaynt 
 
 disdained to be. 250, 2. The implying of to by the principle of this refer- 
 ence is, a* a general principle, a new feature of Standard Phonography. Its value 
 will be better understood as we proceed. The principles of implying of and to 
 have saved, in the first line of this exercise, three strokes and one lifting. 
 
 useful. See p. 63, xvi. of this Reader. 
 
 7 and was. The plan of joining awl by either a perpendicular or horizontal 
 tick was introduced by thf auihor. The rule of the Old Phonography was that and 
 might be joined by a horizontal tick only, and only in the Reporting Style. Of 
 course, the writing of such phrases as and was, and so, and many other phrases, 
 required the lifting of the pen where it is now obviated. 
 
 content. Con- is here implied by writing Tent under Zee. p. 112, R. 7, 6. 
 
 stationary. See Phonographic Intelligencer, p. 136, " The Shon and Tiv 
 Hooks." 
 
 10 moral perfection. 175; 245. See p. 61, ix. of this Reader. 
 
 Ji which were so. See p. 62, xiv. of this work. The pri>iciplel mean 
 much more than exceptional practices* single inntanc of expressing areorwere 
 by an Ar-liook, is a novel feature of Standard Phonography ; and so also, conse- 
 quently, tbe method of distinguishing between which are, which were; etich are, 
 such were, etc. The phrase which were so would have been written by the Old 
 Phonography Chay 8 Well 2 Es 2 ; i. e., would have required one character and two 
 liftings of the pen more than the Standard-Phonographic expre^8ion. 
 
 is tlnt they never could be. 245. The advantage of a good word-sign 
 or contraction is not simply in the saving of strokes, but also in securing greater 
 powers of plirEst-vrriting. To illustrate the Standard-Phonographic word-sign 
 for never not only saves in this instance one of the slowest kind of strokes (a heavy 
 curve), but also secures a phrase-sign here which otherwise would have been im- 
 possible. 
 
 " more than. See p. 63, xvii. of this Reader. 
 
 " to solve.- () As the first stroke of solve is not horizontal nor descending, to 
 can not be implied as in w riling to himself and to (the) attainment (see line 8, p. 8) ; 
 for, if [ss were written on the line, the word would be in the second position ; and 
 if writ'en below the line, in the third position. (1>) I have in my own reporting 
 tried the plan, in such cases, of omitting to not implying ir, but leaving it to bo 
 supplied by reference to the context. This is not entirely without difficulty. For 
 this reason, and considering thai it is better in some cases to write to than to imply 
 it (as. for instance, in writing io ai!, to mi*-), I returned to the plan of writing to in 
 uch cases also as to 8' foe, to e'ir. (c) To might be implied, however, in such 
 cases by writing the following word Da* tAe proce4ituj ; thus Fn Tee--Emt*:Blay 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 67 
 
 exhortations to the attainment" of unattainable frames of mind. 18 It 
 could not condescend to the humble office of ministering to the com- 
 fort of human beings. 17 All the schools regarded 18 that office as de- 
 grading, some censured it as immoral. Once, indeed, Posidonius, a 
 distinguished writer of the age of Cicero 18 and Cassar, so far forgot him- 
 self as to enumerate among the humbler 20 blessings which mankind 
 owed to philosophy, the discovery of the principle of the arch, and the 
 introduction of the use of metals. This eulogy 41 was considered as an 
 afl'ront, 33 and was taken up with proper spirit. Seneca vehemently 
 
 Vee, in attempt? to solve. But I do not know or think that this plan would be 
 without difficulty, (d) It is well, however, when some phrase beginning with to is 
 occurring frequently, even if to would usually be expressed in writing such phrase, 
 to save the stroke either by absolutely omitting to, or by implying it by writing the 
 following word near the preceding. 
 
 i* to the attainment. A distinction should be made between supplying 
 and implying. In this phrase, only To is implied ; but whether a-n or the follows 
 the to or not is a matter to be determined by reference to the context. T!ie, in 
 this phrase, therefore, is to be supplied. 250, 3. 
 
 frames of mind. See p. 61, vi. of this Eeader 
 
 " to the comfort of human brings. The advamage of using, as in the 
 Reporting Style of Standard Phonography, the principle of proximity to imply of 
 only, and leaving a following a-n or the to be supplied instead of implying, as in 
 the Old Phonography, of the is the saving, in a vast number of cases, not only the 
 writing of Of iPetoid 1 ), and also a-n, but the avoiding either frequent liftings of 
 the pen or difficult junctions. 
 
 is regarded. See p. 61, vii. of this Reader. 
 
 is Cicero. The plan of writing a large initial ciiUe was first presented in the 
 Hand-Book. It makes an average saving of 14 per cent, (see Part V., 9) over the 
 Old Phonographic way of writing the syllables sya-, sus-, etc., in such words as 
 system, sustain, Sicily, Cicero, Catsar ; besides adding to the power of phrase- 
 writing, and, in many cases, securing greater analogy or convenience of form. For 
 example, consistent, Se~-Tent' ; inconsistent, or in consistent, Enses-Tent 1 (Old 
 Phonography, En':Iss-Est-Knt); sustain, Ses-Ten 2 ; in sustaining, Enses-Teu 2 : 
 'ing'; suspect {reporting style), Ses-Pee 2 (Old Phonography, Es-Spee-Kct) ; un- 
 tuxpecting, Enses-Pee 2 :' ing.' 
 
 20 humbler. 175. See p. 61, ix. of this Eeader. See, also, p. 186 of the 
 Phonographic Intelligencer. 
 
 2 1 eulogy The plan of joining Brief "Way and Tay as simply 10 and y is a 
 novel and valuable feature of Standard Phonography, securing legibility in many 
 cases where, to secure it in the Old Phonography, the w or y had to be written in 
 the vowel-place, necessitating a lifting of the pen which Standard Phonography 
 avoids. It is also valuable because of facilitating phrase-writing. 
 
 2" a an affront .The expression of a-n by a horizontal or a perpendicular 
 tick was originated by the author. Its value is well illustrated in this littlt" phrase, 
 In which two liftings of the pen, that would have been required by the Old Pho- 
 
68 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC HEADER. 
 
 disclaims these insulting compliments. Philosophy, according to him,** 
 has nothing to do with teaching men to rear arched roofs over their 
 heads. " The true philosopher does not care whether he has an arched 
 roof, or any roof. Philosophy has nothing to do with teaching men 
 the uses of metals. 54 She teaches lib 26 to be independent of all material 
 substances,"* of all mechanical contrivances." He labors to clear 27 
 Democritus from the disgraceful imputation of having made the lirot 
 arch, and Anacharsis from the charge of having 28 contrived the pott-r'.;- 
 wheel. The business of these philosophers was to declaim in praise 
 of poverty, with two millions sterling out at usury; 28 to racdit it 
 epigrammatic 80 conceits about the evils of luxury, in gardens which 
 
 nography, are saved. 71. And is expressed in Standard Phonography in the same 
 way. 69, B. 2. Please see also Note 7, above. 
 
 23 according to him. In the Old Phonography, Kred 1 was given tor 
 according or according to, anil Nerd 1 for in order or in order to. This is an ab- 
 solute proof that the plan of implying to, even by joining the following to the pre- 
 ceding word, was not & principle of the Old Phonography. In Standard Phonog- 
 raphy there is no lame and exceptional method t meeting an acknowledged 
 necessity (namely, of getting rid, so far as possible, of writing the frequent to); but 
 the Gordian knot is cut by implying to in accordance with a principle. See p. 61, v. 
 of this Reader. Notice the application of this principle in the very next phrase, 
 "has nothing to do," which would very probaVy have been written by any one of 
 the publishers of ihe Old Phonography, Iss 2 En-Iih--Ing Petoid--l)ce. f. t., with two 
 strokes and two liftings of the pen more than is required by Standard Phonography. 
 
 " men the uses of metals. The, when not connected closely with the 
 preceding word, is usually, in the author's practice, expressed by the dot ; though 
 it is allowable to join it to the following wo. d by a tick adapted to the position of 
 that word. For instance, "the uses" here might have been written Chetoid- 
 EgS-lM. 
 
 a5 The principle of joining u by a circle or by enlarging a circle is a novel and 
 valuable feature of Standard Phonography, p. 1S2, E. 2. It very frequently is 
 nearly equivalent to caving entirely the expression of ', and often amounts to 
 more, by saving the lifting of the pen. 
 
 s of all material substances. The advantage of the novel, Standard- 
 Phonographic principle of adding till by an El-hook to the vowel-dashes among 
 other signs, is partially illustrated in this case. Without it, there would be required 
 after making q^(Petoid') the lifting of the pen and the making of the heavy da.--h, 
 Bedoid 1 . The same gain is repeated in the very next phrase. See Standard-Pho- 
 nographic Dictionary, under OF ; and p. 62, xiv. in this Reader. 
 
 " lie labors to clear To is here meant to be implied by writing Kler in 
 the fourth position. 26:>, b. It is placed by mistake a little too near lalort. 
 
 " 8 of having. It is better in this case to add hating by the hook and dot 
 than to imply of and write Vee and the dot 
 
 * out at usury. See p. 63, xvi. of this Beader. 
 
 epigrammatic conceit = Oi-nerally, in the Beporting Style, the Kjr of 
 the termination -Mel-Kay may be omitted. 
 
KEY TO THE KEPOKTING EXEECI8ES. 69 
 
 moved the errvy of sovereigns ; to rant about liberty, -while fawning 
 on the insolent and pampered freedman of a tyrant ; 31 to celebrate the 
 divine beauty of virtue with the same pen which had just before writ- 
 ten a defense of the murder of a mother by a son. From the cant of 
 this philosophy, a philosophy meanly proud of its own unprofitable- 
 ness, it is delightful to turn to the lessons of the great English teacher. 
 The philosophy which he taught was essentially new. Its object was 
 the good of mankind, in the sense in which the mass of mankind 
 always have understood, and always will understand, the word good. 
 The aim of the Platonic philosophy was to exalt man into a god. The 
 aim of the Baconian philosophy was to provide man with what he 
 requi vs. 33 while he continues to be a man. The aim of the Platonic 
 philosophy 33 was to raise us far above vulgar wants. The aim of 
 the Baconian philosophy 33 was to supply our vulgar wants. The 
 former aim was noble ; but the latter was attainable. Ask the follower 
 of Bacon what the new philosophy, as it was called in the time of 
 Charles the Second, 34 has effected for mankind, and his answer is 
 ready. It has lengthened life ; it has mitigated** pain ; it has extin- 
 guished diseases ; it has increased the fertility of the soil ; it has given 
 new securities to the mariner ; it has spanned great rivers and estuaries 
 with bridges, of form unknown to our fathers ; 3 it has guided the 
 
 3i frertlmaii of a tyrant. Of a would have been omitted, had there been 
 room after the word freedman for the word tyrant. In the author's practice, of a 
 is omitted in such cases even, as it will be in some cases in the engraved exercises. 
 
 si with what he requires. 262. See, also, p. 61, x. of this Reader. 
 
 33 "Platonic Philosophy" and "Baconian Philosophy." This x- 
 ercise is a good illustration of progressive contractions. The first time a rather 
 slowly-written phrase or word occurs, it may be written without contraction ; but 
 if it s-hould occur Jigain, and (he reporter should anticipate its recurrence, he may 
 contract it to some extent. If it should occur frequently, he may contract it more 
 and more until the utmost brevity luis been attained. Such are i-pecial contrac- 
 tions. If I were reporting a lecture in which I anticipated the frequent occurrence 
 of the phrases, "Platonic philosophy" and "Baconian philosophy," I should 
 probably write Pel-Fel, or even Plef, for the former, and Bee-Fel, or even Bef, for 
 the latter. Be sure to read, in this connection, Comp., 237, It. 2. 
 
 34 Charles the Second. When several Es-sounds occur together, one or 
 more may be omitted to secure the advantage of a phrase sign. p. 194. E. 8. 
 
 35 mitigated p. 16S, E. 8; p. 61, vii. of ihis Reader. This novel principle 
 of Standard Phonography is of such frequent application that even if the gain 
 effected by it in each instance were slight, it would in the course of a single hour's 
 reporting save a great many strokes, and also many liftings of the pen, in writing 
 both wurds and phrases. 
 
 ss to our fathers. Pretoid 2 for to our is quicker than Ar 4 . It is also better 
 for phrase-writing. 
 
70 SECOXD STANDABD-PHONOGKAPIIIC READEB. 
 
 A thunderbolt innocuously from heaven to earth ; it has lighted up 
 ^ the night with the splendor of the day ; it has extended the 
 range of the human vision ; it has multiplied the power 1 of the human 
 muscles ; it has accelerated motion ; it has annihilated distance ; it 
 has facilitated intercourse, correspondence, all friendly offices, all dis- 
 patch of business ; it has enabled man to descend to the depths of the 
 sea ; to soar into the air ; a to penetrate securely into the noxious re- 
 cesses* of the earth, to traverse the land on cars which whirl along 
 without horses, and the ocean in ships which sail against the wind. 
 These are but a part of ite* fruits, and of its first fruit. For it is a 
 philosophy which nevei rests, which is never perfect. Its law is 
 progress. A point, which was yesterday invisible, is its goal to-day, 
 and will be its starting-post to-morrow. Edinburgh R&new. 
 
 LOGIC. 
 
 IN every instance in which we reason* in the strict sense of the word, 
 f. e., make* use of arguments, whether for the sake of refuting an ad- 
 versary, or of conveying instruction, or of satisfying our own minds on 
 
 4' power Poicer being a rather frequent word, it is well to write it Pee 3 - 
 Kay instead of Pee-Ar, to secure the greater speed of the straight line for r, 
 and also so that the analogous form, Pee'-Ref, may be used for the derivatives 
 PQIC e ful-ly-ness. To write power with Pee-Ar and powerful with Pee-Kef would 
 be a confusing change of outline. 
 
 2 Into the iilr If this were occurring frequently, I should write it En-Tee s - 
 (a)Ar. 
 
 3 noxious recesses. In the Reporting Style of Standard Phonography, 
 words ending in the sounds, ti7tux-li-ne*, are usually contracted, the contraction 
 ending with Ish ; and if the word should be long, and less of the word would suffice 
 to characterize it, even more may be cut off; as in Vreo. l ,perntctou^f-nMt, 
 
 < but n pnrt of Its. This phrase is but one of thousands of instances in 
 which the novel characteristics of Standard Phonography combine to effect a great 
 gain over the Old Phonography. This phrase in the Old Phonography would 
 have been written Tetoid" a a (heavy dot) PeeVRet Petoid'-Tees, nine strokes and 
 liftings of the pen. This phrase in Standard Phonography requires only four 
 ttrokes, i. ., it is twice as fast as the Old Phonographic expression. 
 
 we reason. p. 168, R. 3, b. 
 
 make. The full forms for make and take arc too long for the Reporting 
 Style; they aro, therefore, provided in Slandard Phonography with word-signs 
 Em 3 , make; Tec", take (Tee 3 , took). See phrases beginning with MAKI nj 
 TAKE in the Standal i-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 71 
 
 any point, whatever may be the subject we are engaged on, a certain 
 process takes place 9 in the mind, which is one and the same 7 in all 
 cases, provided it be correctly conducted. 
 
 Of course it can not be supposed that every one is even conscious of 
 this process in his own mind ; nmch less, is competent to explain the" 
 principles on which it proceeds. This indeed is, and can not but be, 
 the case with every other process respecting which any system has been 
 formed ; the practice not only may exist independently of the theory, 
 but must have preceded the* theory. There must have been Language 
 before 10 a system of Grammar could be devised ; and musical composi- 
 tions, previous to the science of Music. This, by the way, will serve 
 to expose the futility" of the popular objection against Logic, that 
 men may reason very well who know nothing of it. The parallel in- 
 stances adduced show that such an objection might be applied in many 
 other cases, where its 12 absurdity would be obvious ; and that there is 
 no ground for deciding thence, either that the system has no tendency 
 to improve practice, or that even if it had not, it might not still be a 
 dignified and interesting pursuit. 
 
 One of the chief impediments to the attainment of a just view of the 
 nature and object of Logic, is the not fully understanding, or not suf- 
 ficiently keeping in mind, the SAMENESS of the reasoning process in all 
 cases. If, as the ordinary mode of speaking would seem 13 to indicate, 
 
 * which Is one and the same. Tlie is omitted here so as to secure a 
 phrase-sign for a frequent phrase one and the same. 
 
 s to explain the. The plan of omitting Kay in many such words as ex- 
 plain, explore, expend, etc., is a novel and valuable chanacteristic of Standard Pho- 
 nography. It not only saves a stroke, but in many cases avoids a difficult junction 
 within the word, and facilitates joining wilh other words. 
 
 but must have preceded the. See 249; and especially 25 \ 3. 
 
 '"before a system of Grammar. See remark under ABOVE in the 
 Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. This phrase illusirates the advantage of the 
 reporter's availing himself of every judicious expedient This phrase could not 
 have been written without the use of three riovelties of Standard Phonography, 
 namely, the tick for a, the word-sign for system (depending upon the new principle 
 of employing a large initial circle), and the principle of implying of by joining. 
 
 11 futility Many words ending in -Ity are provided in Standard Phonog- 
 raphy with contractions by adding t by halving El, Lay, or an El-hook sign. This, 
 of course, saves a stroke and a half, and in most cases an angle. 
 
 11 where Its 221, K. 4. See, also, p. 63, xvi. of this Keader. 
 
 13 would seem. (a) This phrase-sign closely resembles In-Sem ; but I have 
 never found any confusion arising from this. (M Just as in the common orthog- 
 raphy, when we know that a loiter has several different powers, we readily discover 
 the correct power to assign it in the case presented, so in stenographic matters we 
 
72 SECOND STAND ARD-rHONOGBAPHIC HEADER. 
 
 mathematical reasoning, and theological, and metaphysical, and politi- 
 cal, etc., were essentially different from each other, i. e., different lands 
 of reasoning, it would follow, that supposing there could be at all any 
 such scienie, as we have described Logic, there must be so many differ- 
 ent species or at least different branches of Logic. 
 
 5 And such is perhaps the most prevailing notion. Nor is this 
 much to be wondered at ; since it is evident to all, 1 that some 
 men converse and write, in an argumentative way, very justly 2 on one 
 subject, 3 and very erroneously on another, in which again others excel, 
 who fail in the former. This error may l>3 at once illustrated and re- 
 moved, by considering the 4 parallel instance of Arithmetic,* in which 
 every one is aware that the process of a calculation is not affected* by 
 the nature of the objects whose numbers are before us ; but that (e.g.) 
 the multiplication of a number is the very same operation, whether it 
 
 nee3 apprehend no serious difficulty from different uses of the same thing, or from 
 slight differences between different things, so Ion ff as ice are aware of such different 
 use* or close resemblances, unless, of course, the luio of legibility is too much 
 neglected, (c) When Ihe same thing has different uses, or when things of different 
 uses or values are not readily distinguishable of themselves, the use* of values 
 must le so different that one could not reasonably lie substituted for Vie other in 
 uny case, (d) This principle saves the phrase-sign Wuh-Sem ; for, the use or value 
 can not, in any case, reasonably (/. <., so as to make sense i be substituted for the 
 use or value of In-Sem. Try it, (e) This also saves Prctoid, Pletoid, Peftoid, 
 Pentoid, Kletoid, Kefloid, etc., from the objection that they too c'osely resemble 
 Pret, Plet, Peft, Pent, Klet, Keft, etc., as thoroughly and completely as it saves 
 Petoid, Tetoid, Ketoid, Eetoid, etc., from the precisely similar and. no less valid 
 objection which, however, is not now made, though it was formerly thai they too 
 much resemble Pet, Tet, Ket, Eet, etc. 
 
 51 to all. This is the quickest expression for this phrase. See To in the 
 Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. See above, p. 71, N. 13, e. 
 i justly.- 237, E. 1, b; p. 168, R. 8. 
 > on one snfcjcct 250, 3, On. 
 
 * l>y considering the. The plan of implying -ing preceding a-n or thf, by 
 uniting the latter in the place of the '-z'np'-dot, originated with the author. How 
 admirably it works, and how valuable it is, will be seen in the course of reading 
 the reporting exercises of th's Reader. Isaac Pitman has proposed to use the dis- 
 joined tick at the end to signify the rarely occurring -ings. Tins plan supposes the 
 objection that -ing* written with a heavy dot can not be distinguishe<l from ing 
 written with a light dot. If this objection were valid in this case, it would be 
 equ-illy valid against the whole Phonographic plan of heavy and light dot* for long 
 and short vowels. See the same objection to the heavy dot for ac-com, disposed of 
 in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary under ACCOKC. 
 
 * arithmetic. See above, p. 3. N. 3D. 
 
 * Is not affected The word-sign for is not is here adapted to the position 
 of a/eeted for the sake of greater legibility. 246, 1. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 73 
 
 be a number of men, of miles, or of pounds ; though nevertheless per- 
 sons may perhaps be found who are accurate in calculations relative to 
 natural philosophy, and incorrect in those of political economy, from 
 their different degrees of skill in the subjects of these two sciences ; 
 not surely because there are 7 different arts of arithmetic applicable to 
 each of these respectively. 
 
 Others again, who are 8 aware that the simple system of Logic may lie 
 applied to all subjects whatever, are yet disposed to view it as a pecu- 
 liar method of reasoning, and not, as it is, a method of unfolding and 
 analyzing our reasoning : whence many have been led* (e.g.. the antlior 
 of the Philosophy of Rhetoric) to talk of comparing Syllogistic" rea&op- 
 ing with Moral reasoning ; taking it for granted that it is &>ble to 
 reason correctly without reasoning logically ; whicli LJ, in fact, as great 
 a blunder as if any one were to mistake grammar for a peculiar language, 
 and to suppose it possible to speak correctly without speaking gram- 
 matically. They have, in short, considered Lo<jic as an art of reason- 
 ing; whereas (so far as it is an art) if is <Ac" art of reasoning; the 
 logician's object beini^, not to I~y rk>;vr> principles by which one may 
 reason, but by which all must rsr.o^n, even though they are not dis- 
 tinctly aware of them ' to lay down rules, not which may be followed 
 with advantage out Li<"\i an not possibly be departed from 13 in sound 
 feasoning. F/ A >^ * E'Rments of Logic. 
 
 GEOLOGY. 
 
 THE Tfyrtr in which the geologists have been able to restore the 
 Mstov 1 the primeval earth, affords one of the most brilliant tri- 
 "> v i* > of the human intellect. Chemistry, botany, mineralogy, and 
 
 because there are. 272; also p, 6>, *ii. of this Reader. 
 
 who are. ITS, R. 5 ; also p, 62, *v. of this Reader. See these notes, p. 4, 
 T. 13, e. 
 
 many have been lcd.^249. 
 
 i syllogistic. Contractions for words ending in istic-al-aHy are usually 
 ormed in analogy with Ui contraction; for example, Ker 2 -Kayst, characteristic ; 
 fhest 2 , aiheistic-al. 
 
 " the 69, R. 1. 
 
 " aware of them. See p. 61, vi. of this Reader, 
 
 is departed from. 244, R. 8 (2). In this phrase, the peculiar Standard- 
 Phonographic principle of writing the present for the patt time whenever a stroke 
 r more can be saved thereby, not only saves a stroke and the difficult obtuse angle 
 formed by Per and Ted, but avoids the lifting of the pen which would otherwise 
 have been required. 
 
74 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 physical geography" have all" aided in unfolding this enigma ; but it 
 Is 1 * perhaps to comparative anatomy, which enables us to identify an 
 animal by a single bone, that the principal merit is due. A laborer, 
 in blasting a limestone rock or sinking a well, throws up a bone, which 
 has been buried there 17 for millions of ages : 18 it is looked upon \\ith 
 wonder by the simple rustic, who supposes that it must have been. 
 there 1 * ever since the flood ; but, to the eye of Cuvier, 20 that bone 
 suggests a whole animal, with all the conditions necessary for its ex- 
 istence. The mastodon, the megatherium, the paleotherium, and 
 pterodactyl are thus restored to our natural history, 
 
 6 and live again in our literature. Nor is this all ; for, where; 
 there are no bones to speak, the strata often contain the impress 
 of their 1 former inhabitants. In a thin bed of clay, occurring be- 
 tween two 2 beds of sandstone, this evidence is often preserved. The 
 
 i and physical geography. The word physical written alone would 
 not be contracted; and this contraction of it is to be regarded as falling under the 
 rule for special contractions. See these notes, p. 3. N. 38. Words ending in 
 offraphy-ic-ieal are usually provided with contractions ending in Ger, in analogy 
 with this contraction. See Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, under ADMONISH- 
 ED-ITION and APPREHENSIVE. 
 
 is have all. 178, R. 4; and p. 62, xiv. of this Reader. See phrases begin- 
 ning with HAVE ALL in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 is but It Is. This is distinguishable from Tees 3 both from the context and 
 from the fact that it commences slightly above the line, while one half of Tees 3 is 
 above the line. This useful phrase-sign was first presented by the Hand-Book. 
 
 i' which has been burled there. 264; and p. 62, xii. of this Reader. 
 
 is for millions of ages. The Did Phonography was defective in not having 
 provided any word.-signs for the frequently occurring numerical denominations 
 hundred-th, thousand-th, million-th. 
 
 i that It must, hnve been there. Thii phrase can be rendered per- 
 fectly distinct from must lie there, by writing -Ems-Ben-Jedoid ; but as the context 
 furnishes sufficient distinction, I prefer this mode because more rapid. 
 
 20 but to the eye of Cuvier. Cuvier is pronounced kii'vifi; ii being 
 sound No. 29, and i, sound No. 2, of the Extended Alphabet, p. 210, 25, No. 29; 
 p. 2 6, 24, No. 29; p. 201, 2, 2 ; p. 2 2, 7. (I) This expression of these six 
 words gains three strokes and one lifting of the pen over the Old-Phonographic 
 expression. 
 
 p i of their. Veedher 1 for of tUr, and Vet 1 for of it, are new and useful 
 
 " word-signs introduced by the Hand-Book. 
 
 2 two. As numbers are usually written by figures, as 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, I find !t 
 generally most convenient to write two in the same way ; and besides, Bedoid 3 is 
 not so distinct as 2; though, of course, in phrases, such as one or ttco, "Wen 2 -Bed- 
 oid ; two or threi, Bedoid a -Ther ; year or two, YeM-Bedoid ; the word-s.gn must 
 be ised. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. O 
 
 ripple-mark, the worm-track, the scratching of a small crab on the 
 sand, and even the impression of a raindrop, so distinct as to indicate 
 the direction of the wind at the time of the shower tliuse, and the 
 footprints of the bird and reptile, are all stereotyped, and offor an evi- 
 dence which no argument can gainsay, no prejudice resist, concerning 
 the natural history of a very ancient period of the earth's life. But 
 the wave that made that ripple-mark has long ceased to wash tb<^c 
 chores. For ages has the surface then exposed been concealed under 
 groat thicknesses of strata. The worm and the crab have left no solid 
 fragment to speak of their form or structure ; 3 the bird has left no 
 bone that has yet been discovered ; 3 the fragments of the reptile are 
 email, imperfect, and extremely rare. Still, enough is known to de- 
 termine the fact ; and that fact is all the more interesting and valuable 
 from the very circumstance under which it is presented. Prof. Aiisted. 
 
 EVIDENCE OF THE CIRCULATION OF THE BLOOD. 
 
 1. WITH the microscope, in the transparent parts of animals, the 
 blood can be seen in motion ; and if its course be attentively* observed, 
 its route may be clearly traced. 
 
 2. The membranes, termed valves, are so placed as to allow of the 
 freest passage to the blood in the circle described ; while they either 
 altogether prevent, or exceedingly impede, its movements in any other 
 direction. 
 
 3. The effect of a ligature placed around a vein and an artery, and of 
 a puncture made above the ligature ia the one vessel and below it 6 in 
 the other, demonstrates both the motion of the blood and the oourse 
 of it. When a ligature is placed round a vein, that part of the vessel 
 which is most distant from the heart becomes full and turgid, on ac- 
 count of the accumulation of blood in it ; while the part of the vessel 
 which is between the ligature and the heart becomes empty and flaccid, 
 
 3 "structure" ami ' discovered." The engraving, by presenting a 
 larger space than usual after these words, affords a good illustration of the manner 
 of writing by a good reporter to indicate punctuation. By leaving little spaces, in 
 this way, corresponding to the pauses of the voice, the legibility of the writing will 
 be greatly increased ; for frequently the greatest difficulty in reading notes ariaei 
 from misapprehending tlie punctuation. 
 
 attentively. 237, R. 1, &. 
 
 below it. 221, E. 4; and n. 63, xvi. of this Eeader. 
 
76 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGKAPHIC READER. 
 
 because it has carried* on its contents to the heart and it can receive i 
 no fresh supply from the body. When, on the contrary, a ligature is 
 placed round an artery, that portion of the vessel which lies l>< twcen 
 the ligature an 1 the heart becomes full and turgid, and the other por- 
 tion empty and llaccid. This can only be 7 because the contents of the 
 two vessels move in opposite directions from the heart to the artery. 
 from the artery to the vein, and from the vein to the heart. At th 
 same time, if the vein be punctured above the ligature, there will be 
 little or no loss of blood ; while if it be punctured below the ligature 
 the blood will continue to flow until the loss of it occasions deuth 
 which could not be unless the blood were in motion, nor unless th 
 direction of its course were from the artery to the vein, and from the 
 vein to the heart. 
 4. If fluids be injected into the veins or arteries, whether of the dead 
 
 7 or the living body, they readily make their way and fill th 
 sels, if thrown in the direction stated to be the natural 
 of the circulation ; but they are strongly resisted if forced in the oppo- 
 site direction. 
 
 Such is the description, and, with the exception of the first proof, 
 such the evidence of the circulation of the blood in the human body, 
 pretty much as it was given by the discoverer 1 of it, the illustrious 
 Harvey. Before the time of Harvey, a vague and indistinct concept kn 
 that the blood was not without motion in the body had been forined- 
 by several anatomists. It is analogous to the ordinary mode in which 
 the human mind arrives at discovery, that many minds should have an 
 imperfect perception of an unknown truth before some one mind sees 
 it in its completeness, and fully discloses it. Having about the year 
 1620' succeeded in completely tracing the circle in which the blood 
 
 because It has carried. 171,8. 
 
 * this can only be. p. 169, E. 12. 
 
 there will be. 175 ; 178, E. 4, b ; p. 62, xir. of this Reader. 
 
 H discoverer. p. 194, E. 7. 
 
 a hal been formed p. 169, E. 12. 
 
 1620. Throughout these exercises I have given the common figures for 
 dates, instead of Phonographic numerals; because if any one were not <r- 
 to make use of the Phonographic numerals, he need not b<- troubled to read 
 them; but any one who has studied them may substitute lliern for tin- flgnr.--: ;i* 
 for instance, Kays-Lay-Tee, for 1620. I have sometimes, in order the bi-tf.T to dis- 
 tinguish the Phonographic numerals, written a long Kay above the 1'ne, and writ- 
 ten the remainder of the date below; thus, Kay':Slay-Tee=lG2!). This correspond! 
 to tlie longhand pracdce, which is sometimes followed in these exerc set, of placing 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING- EXERCISES. 77 
 
 moves, and having at that time collected all the evidence of the fat;t, 
 with a rare degree of philosophical forbearance, Harvey still spent no 
 less than eight years in re-examining the subject and in maturing the 
 proof of every point, before he ventured to speak of it 4 in public. The 
 brief tract which at length he published was written with extreme sim- 
 plicity, clearness, and perspicuity, and has been justly characterized as 
 one of the most admirable examples of a series of arguments deduced 
 from observation and experiment that ever appeared on any subject. 
 
 Contemporaries are seldom grateful to discoverers. More than one 
 instance 6 is on record, in which a man has injured his fortune and lost 
 his happiness through the elucidation and establishment of a truth 
 which has given him immortality. It may be that there are physical 
 truths yet to be brought to light, to say nothing of new applications 
 of old truths, which, if they could be announced and demonstrated to- 
 day, would be the ruin of the discoverer. It is certain that there are 
 moral truths to be discovered, expounded, and enforced, which, if any 
 man had now penetration enough to see them, and courage enough to 
 express them, would cause him to be* regarded by the present genera- 
 tion with horror and detestation. Perhaps during those eight years of 
 re-examination, the discoverer of the circulation sometimes endeavored 
 hi imagination to trace the effect which the stupendous fact at the 
 knowledge of which he had arrived would have on the progress of his 
 favorite science ; and, it may be, the hope and the expectation occa- 
 sionally arose, that the inestimable benefit he was about to confer on 
 his fellow-men would secure to him some portion of their esteem and 
 confidence. What must have been his disappointment when he found, 
 after the publication of his tract, that the little practice he had had as 
 a physician by degrees fell off ! He was too speculative, too theoretical, 
 not practical. Such was Hie view taken even by his friends. His ene- 
 
 a long stroke (which may be regarded as a long 1) liefore the concluding figures of 
 a date. 
 
 * before lie ventured to speak of it It is sometimes well to vocalize a 
 word-sign in phrase-signs when there is seen a possibility of its being read for some 
 o her wrd. In this case, however, there is no such necessiiy for the vocalization 
 of Spee; for the context will not allow it to be read for anything but xpe-'k ; and 
 it is a principle of ^Standard Phonography to have the word-signs and contractions 
 BO constructed that they may be introduced in phrases witho'U their legibility being 
 seriously impaired thereby. 
 
 5 more tlian one Instance. 250, 3. 
 
 \viil<l cntise him to be regarded. In this case le is added to J,im bf 
 widening the Em, and to is omitted. To lie may frequently be added to Em in this 
 way; lor instance. KelVEmb, cluim-ed to be; Tee 2 -Semb, it seemed to be; Toe*- 
 Beinben, it seemed to have been. 
 
78 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READEE. 
 
 mies saw in his tract nothing but indications of a presumptuous mind, 
 that dared to call in question the revered authority of the ancients ; 
 and some of them saw, moreover, indications of a malignant mind, 
 that conceived and defended doctrines which, if not checked, would 
 undermine the very foundations of morality and religion. When the 
 evidence of the truth became irresistible, then these persons suddenly 
 turned round and said that it was all known before, and that the sole 
 merit of this vaunted discoverer consisted in having circulated the 
 circulation. The pun was not fatal to the future fame of this truly 
 great man, nor even to the gradual though slow return of the public 
 confidence, even during his own time, for he lived to attain the sum- 
 mit of reputation. Philosophy of Health. 
 
 RELIGION AND SCIENCE. 
 
 8 Nor less disparaging to God's wisdom, though less destructive 
 to his goodness, was the geologic theory, invented and put forth 1 
 in 1839- only fifteen years ago by the Rev. Dr. Pye Smith, in order 
 to reconcile the then common interpretation of the first chapter of 
 Genesis with the demonstrations of geological science. Dr. Smith con- 
 ceded so much to the science as to admit that our globe had existed 
 for countless ages, and had been inhabited by various races of animals 
 before Adam was created ; but, for the sake of vindicating a literal 
 interpretation of the Mosaic account of the creation according to 
 which sun, moon, stars, plants, animals, and man himself were created 
 not quite six thousand years ago, and all within the compass of six 
 diurnal days, of twenty-four hours each he maintained that some- 
 
 8 
 
 J and put fortl.-p. 1fi9, K. 16. 
 
 1839. It is always sufficient to write the last two figures of a date of the 
 present century, and simply the last figure of the present decade. These figures 
 may be preceded by an apostrophe: thus, '8J (1839), '0 (1S60): or by a l..ng stroke 
 like Cliay-Chay close to them. If a particular date or a few dates are frequently 
 occurring, sufficiently distinguished to the memory of the reporter by the last 
 figure, of course that figure would be all that need be written after the apostrophe 
 or the Ions stroke. (In such a case, though the Phonographic numtmls would be 
 more rapid, it is sometimes better to employ the common figures, because they 
 more readily catch the eye and are of advantage in finding a certain part of your 
 no'cs.) But this pln must not be employed (/' the reporter employs the plan of 
 leritiny only the limf Jigu e of n date of the pre-ifiit decude, UNLESS those dates 
 belong to the present decade, or if not. are so frw and so well known to the re- 
 porter that no confusion can possibly arise from writing only the last figure. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 79 
 
 where, perhaps in some central province of Asia no one knows its 
 latitude or longitude, and no geography or geology has discovered any 
 trace of it there was a spot, some "ten miles square," like the Dis- 
 trict of Columbia, where, while all outside of it, in the other parts i.t' 
 the globe, " was life and light, there reigned for a time only death an 1 
 darkness amid the welterings of a chuotiu sea; and which, at the 
 Divine command, was penetrated by light, and occupied by dry land, 
 and ultimately, ere the end of the creative week, became a center in 
 which certain plants and animals, and finally man himself, were cre- 
 ated." Now what a disgraceful instance is this of the tenacity with 
 which theological pre-conceptions are held, in defiance of philosophical 
 truth ! To suppose that while all the geological eras, one after an- 
 other, were passing through their immense cycles, and while all the 
 rest of the earth was advancing to a state of . preparation for the resi- 
 dence of man, a little "preserve of chaos," somewhere, should be 
 carefully fenced in, and choicely kept, until six thousand years ago, 
 when the work was there done in six days which it had elsewhere oc- 
 cupied countless ages to perfect ; and that Moses knew all about this 
 six days' work, but did not know about the other ; or, if he did know 
 about it, kept his knowledge to himself ! How efficacious would be 
 the union and co-operation of true religion and true science in pre- 
 venting such records of shame from being inscribed on the pages of 
 history ! 
 
 Everybody knows the effect of continued intermarriages among per- 
 sons related by consanguinity. The cognate blood, unenriched and 
 unstimulated from other fountains, soon breeds weakness, disease, and 
 imbecility. Just so it is with a sect that shuts out truth because it was 
 not embraced in the scheme of its founders. The ideas of such a sect 
 have no alternative for their continued existence but to breed in and in, 
 and this, by a psychological law as immutable as the physiological, 
 soon begets a progeny of faith erroneous, absurd, imbecile, and 
 idiotic. 
 
 But how can we woo Religion to wed Science ? How can we recon- 
 cile Science, so long estranged, and now, I fear, more estranged than 
 ever, to espouse Religion, and thus accept the only bridegroom that ia 
 worthy of her queenly beauty and her magnificent dowry ? 
 
 I answer, Science is not sectarian. It does not confine itself to any 
 segment of the circle of philosophic truth, but seeks to embrace the 
 entire circumference. At the present day a bigot in science can not live. 
 
 9 
 
 Its pure empyrean air either exorcises the demon of bigotry out 
 of him, or sends him and it after the swine of the Gadarenes, to 
 
80 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 be choked in the sea of oblivion. Let any man at this time, in ;my 
 scientific body or association in Christendom, defend any dogma on the 
 authority of his government, or by any decree of old council, or assembly, 
 or sanhedrim, against the facts of observation and the results of experi- 
 ment, and he is considered as blaspheming against the " higher law," 
 and his words accounted as " vain babbling." He can not be heard to 
 set up theory against fact, authority against experience, or the tradi- 
 tion of a thousand years against the demonstration of yesterday. The 
 only religion, therefore, with which science will freely and rejoicingly 1 
 consent to live and to work, is an unsectarian religion. Any other 
 union is forced and unnatural, involving discord, dishonest compli- 
 ances, and a suspension c f progress in the pursuit of truth. In fine, 
 any other union is not wedlock, but concubinage only. Science has 
 no creed or articles of faith which a man must subscribe before he can 
 be allowed to enroll his name as her follower, and to offer his accept- 
 able contributions at her shrine. Science welcomes all new truth, all 
 honest lovers of truth, and all honest inquirers after truth from what- 
 ever quarter they may come ; and the recommendation of her votaries 
 is, not that they have attached themselves to the school of Werner or 
 Hutton, of Newton or Laplace, but that they have not. The great book 
 of Nature is her Bible. Devoutedly she believes that, "'tis elder 
 Scripture, writ by God's own hand," and she suffers no one to shut it 
 np in order that he may open in its stead some philosophy of the Dark 
 Ages, or substitute for it some cosmogony of the heathen. And there- 
 fore science demands of religion that she, too, shall love truth 
 supremely ; not Talmuds, nor acts of Parliament, nor decrees of Councils 
 or Synods, and that she shall subject the old interpretation to every 
 new test which the continual evolution or unrolling of God's provi- 
 dence shall supply. 
 
 Science is the interpreter of Nature. It reverently inquires ; it list- 
 ens to know ; it seeks ; it knocks to obtain communication ; and then 
 all that it does is reverently to record nature's processes, and accept 
 them as true. And it demands that religion shall proceed on similar 
 exegetical principles. lion. Horace Mann. 
 
 OUR FRIENDS IN HEAVEN. 
 
 SUMMER is coming to us once more, with its flowers, and its grass, 
 and its waving trees ; and naturally' in our gladness our hearts turn to 
 
 Q i rejoicingly. See Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, Dn*, 4. 
 and naturally.- 261, E. 2. 
 
r 
 
 KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 81 
 
 our friends, scattered, driven hither and thither over life's prairie. 
 How few can we 3 draw to our side ! - how few surround us in our walks, 
 and gather in our home circle ! Yet we think of them in their disper- 
 s;r>ii, ,in d we send them letter or token, and receive from them from 
 .-.. :..i- pi.x-ang and token in reply. But we have friends to whom we 
 can send 4 no word, no token. We are certain that we still have these 
 friends. We call them ours ; and though the places that once knew 
 tly-ivi nov.- know them no more; though their name is effaced from 
 i.. :. ii ui living 
 
 j A nrmes, yet we call them still our own. Amid our summer 
 ' wreaths and joyous garlands, let there be 1 one to Our Friends in 
 Heaven. Are we not richer for their being there ? Are we not made 
 nearer to heaven by thinking of them there ? They have known us so 
 intimately ; they have known our history, our individualities, our 
 soul-wants, our aspirations, our trials. We have wandered with them 
 hand in hand through the tangled wood of life. We have lost our 
 way together. We have hungered and thirsted together, and looked 
 out 2 with weary and perplexed star-gazing, now trying this path and 
 now that ; and we have rejoiced together when our way has been 
 made plain before us. We have seen them wrestle and strive with 
 life, as we still must. We have seen their heart fail, and their hand 
 fall slack, as ours, 3 full oft, may do. We have seen them bear the 
 wrench and strain, the cruel agony which life forces inexorably on all, 
 in one or other* of its phases ; and, last of all, we have seen them at 
 the river of death. We have seen the heaven opening, and the angels 
 descending, and they have been borne from our sight, and as they rose 
 they were transfigured, and became as the sons of God. 
 
 s en ti we. p. 169, E. 12. 
 
 4 we can send p. 16, E. 8; p. 1C9, E. 12; p. 62, xi. of this Reader. It is 
 
 yory desirable that such phrases as tee (fire, tee can, tee could, which are spoken 
 a< rap'dly ;is / '.ire, I con, Icnulrt, should he as conveniently and rapidly written. 
 To atta : n this, I introduced the meihod of joining tee as a hook in a few such eases. 
 See remarks as to different uses of the same signs and of those nearly alike, in Note 
 13, p. 71 of this Eeader. 
 
 -j A > let there be. See Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, Dun, 3, a. 
 
 2 and loafeeel out. In this case the principle of writing the prsen '' ir 
 the past time is availed of. Were it not for this, there would hav.e been r< quired an 
 additional stroke and lifting of the pen. 
 
 ' as ours. 246, 4. 
 
 * In one or otlier. See Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, Dim. 
 
82 SECOND S rANDABD-PHONOGKAPHIC READER. 
 
 It is strange what a change is wrought in one hour by death. The 
 moment our friend is gone from us forever, what sacredness invests 
 him ! Everything he ever said or did seems to return to us clothed in 
 new significance. A thousand yearnings rise of things we would fain* 
 say to him of questions unanswered, and now unanswerable. All he 
 wore, or touched, or looked upon familiarly, become sacred as relics. 
 Yesterday these were homely articles, to be tossed to and fro, handled 
 lightly, given away thoughtlessly ; to-day we touch them softly, our 
 tears drop on them ; death has laid his hand on them, and they have 
 become holy in our eyes. Those are sad hours when one has passed 
 from our doors never to return, and we go back to set the place in 
 order. There the room so familiar, the homely belongings of their 
 daily life each one seems to say to us, in its turn, "Neither shall 
 their place know them any more." 
 
 Ah !* why does this bring a secret pang with it, when we know that 
 they are where none shall any more say, "I am sick !" Could only 
 one flutter of their immortal garments be visible in such moments 
 could their face, glorious with the light of heaven, once smile on the 
 deserted room, it might be better. One needs to lose friends to under- 
 stand one's self truly. The death of a friend teaches things within 
 that we never knew before. We may have expected it, prepared for 
 it, it may have been hourly expected for weeks ; yet when it comes, it 
 falls on us suddenly, and reveals in us emotions we could not dream. 
 The opening of those heavenly gates for them startles and flutters our 
 souls with strange, mysterious thrills unfelt before. The glimpse of 
 glories, the sweep of voices, all startle and dazzle us, and the soul for 
 many a day aches and longs with untold longings. 
 
 We divide among ourselves the possessions of our lost ones. Each 
 well-known thing comes to us with an almost supernatural power. 
 The book we once read with them, the old Bible, the familiar hymn ; 
 then, perhaps, little pet articles of fancy, made dear to them by some 
 peculiar taste, the picture the vase 
 
 Uhow costly are they now 1 in our eyes ! We value them not for 
 their beauty or worth, but for the frequency with which we 
 have seen them touched or used by them ; and our eye runs over the 
 collection, and perhaps lights most lovingly on the homeliest thing 
 which may have been oftenest touched or worn by them . 
 
 we wonUl fain. 262; and p. 61, I. of this Reader. 
 
 All I- As the words Ah t and Oh ! or ! are usually spoken quite slowly, I 
 prefer to write tbvm in longhand. 
 
KEY 1O THE KEPOKTLNG EXERCISES. 83 
 
 But there are invisible relics of our lost cues more precious than the 
 book, the picture, or the vase. Let us treasure them in our hearts. 
 Let us bind to our hearts the patience which they will never need 
 again ; the fortitude in suffering which belonged only to this suffering 
 state. Let us take from their dying hand that submission under afflic- 
 tion which they shall need no more in a world where affliction is un- 
 known. Let us collect in our thoughts all those cheerful and hopeful 
 sayings which they threw out from time to time, 1 as they walked with 
 us, and string them as a rosary to be daily counted over. Let us test 
 our own daily life by what must be their now perfected estimate ; and 
 as they once walked with us on earth, let us walk with them in 
 heaven. 
 
 We may learn at the grave of our lost ones how to live with the 
 living. It is a fearful thing to live so carelessly as we often do with 
 those dearest to us, who may at any moment be gone forever. The 
 life we are living, the words we are now saying, will all be lived over 
 in memory over some future grave. If we would know how to meas- 
 ure our words to living friends, let us see how we feel towards the 
 dead. Let us walk softly ; let us forbear and love ; none ever repent- 
 ed of too much 2 love to a departed friend ; none ever regretted too 
 much tenderness and indulgence ; but many a tear has been shed for 
 too much hardness and severity. Let our friends in heaven, then, 
 teach us how to treat our friends on earth ; thus, by no vain fruitless 
 sorrow, but by a deeper self-knowledge, 3 a tenderer and more sacred 
 estimate of life, may our heavenly friends prove to us ministering 
 spirits. 
 
 The Apostle Paul says to the Christian, " All things* are yours life 
 and death." Let us not lose either ; let us make Death our own, in a 
 richer, deeper, and more solemn earnestness of life. So those souls 
 which have gone from our ark, and seemed lost over the gloomy ocean 
 of the unknown, shall return to us, bearing the olive leaves of Para- 
 dise I Mrs. H. B. Stowe. 
 
 -j -j i from time to time. 250, 8, From to. 
 
 a too much. Some writers prefer in such phrases as too mucfi, very 
 muc7i, so much, to vrrite much in full. My own preference is to use the word-sign 
 (Chay 3 ), because writing a word in full part of the time, and part of tbe time by a 
 word-sign, tends to cause hesitation. 
 
 self-know ledge p. 113, E. 14. 
 
 nil things In the Old Phonography, the advantage of many phrase-signs 
 was lost from prohibiting many junctions which the practiced writer will find suffl- 
 elei tiy easy, especially by proper variations of the inclination of sloping strokes 
 mid of the curvature of curved ones. See Comp., 25. 
 
SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC BEADEB. 
 
 CREATION. 
 
 CREATION, in its primary import, signifies the bringing into being 
 something which did not before exist. The term is therefore* most 
 generally applied to the original* production of the materials whereof 
 the visible world is composed. It is also used in a secondary or subor- 
 dinate sense, to denote those subsequent operations of the Deity upon 
 the matter so produced, by which the whole system of Nature, and all 
 the primitive genera of things, receive their form, qualities, and laws. 
 
 There is no subject concerning which learned men have differed in 
 their conjectures more than in this of creation. " It is certain," as a 
 good writer 1 observes, " that none of the ancient philosophers had the 
 smallest idea of its being possible to produce a substance out of nothing,* 
 or that* even the power of the Deity himself could work without any 
 
 1 O materials to work upon. Hence some of them, among whom 
 -" was Aristotle, asserted that the world was eternal, both as to 
 its matter and form. Others, though they believed that the gods had 
 given the world its form, yet imagined the materials whereof it is 
 composed to have been eternal. Indeed, the opinions of the ancients, 
 who had not the benefit of revelation, were on this head so confused 
 and contradictory, that nothing of any consequence can be deduced 
 from them. The free-thinkers of our own and of former ages have de- 
 nied the possibility of creation, as being a contradiction to reason ; 
 and of consequence have taken the opportunity from thence to dis- 
 credit revelation. On the other hand, many defenders' of the sacred 
 writings have asserted that creation out of nothing, so far from being 
 a contradiction to reason, is not only probable, but demonstrably cer- 
 
 Is therefore. 264, E. 6, 2. 
 
 to the original. 7b is here implied by writing the tte-tiek (Petoid in this 
 case) in the fourth position. 260, b. 
 
 i good writer 164, R. 2. 
 
 * out of nothing The maxim of the ancients upon this subject was, K* 
 nihilo nVMfit Nothing from nothing springs. (I) In this case it is better to ex- 
 press of by the Vee-hook than to imply it. 
 
 or that. It is allowable to join or (Tetoid 1 to any following word to which 
 and would be joined by a horizontal tick (i. e., Ketoid). 
 
 -in i many defenders of the Here nfthe are omitted, although the fol- 
 ** lowing word is carried to the next line, an example which the reporter 
 may safely follow in almost all cases. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 85 
 
 tain. Nay, some have gone 5 so far as to say, 3 that from the very in- 
 specti )n of the visible system of Nature, we are able to infer that it 
 was once in a state of non-existence." We can not, however, here 
 enter into the multiplicity of the arguments on both sides ; it is enough 
 for us to k.;^\v what God has teen pleased to reveal, both concerning 
 himself rnd the works of his hands. Men, and other animals that 
 inhabit the earth and the seas ; all the immense varieties of herbs and 
 plants of which 1 he vegetable kingdom consists ; the globe of the earth ; 
 and the expanse of the ocean these we know to have been produced 
 by his power. Besides the terrestrial world, which we inhabit, we see 
 many other material bodies disposed around it in the wide extent of 
 space. The moon, which is in a particular manner connected with our 
 earth, and even dependent upon it ; the sun, and the other planets, 
 with their satellites, which, like the earth, circulate round the sun, 
 and appear to derive from him light and heat ; those bodies which we 
 call fixed stars, 4 and consider as illuminating and cherishing with heat 
 each its peculiar system of planets ; and the comets which at certain 
 periods surprise us with their appearance, and the nature of whose 
 connection with the general system of Nature, or with any particular 
 system of planets, we can not pretend to have fully discovered ; these 
 are so many more of the Deity's works, from the contemplation of 
 which we can not but conceive the most awful ideas of his creative 
 power. 
 
 " Matter, however, whatever the varieties of form under which it is 
 made to appear, the relative disposition of its parts, or the motions 
 communicated to it, is but an inferior part of the works of creation. 
 We believe ourselves to be animated with a much higher principle than 
 brute matter ; in viewing the manners and economy of the lower ani- 
 mals, we can scarce avoid acknowledging even them to consist of 
 something more than various modifications of matter and motion. 
 The other planetary bodies, which seem to be in circumstances nearly 
 analogous to those of our earth, are surely, as well as it, destined for j 
 the habitations of ration il, intelligent beings. The existence o intel- j 
 ligences of a higher order than man, though intinitcly* below the I 
 
 2 some have gone. 250, 3; p. 63, xix. of ihis Ecader. 
 
 s as to sny. As "to any'" would be written Es 4 , Iss 2 may be Joined, the same 
 as to Tee 4 in writing us to it, Iss 2 -Tee. 
 
 4 fixed stars This is a special contraction (237, R. 2), Ef standing for fxed 
 and the consonants of tstars being expressed by the Ster-loop and Iss. 
 
 infinitely. One great object kept cnns-tantly in view l.y me in my Phono- 
 graphic improvements was the removal of the disparities which existed in the Old 
 I'uonugraphy, in which the outlines for many frequent and rapidly spoken woida 
 
86 SECOND STAND ARD-PIIO^OGRAPHIC KFADEK. 
 
 Deity, appears extremely probable. Of these spiri* ual beings, called 
 angels, we have express intimation in Scripture. B;t the limitt of the 
 creation we must not pretend to define. How far the regions of space 
 extend, or how they are filled, \*e know not. How the planetary 
 worlds, the sun, and the fixed stare are occupied, we do not pretend to 
 have ascertained. We are even ignorant how wide a diversity of form.-, 
 what an infinity of living animated beings may inhabit our own globe. 
 So confined is our knowledge of creation, yet so grand, so awful, that 
 part which our narrow understandings can comprehend. 
 
 "Concerning the periods of time at which the Deity executed his 
 several works, it can not be pretended that mankind have had oppor- 
 tunities of receiving very particular information. Many have been the 
 conjectures, and curious the fancies of learned men, respecting it ; but, 
 after all, we must be indebted to the sacred writings for the best in- 
 formation." Different copies, indeed, give different dates. 
 
 "I O The Hebrew copy of the Bible, which we Christians, for good 
 1*-' reasons, consider as the most authentic, dates the creation of 
 the world 3944 years before the Christian era. The Samaritan Bible, 
 again, fixes the era of the creation 4305 years before the birth of Christ. 
 And the Greek translation, known by the name of the Septuagint 
 version of the Bible, gives 5270 as the number of the years which 
 intervened between these two periods. By comparing the various 
 dates in the sacred writings, examining how these have come to disa- 
 gree, and to be diversified in different copies ; endeavoring to reconcile 
 
 were fifty per cent, glower than speech, so that if the other words could be written 
 with the rapidity of speech, the reporter was obliged to fall behind in writing the 
 slow words, of which, for example, the word infinitely (En-Ef-Xet-El) was one, 
 requiring four slowly-written strokes, i. t., slow as compared with straight-lines. 
 For Injinite-ly, etc., Standard Phonography provides a word-sign which can be 
 written with sufficient rapidity ; and by providing appropriate word-signs (of which 
 this is, of course, but a single instance), by new principles of writing and new 
 sources of brevity, and by gen.Tal principles of contraction, "the rough places 
 hav been made smooth," so ihat the pen or pencil by an even movement keeps 
 pace with the speaker. For further illustration the old form Tetoid-Ketoid, when 
 employed for ichi/ and irhilf, was too slow, requiring two strokes for rapidly spoken 
 monosyllable; 1 , and allowing but little opportune.- 'or joining in phrase- ; l>ut wh<n 
 used, as in Standard Phonography, to represent two words, it is -ufliciently rapid ; 
 and the use of Tetoid-Ketoid in this way, and providing quickly-written word signs 
 for tcA.v (Way 1 ) and while (Wei 1 ), serve to remove a disparity of speed which must 
 have been felt by any Old Phono.'rapber who has had to write after a rapid speaker 
 such phrases as the following: Why ix it: iclujtu-e you; ichij were you; irliHe it; 
 nhiU thr ; lut n little time ;Tetoil 2 -Ketoid-Let-Tee) ; or a-n (Tetoid-Ketoid); 
 but I am (Tetoid 2 -Ketoid-Em). 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 87 
 
 the most authentic profane with sacred chronology, some ingenious 
 men have formed schemes of chronology plausible, indeed, but not 
 supported by sufficient authorities, which they would gladly persuade 
 us to receive in preference to any of those above mentioned. IMier 
 makes out from the Hebrew Bible 4004 years as the term between the 
 creation and the birth of Christ. Josephus, according to Dr. Wills and 
 Mr. Winston, makes it 4658 years ; and M. Pezron, with the help of 
 the Septuagint, extends it to 5872 years. Usher's system is the inost 
 generally received. But though these different systems of chronology 
 are so inconsistent, and so slenderly supported, yet the differences 
 among them are so inconsiderable in comparison with those which 
 arise before us when we contemplate the chronology of the Chinese, 
 the Chaldeans, and the Egyptians, and they agree so well with the 
 general information of authentic history, and with the appearances of 
 nature and of society, that they may be considered as nearly fixing the 
 true period of the creation of the earth." Uncertain, however, as we 
 may 1 be as to the exact time of the creation, we may profitably apply 
 ourselves to the contemplation of this immense fabric. 2 Indeed, the 
 the beautiful and multiform works around us must strike the mind of 
 every beholder with wonder and admiration, unless he be enveloped 
 in ignorance, and chained down to the earth with sensuality. These 
 works every way proclaim the wisdom, the power, and the goodness 
 of the Creator. Creation is a book which the nicest philosopher may 
 study with the deepest attention. Unlike the works of art, the more 
 it is examined, the more it opens to us sources of admiration of its 
 great Author ; the more it calls for our inspection, and the more it de- 
 mands our praise. Here everything is adjusted in the exactest order ; 
 all answering the wisest ends, and acting according to the appointed 
 laws of Deity. Here the Christian is led into the most delightful field 
 of contemplation. To him every pebhle becomes a preacher, and 
 every atom a step by which he ascends to his Creator. Placed in this 
 beautiful temple, and looking around on all its various parts, he can 
 
 -i o ' we may be p. 163, E. S. See p. 71, N. 13, of this Eeader. 
 
 " a this immense fabric. The Compendium. 27, 4, requires that a 
 circle between two strokes shall be written In the most convenient manner. In 
 Tees-Kay, Tees-Pee, Chays-Gay, Chays-Pee, the most convenient manner is to 
 turn the circle on the left-hand side of Tee and Chay. In such a combination as 
 Dhees-Em the question of convenience must be settled In favor of turning the circle 
 on the right-hand side of Dhee ; i. e., so that it comes on the concave side of both 
 Dhee and Em. Turning Iss on the back of Dhee seems to be very difficult 10 many 
 writers, and in rapid writing the Dhee becomes almost Vee-Ar. As to Ef-Sem, the 
 most convenient way of writing the circle is undoubtedly on the back of Et 
 
88 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 not help joining with the Psalmist in saying, "0 Lord, how manifoM 
 are thy works ! in wisdom hast 3 thou made them all." Suck's llttologi- 
 cai Dictionary. 
 
 THE AGE OF THE HUMAN RACE. 
 
 OF all the subjects which have occupied the attention of the scien- 
 tific societies* and journals of Europe during the past year, none have 
 excited so much interest as the geological evidence lately adduced from 
 various sources, tending to prove that the period of man's existence 
 upon our planet has been vastly greater than* that hitherto assigned 
 by Biblical and common chronology. It is also a very noticeable cir- 
 cumstance that, notwithstanding this subject has occupied the 
 
 W attention of the scientific men, generally, of Europe, daring 
 the past year, to a greater extent than any other, har.lly a 
 word relative to the evidence or discussion has found its way into any 
 American publication (book or newspaper) save the Annual of Scientific 
 Discovery. Whether theological prejudice or censorship has contributed 1 
 to this result, may be a question. 2 The following, however, is a brief 
 resume of the recent contributions which have been made 3 to our 
 knowledge on the subject : 
 
 Some two years ago or more, Mr. Leonard Horner, an English engi- 
 neer of wealth, and a member of the Royal Society, undertook, in 
 connection with 4 some French engineers in the employ of the Pasha 
 of Egypt, to determine the depth of the alluvial deposits in the valley 
 
 haU than made them. p. 163, B. 7. 
 
 * scientific societies. The word society is frequently represented in phrase- 
 writing by Es. It is rendered more legible in such case by writing it through the 
 last stroke of the preceding word. 
 
 greater than. 201, P.. 8; and p. 63, xviii. of this Reader. 
 
 Wi contributed.' Contri ' is here joined to Bet See this word In the 
 Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, p. 112, B. 8. Beeshun 3 is word- 
 sign for contribution. 
 
 n question. Ken 2 as a word-sign for qutstion-ed was first introduced In the 
 Hand-Cook. 
 
 which have been made. p. 1C9, E. 12. 
 
 * lit connection with. 250, 3, and example With. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 89 
 
 of the Nile. This river, as is well known, is remarkable for its annual 
 overflow, whereby a great part of all the arable land of Egypt is sub- 
 merged for the period of several weeks, and covered with a thin 
 deposit of mud, or sediment, which in geological language is termed 
 "alluvium." This action recurring with great regularity, year after 
 year, has produced on both sides of the Nile a strip of land of unex- 
 ampled fertility, and is also yearly* extending the delta or coast -line, 
 at the mouth of the river, farther and farther 8 into the Mediterranean. 
 In all places in the valiey of the Nile where the soil has remained 
 undisturbed by human agency, the annual deposits of mud can be seen 
 reposing upon each other with great regularity each successive layer 
 or stratum of sediment representing a year in time, in the same manner 
 as the successive rings in the trunk of a tree represent the wood-growth 
 of successive seasons. By counting, therefore, 1 the number of layers 
 in a given thickness of Nile deposit, we have an almost certain measure 
 of the time required for its formation. 
 
 Mr. Horner's researches were based upon these facts, and were made 
 by sinking a series of shafts, ninety-live in all, across the Nile valley, 
 nearly in a line with, and crossing the site of, the ancient city of 
 Heliopolis. In every case the alluvium was found to be regularly 
 divided into layers, and the average of many careful measurements 
 indicated that the rate of vertical increase of sediment was about three 
 and one half 8 inches per century. One of these shafts, in particular, 
 was sunk close to the great monolithic statue of llameses II., at Mem- 
 phis, and it was found that there were nine feet four inches of Nile 
 sediment between eight inches below the present surface of the 
 ground and the lowest part of the platforms o f which the statue 
 stands. Now this statue has been determined by Lepsius and other 
 Egyptian scholars to have been erected 1,361 years before Christ, and 
 this date, added to 1858, gives, therefore, 3,219 years, <.uring which 
 the above-mentioned depth of sediment accumulated, a rate of increase 
 in strict accordance with the* results of the measurements above 
 
 yearly. p. 118, R. 3, c. 
 
 farther nnrt farther. 276, c. See p. 63, xx. of this Reader. The beet 
 
 Old-Phonographic expression for this phrase is Ferdher Ketoid-Fcrdlier. 
 
 i <<>!!! U!ir. therefore. The Dher-tick is here written in the plnee of the / 
 -ing-ilot. to imply -ing ; and -fore is added by an Ef-hook. See Standard-Phono- 
 graphic Dictionary, DHU, 5. 
 
 8 3\. In writing fractions, the reporter may save himself the trouble of writi; g 
 the hoiizontal line, as in the engraving. 
 
 In strict accordance with the. p. 168, R. 10; 250, 3, and exar pie 
 With. 
 
90 SECOXD STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 1 
 
 alluded to. Below the platform of stone on which the statue rests, the 
 shaft was driven thirty-two feet ; but the lowest two feet consisted of 
 sand, thus leaving thirty feet of true Nile sediment in an undisturbed 
 condition beicw this foundation. At the base of this sediment, or at 
 a depth of thirty-nine feet four inches from the present surface of the 
 ground, fragments of pottery were found in a good state of preserva- 
 tion, and exhibiting some considerable artistic skill. Allowing now 
 that the thirty feet of sedmit^t covering these remains (below the 
 platform of the statue) were deposited at the rate of three and one 
 half inches per century, we have in the fragments of pottery a record 
 of the existence of man 13,500 years before A.D. 1858, 11,500 years 
 before the Christian era, and 7,000 years before the commencement of 
 the reign of Menes as assigned by Lepsius ; of man, moreover, 
 
 ~t t in a state of civilization sufficiently advanced to be able to 
 *-*J fashion clay into vessels, and harden it 1 by heat. 
 
 The fragments in question are now deposited in the British Museum, 
 and Mr. Homer, in exhibiting them to the Royal Society, expressed a 
 confident opinion that their antiquity was at least equal to the calcu- 
 lation above given. At any rate, it seems certain that they were 
 deposited in the place from whence they were taken long anterior to 
 the time wlien the workmen of Rameses II. laid the platform for the 
 reception of his statue, 3,000 years ago. 
 
 The results of Mr. Homer's investigations are, however, cast entirely 
 into the shade oy the discovery of flint weapons, spear-heads, axes, etc., 
 associated with the remains of extinct animals elephant, rhinocems, 
 bear, tiger, hyena, etc. in undisturbed beds of gravel, in the noith 
 of France. The announcement of this discovery was first made by 
 Mr. Lvans, an English geologist, to the London Society of Antiquaries, 
 in June, 1859, and suosequent researches have fully confirmed it. The 
 weapons and bones occur in what is- geologically known as the drift, 
 in the neighborhood or tne town of Amiens, 3 and present unmistakable 
 
 -i r i and harden It. 221, E. 4 
 
 *** 2 iii wlut ls.-22t, E. 4. 
 
 3 A miens Pronounced iircifi, (,) expressing the nasalization of the preced- 
 ing a. The i is represented by Yay, go as lo help give a suggestive outline. For 
 the stenographic represen (avion of nasalized vowels, see p. 203, 12. My usual 
 plan is in reporting foreign niuj^s, when their pronunciation isquile different from 
 the values of the letters intei-pret'.d l>y general Englixh tmalttgien, to write ths 
 word as thougli it were English ; for instance, tvriting Amiens as though it wera 
 pronounced Am'ienz. This, of oourae, is upon the supposition that the orlhogru* 
 pby is known. If not, you are, of cou_-*v, * write the spoken word. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 91 
 
 evidence of having been buried cotemporaneously. At the meeting 
 of the British Association 4 in September, 1859, Sir Chas. Lyell, who 
 has hitherto favored the received chronology respecting man's exist- 
 ence as a race, said that he fully believed that the antiquity of these 
 flint weapons was "immensely great as compared with the times of 
 either history or tradition ;"* and it is conceded by all geologists that 
 the continued existence of tropical animals is not possible in Central 
 Europe, under the present conditions of climate. The conclusion, 
 therefore, seems unavoidable, that there were races of men inhabiting 
 Europe at a period when this temperature was altogether different from 
 what it now is, and when the country was the natural habitation of 
 species of animals now restricted to the tropics. Life Illustrated. 
 
 THE INFALLIBILITY OF THE CHUECH. 
 
 THE infallibility of the Church of Home has been one of the great 
 controversies between the Protestants and Papists. By this infallibility 
 it ia understood that she can not at any time cease to be orthodox in 
 her doctrine, or fall into any pernicious errors ; but that she is consti- 
 tuted, by Divine authority, the judge of all controversies of religion, 
 and that all Christians are obliged to acquiesce in her decisions. This 
 is the chain which keeps its members fast bound to its communion ; 
 the charm which retains them within its magic circle ; the opiate 
 which lays asleep all their doubts and difficulties ; it is likewise the 
 magnet which attracts the desultory and unstable in other persuasions 
 within the sphere of popery, the foundation of its whole superstructure, 
 the cement of all its parts, and its fence and fortress against all inroads 
 and attacks. 
 
 Under the idea of this infallibility, the Church of Rome claims 1. To 
 
 4 British Association. If this should occur frequently, it might be written 
 Bretseshon 1 , and British Society, if occurring frequently, might be written Brets 1 , 
 the circle standing for society, the entire contraction transferred to common print 
 being "Brit. S." 
 
 6 Pn>f. Agassiz estimates the age of a human foot and jaw, discovered by him 
 in the coast limestone of Florida, from data furnished by the growth of the l.-md, at 
 18o,OCO years. [In an Essay contributed to Types of Mankind.] 
 
 In making an excavation at New Orleans, an Indian's skull was found beneath 
 four cypress forests, the production of each of which, it. is estimated, required 14.400 
 years. Allowing a period of 500 years' rest between the d Ifereut productions, 
 69,100 years must have passed away since the skull v as deposited iu the position 
 where it was discovered. 
 
92 SECOND STAXDAKD-FHOXOGBAPIIIC READER. 
 
 determine what books are and what are not canonical, and to oblige all 
 Christians to receive or reject them accordingly. 2. To communicate 
 authority to the Scripture ; or, in other words, that the Scripture (quoad 
 nos), as to us, receives its authority from her. 3. To assign and fix 
 the sense of Scripture, which all Christians are submissively to receive. 
 
 j f* 4. To decree as necessary to salvation whatever she judges so, 
 *" although not contained in Scripture. 5. To decide all contro- 
 versies respecting matters of faith. These are the claims to which the 
 Church of Rome pretends, but which we shall not here attempt to re- 
 fute, because any man with the Bible in his hand, and a little common 
 sense, will easily see that they are all founded iipon ignorance, super- 
 stition, and error. It is not a little remarkable, however, that the 
 Roman Catholics themselves are much divided as to the 1 scat of this 
 infallibility, and which, indeed, may be considered as a satisfactory 
 proof that no such privilege exists in the Church. For is it consistent 
 with reason to think that God would have imparted so extraordinary a 
 gift to prevent errors and dissensions in the Church, and yet have left 
 an additional cause of error and dissension, viz., the uncertainty of the 
 place of its abode? No, surely. Some place this infallibility in the 
 Pope or Bishop of Rome ; some in a general council ; others in neither 
 Pope nor council separately, but in both conjointly ; whilst others are 
 said to place it in the church diffusive, or in all churches throughout 
 the world. But that it could not be deposited in the Pope is evident, 
 for many Popes have been heretics, and on that account censured and 
 deposed, and therefore could not have been infallible. That it could 
 not be placed in a general council* is as evident ; for general councils 
 have actually erred. Neither could it be placed in the Pope and 
 council conjointly ; for two fallibles* could not make one infallible, 
 any more than two ciphers could make an integer. To say that it is 
 
 -j /> ns to the. As to, Speto'd", rests on the line; but as to the it distin- 
 l" guished from it by the circle's resting on the line and the extending below 
 
 the line. It is to the (t. e., tlte written in the fourth position to imply to) with 
 
 prefixed. 
 
 * In a general council Presuming that the phrase general council will 
 
 occur frequently, 1 make here a special contraction for it, upon the principles of 2o7, 
 
 B. 2. If I apprehended that it mig!it conflict with the contraction for ilenus Ch.ri.-tt, 
 
 I would distinguish it by placing it in the third position. 
 
 3 fnlllbleg. The reporter may frequently write ' We' by its sign ' Bee,' instead 
 of Bel, thus making a slight though desirable saving in some jases. C<i]ntl//e, for 
 instance, a contraction tKay-Bel*i of the Corresponding Slyl,-, n<ay be shortened a 
 little more in the Reporting Style by leaving off the hook, i. e., by writing Kay-Bee 3 . 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXKRCISES. 93 
 
 lodged in the church universal or diffusive, is equally erroneous ; for 
 this would be useless and insignificant, because it could never be exer- 
 cised. The whole church could not meet to make decrees, or to choose 
 representatives, or to deliver their sentiments on any question started ; 
 and less than all would not be the whole church, cud so could not 
 claim that privilege. 
 
 The most general opinion, however, it is said, is that of its being 
 seated in a Pope and general council. The advocates for this opinion 
 consider the Pope as the vicar of Christ, head of the church, and cen- 
 ter of unity ; and therefore conclude that his concurrence with and 
 approbation of the decrees of a general council are necessary, and suffi- 
 cient to afford it an indispensable sanction and plenary authority. A 
 general council they regard as the church representative, and suppose 
 that nothing can be wanting to ascertain the truth of any controversial 
 point, when the pretended head of the church and its members, assem- 
 bled in their supposed representatives, mutually concur and coincide 
 in judicial definitions and decrees, but that infallibility attends their 
 coalition and conjunction in all their determinations. 
 
 Every impartial person, who considers this subject with the least de- 
 gree of attention, must clearly perceive that neither any individual nor 
 body of Christians have any ground from reason or Scripture for pre- 
 tending to infallibility. It is evidently the attribute of the Supreme 
 Being alone, which we have all the foundation imaginable to conclude 
 he has not communicated to any mortal, or associations of mortals. 
 The human being who challenges infallibility seems to imitate the 
 pride and presumption of Lucifer, when he said, ' ' I will ascend, and 
 will be like the Most High." A claim to it was unheard of in the 
 primitive and purest ages of the church, but became, after that period, 
 the arrogant pretension of papal ambition. History plainly informs us 
 that the bishops of Rome, on the declension of the western Roman 
 Empire, 4 began to put in their claim of being the supreme and infal- 
 lible heads of the Christian church ; which they* at length established 
 by their deep policy and unremitting efforts ; by the concurrence of 
 fortunate circumstances ; by the advantages which they reaped from 
 the necessities of some princes, and the superstition of others ; and by 
 
 Western Roman Empire. Roman is here contracted to Ar. If this 
 phrase were occurring frequently I would contract it (in accordance with the prin- 
 ciple of 23T, K. 2) to Way 2 -Ar-Emp (i. e., "W. E. Emp.). 
 
 \vliteti they In writing this phrase-sign, Dhee must be joined, as in the 
 engraving, without an angle. If it should seem difficult, it should be the more 
 practiced, until it becomes easy. 
 
94: SECOND STANDARD-PIIOXOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 the general and excessive credulity of the people. However, when 
 they had grossly abused this absurd pretension, and committed 
 
 n various acts of injustice, tyranny, and cruelty ; when the blind 
 veneration for the papal dignity had been greatly diminished 
 by the long and scandalous schism occasioned by contending Popes ; 
 when these had been for a considerable time 1 roaming about Europe, 
 fawning on princes, squeezing their adherents, and cursing their 
 rivals ; and when the councils of Constance and Basil had challenged 
 and exercised the right of deposing and electing the bishops of Home, 
 then their 3 pretensions to infallibility were called in question, and the 
 world discovered that councils were a jurisdiction superior to that of 
 the towering pontiffs. Then it was that this infallibility was trans- 
 ferred* by many divines from Popes to general councils, and the opinion 
 of the superior authority of a council above that of a pope spread 
 vastly, especially under the profligate pontificate* of Alexander VI. and 
 the martial one of Julius II.* The popes were thought by numbers to 
 be too unworthy possessors of so rich a jewel ; at the same time it ap- 
 peared to be of too great a value, and of too extensive consequence, to 
 be parted with entirely It was, therefore, by the major part of the 
 Roman Church, deposited with, or made the property of general coun- 
 cils, either solely or conjointly with the Pope. Buck's Theological Dic- 
 tionary. 
 
 -j *", 1 for a considerable time. It is well to make use of a species of 
 
 * phrase-signs, like that fir this phrnse, in which, though tlirre is a disjoin- 
 ing, the pen moves but a slight distance before commencing the disjoined word, 
 that being made to overlap the preceding as a sort of indication that it forms a part 
 of the phrase-sign, just as in cases of necessary disjoining in writing a single word, 
 the disjoined part is made to slightly overlap the preceding one, the word being 
 thus distinguished from two words. See d ted (Dee:Ted), 218. If in writing this 
 phrase, time had oeen written Tee 1 , there would have been lost the time of a long 
 air-stroke, and, moreover, the writing would not be so legible; for, judicious 
 phrase-writibg adds to legibility. 
 
 cursing their. p. 62, xiii. of this Reader. 
 
 then tlielr I prefer to join there, etc., by the Dher-tick than to employ the 
 lengthening principle when it produces a form which needs vocalization to distin- 
 guish it from some other, though there is hardly ever any such necessity. 
 
 * was transferred. In accordance with the great principle of UNIFORM- 
 ITY of Standard Phonography, " contracted words ending in -fer-red are con- 
 tracted in like manner, as Refer-red, Bay 2 -Ef; Infer-red, En-Ef 2 ; Transfer-red, 
 Ter 2 -Ef. 
 
 * profligate pontificate.- 236, 4. 
 
 * Julius II. p. 194, R. 8 
 
KEY TO THE KEPOETING EXERCISES. 95 
 
 AUDI ALTERAM PARTEM. 7 
 
 [Abstract of a Lecture by Rev. Dr. Cahill, delivered in Brooklyn. Reported in 
 full by Andrew J. Graham.' 1 ] 
 
 DEAREST brethren, I am now going to deliver a discourse upon what j 
 wo call the Infallibility of the Catholic Church. By infallibility I do 
 nut mean that no man in the Church can fail, but that the doctrines 
 taught by Christ to His Apostles are still taught in the Church, and 
 will be taught throughout all countries and all time to the end of the 
 world. The infallibility of the Church, therefore, means this, that I, 
 having passed 10 my examinations in college, taken out my degree, and 
 being recognized and approved as a priest by my bishop, you may rely 
 upon what I tell you with the same certitude as if you heard Christ 
 
 i Audi alt era m pnrtcm near the other side.- A Eoman and Grecian 
 maxim of fairness and justice, which it would be well to adopt in modern tiroes, 
 especially as it may sometimes happen that after hearing both sides we may see 
 that the truth lies with " the other side," or only in part wiiii either, or with neither. 
 " Veritas nihil teretur nisi abscondi." Veritas visit et mord, fulsa festutione et 
 incerti.? valescunt. Tac. 
 
 8 A reporter having established in the only possible manner a reputation for 
 accuracy and impartiality, will find no difficulty, on account of difference of opinions, 
 in getting business from parties of opinions directly contrary to his own, if the de- 
 sire is to have a report at all. I do not say a correct report, for a garbled or mis- 
 representing report is no report at all. A misrepresentation of a speaker may be 
 made from putting words into his mouth which it is known he never uttered 
 words calculated to subject him to odium or ridicule ; which is morally nothing less 
 than forgery and libel. A misrepresentation may be made by taking from his words 
 clauses or sentences which serve to modify a proposition which, perhnps, without 
 such modification, would be repugnant to the common-sense of mankind, and de- 
 testable to himself. This also is moral forgery and libel. A misrepresentation may 
 also be made from throwing around the speaker such circumstances as will give to 
 the reader an untrue idea of the spirit or occasion of the speech. 
 
 No reporter who would keep his soul unspotted from such injustice, will either 
 seek or accept a situation as reporter upoii any paper whose conductors either ex- 
 pect, require, or (what is the same) allow M.e misrepresen ation of a speaker, unlexs 
 it be with the most distinct undemanding that he is not himself to be directly con- 
 cerned in such disreputable business, and that his reports are not to be altered for 
 the purposes of misrepresentation. Xo thoroughly honest reporter can take a less 
 sturdy position than that; for, by the same reasoning that a man has a right to 
 air because he has lungs, he has a right to think freely, and to utter his honest 
 convictions, because he has a xoul ; and the cause of Kverlas tinu Truth and every 
 elementary principle of human rights demand that if a paper report his utterances, 
 H shall do it fairly. 
 
 upon what. 21, K. 4. 
 
 i that I having passed. 237, E. 1, 6. 
 
96 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 himself speaking. You say that is 11 a large proposition; it is, but I 
 assert it boldly, with perfect confidence, believing it as firmly as my 
 existence. I have no more doubt of it than I have of the life, death, 
 or resurrection of Christ. I shall endeavor to fully convince you of 
 the truth of this proposition. 
 
 I commence by saying that Christ ought to make as good rules for 
 the soul as His Father has made for the body. You say Yes. 'ILe 
 Father has established all the laws of Nature, and I want to know if 
 auy of them have ever failed ? I think not. The sun has never been 
 one second too late in his brilliant course since the day he suid ' ' Let 
 there be light," and there was light. The tides have never ceased to 
 flow since that time. The seasons have never folli-d spring, summer, 
 autumn, winter. The great panorama over your head appears to 
 move with perfect order and regularity. All the plants arise in their 
 proper time, decay, and fall into their autumnal graves, and are lost 
 until another season ; and the yuung baby plant makes its appearance 
 the next spring, and perpetuates the memory of its parents, and goes 
 on through ages. It is the same with the bird and the fish tribes. 
 The animal tribes still carry out their 1 ' 2 instincts, and there they are, 
 family after family, 13 and so it will be through ages to come. The 
 vast variety of these philosophical phenomena are maintained with 
 perpetual order and beauty. Whether this country were Moham- 
 medan, Catholic, Christian, or Infidel, these laws remain the same. 
 Do what you will, you can not cause an eclipse of the sun. By hold- 
 ing up your hand, you may cast a shadow on yourself, but you can 
 not do away with the light of the great luminary. When you and I 
 have discoursed upon this subject 
 
 j O a favorite topic of mine I say to you : These are the laws of 
 "^ the Father over nature. Don't you think there ought to be as 
 good a set of laws for the soul instituted by Christ as these laws of the 
 Father for nature ? What would you think if two suns were made, 
 when only one 1 would be necessary ? I say No ; it can not be ; it 
 would cause confusion One sun is the proper plan ; anything else 
 would cause disorder. Everything seems to have been established to 
 be permanent to carry out his great philosophical economy. You 
 
 11 you say that Is a. p. 167, R. 2; p. 62, xi. of this Header. 
 carry oat their. See p. 63, xvi. ; p. 62, xiii. of this Reader. 
 family after family. 25 ', 3. 
 
 18 
 
 > only one. p. 169, R. 11. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 97 
 
 agree with me decidedly that these laws are the same, whatever may 
 be the people in the world ; these laws are beyond their reach. Now, 
 if the laws of nature are not dependent on the flitting opinions of 
 men, how can it be believed that Christ instituted laws for the soul on 
 any such basis, when the interests of the soul are so much more 
 important than those of the philosophical economy? One soul is 
 worth a million of suns yea, worth all the suns that could ever 
 escape from the fingers of the omnipotent Creator, because the soul 
 has on it His own image. More it has the blood of Christ upon it ; 
 and one drop of His blood is infinite in value. 2 As compared with the 
 infinite value of the soul, all that He can ever create must be finite. 
 I place that programme before you, and say that if you do not believe 
 what I am going to say to you, you can not believe one word of Christ. 
 
 Christ addressing His Apostles said, "As the Father sent me, so I 
 send you." 
 
 The first thing that strikes me is this sending. Was He not God, 
 like His Father ? Why does He acknowledge the inferiority of being 
 sent ? Could He not come Himself ? This is the language of the Holy 
 Ghost, the inbpiration of the Holy Ghost through the pen of John, 
 and every word of the text I shall read borrows omnipotent importance 
 from the source whence it proceeds. " As the Father sent me." The 
 Father gives Him a command, when one would suppose that He 
 requires no command. He receives this command in His mediatorial 
 office. Mankind having sinned, and being all sinful and cast out, how 
 could they recover their position ? How could finite men pay an infi- 
 nite debt? How could fallen man restore himself? He had sinned 
 against the Father, and heaven was bolted against him, and he was 
 excluded, a rebel, banished, having lost all his position. Being in sin, 
 he is not acceptable in the sight of God. But the Son of God beau- 
 tiful phrase said : Father, I know that the blood of oxen can not 
 please you, therefore I go. I will take man's flesh, his chains, his 
 rags all but his sins, on my bare head before you, and I shall 
 pay the whole debt. I go at the command from my Father ; I give 
 you what He gave me. He sent me into the world to preach against 
 sin, to advocate sanctity, to publish the gospel. I send you in the 
 same office. Then as to the authority so far as that goes, you have it. 
 
 No man can preach unless he has got a command from God the 
 Father. He sent Christ to discharge this duty, and He snbdelegates 
 the power He receives Himself. That is what I call the commission. 
 But you may say, where did these men who preach to you get the 
 
 * lii value. 246, 1. 
 
98 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 knowledge to discharge the duty? John xv. 15 : 3 " All things what- 
 soever I have heard from my Father I have made known to you." 
 Recollect, every word of this must be weighed in its atomic value. 
 I do not like to be speaking Greek to you, but {he Greek is, I will 
 make it* perfectly known to you. You have all knowledge. You 
 know that warrant is from God, so far as it goes. The commission 
 comes from the Father certainly, and the knowledge comes from the 
 Father. Was this knowledge got from schoolmasters? No. From 
 posture-masters? Certainly not. From elocutionists? Not at all. 
 They may advance the telling of the knowledge, but the whole of the 
 knowledge is from above. I send you 
 
 Wwith my own office, 1 give you my own knowledge exquisite 
 warrant, title. 
 
 Mark xvi. 15 : " Go ye into the whole world, and preach the Gospel 
 to every creature." He does not say, " I hope you will go." Impera- 
 tive mood "Go." Where? Into the whole world. "I command 
 you to go and preach !" He does not say, "I hope you will preach 
 it will be a good thing to preach;" but he commands to preach. 
 What ? The Gospel I have published. To whom ? To every creature. 
 You have my authority, fully given me by my Father. You have all 
 the knowledge you want for the purpose given from my Father. The 
 whole world is your diocese the field for your labors ; all mankind 
 your congregation. Go, therefore, ' in consequence of your commission 
 and ycur knowledge, into the whole world. Do not leave a corner of 
 the earth which shall not be the scene of your labors. The boundless- 
 ness of the whole horizon alone is the terminus of your exertions. 
 Preach the Gospel to every creature. The Church, therefore, is com- 
 manded to send missionaries all over the world. All mankind are 
 subjects of then* official duties, and all mankind are clearly called upon 
 to listen. The man who stays at home and reads does not discharge 
 his duty ; he is not listening to the official man. I do not care what 
 he reads. He is not in the order. We shall presently learn that it 
 will not do. We have now gone so far as to show the commission 
 
 > John chapter 15 and -verse 15. 275. 
 
 I will make It. I usually vocalize Em and Tee, when shortened for mate 
 it and take it, with a ; but I haTe always found them legible when the vowel hu 
 been omitted. 
 
 1 Q l 8 therefore 264, and E. 5, 2. 
 
 2 boundlessness. 232, 7, and E. 1, c. This mode of expressing -lesanett, 
 *nd also the mode of expressing -fuUne*s, were introduced by the author. 
 
b. 
 
 KEY TO THE KEPOKTIXG EXERCISES. 99 
 
 granted to us, and the knowledge that is communicated. "Go ye, 
 therefore, and teach all nations." You are to do the whole command 
 you are to teach them. Do not allow any one to teach them without 
 your control. You are the shepherds. Allow no man to feed your 
 lambs without your sanction. Do not ask leave of the wolf to visit 
 your flock. Do not ask permission of the wolf to go into your fold. 
 ' ' Go and teach all nations, teaching them to observe all things what- 
 soever I have commanded you." By this time I think everybody 
 begins to see that these men have the Gospel in their mouths, and 
 that all are commanded to go and learn of them. It would be absurd 
 to go and teach all nations, unless they were called upon to learn from 
 them, so that the command to go and teach all nations is the same as 
 commanding all nations to learn from them, for there can not be 
 teachers without learners they are correlative words. It may, per- 
 haps, be said that it is possible for me to go astray. No, 1 can not as 
 long as I hold my place under the bishop, and he is in communication 
 with the Pope. 
 
 Matt, xxviii. 19 : "Go ye, therefore, and teach all nations, teaching 
 them to observe all things whatsoever I have commanded you, and 
 behold I am with you all days, even to the consummation of the 
 world." Go, teach them ; I am not the teacher, but I am with you 
 while you are teaching. He does not say I am with you in the present 
 tense ; ''I am always with you, not a year or two, but until the con- 
 summation of the world." This language 3 is exceedingly important. 
 All mankind is your congregation, and the tenure of your office until 
 eternity begins until my Father seizes the pendulum of time, and 
 stops the last moment of time, and eternity begins. What has the 
 Father ever done like that ? Compare that with the sun, the moon, 
 and the tides. I expect that this rule will be as far beyond the 
 Father's natural philosophy as the soul is beyond the body. 
 
 Timothy ii. 7. St. Paul said to Timothy, a bishop, "Timothy, 
 I am appointed a preacher and an apostle, a doctor of the Gen- 
 tiles in faith and truth." He had before listened to Christ's doc- 
 trine. I may be asked, Did the Apostles understand Christ as speaking 
 to them ? Did they comprehend him perfectly in knowing that they 
 were appointed to this office? Yes. St. Paul said to Timothy, "I 
 am appointed a preacher [to the whole world, of course] and a doctor 
 in the faith and truth." The priests may make a mistake in politics. 
 Probably they will, 
 
 * tills language. The vowel a is here inserted so that this phrase may not 
 be read for what this outline more frequently represents this thing. 
 
100 SECOND STANDABD-rHONOGRAPlIIC KEADEK. 
 
 because they are not educated in politics. But they can 
 not make a mistake in faith. " I am with you." He stands 
 by our side. Now I come with double force to you. You take that 
 Gospel and read it at home, and you have no guarantee that you can 
 not go astray ; but there is guarantee that the priest from whom you 
 arc to learn can not go astray. He is with him. He is with me while 
 I am talking. You come here to learn, and you have a guarantee that j 
 I can not make a mistake. This is the place where the guarantee is 
 given, and nowhere else. "Timothy, my associate bishop, I am 
 appointed a preacher." Paul was appointed by Christ, of course. " I 
 am appointed a doctor, too, but I am limited to faith and truth ; I am 
 appointed to discharge all the duties that concern faith aiul truth. 
 The Gospel, the fountain of truth, is my thesis." Paul appointed 
 others, and they others again, and they others again, 1 and here we are. 
 "Timothy," he said again, "the things you have heard from me 
 before many witnesses, the same commend to faithful men, wno wilJ 
 teach others also." The Father appointed Christ, two ; Christ ap- 
 pointed Paul, three ; Paul appointed Timothy, four ; Timothy appointed 
 others, five ; and they appointed others, six ; and so in succession 
 down to us. 
 
 2 Tun. iv 1 : " Timothy, I charge you before God and Jesus Christ, 
 who shall judge the living and the dead, and I charge you by His 
 coming and by His kingdom, to preach the Word." " Preach "- 
 imperative mood. " Be constant, hi season and out of season, reprove 
 and rebuke, but do it in all patience." " I call upon you in the name 
 of the Trinity to recollect your primal duty, to preach." We see now 
 the original power communicated from the Father, communicated all 
 along by the regular links of a chain. 
 
 OA ' and they others ognlii. There la furnished here an example of 
 ^" progressive degrees of phrase-writing. A number o! words which might 
 be written without lifting the pen may not be so expressed until it occurs a second 
 time. Then, not only may these words be expressed by a single phrase-sign, but 
 contractions may take place in the sign if it occurs frequently. This can not be 
 better illustrated, perhaps, than by an example that occurred on a preceding 
 page the phrase, tt'extem Roman Empire. The first time this occurred it would 
 very probably be written \Vays s -Ren-Ar Men:Emp Kay - Emjiir<- being disjoined 
 because the junction might heetn somewhat difficult. The next time it occurred 
 Emirire would probably be join ed. Then, the next time, to avoid the somewhat 
 difficult junction, fttrman would be contracted to Ar; and for such a phrase, occur- 
 ring several times, such a contraction would not impair legibility. But suppose 
 that it occurs many times more it will very probably be contracted (in itccoi dance 
 with the principles of 287, E. 2. b) to Way.for Western)-A^for Kumaii>Ei.ip(for 
 Empire), i. ., W. E. Emp. 
 
 
KEY TO THE EEPOKTING EXERCISES. 101 
 
 2 Cor., v. 20: "We are, therefore, ambassadors for Christ." We 
 stand in His shoes. Paul was a scholar before he was called. He 
 learned how to write well before the pen of inspiration was put into 
 his hands. "For Christ we are ambassadors." What a beautiful 
 phrase ! What is an ambassador ? The representative of the queen or 
 king, so far as the authority is communicated. " Go to America," the 
 Queen said to the ambassador, "and represent me. You can not 
 declare war and make peace, but so far as I give you power plenipoten- 
 tiary, you have the power of the Queen there pro tanto. ' ' As ambassa- 
 dors of Christ, we hold His place. We are all ambassadors, exhorting 
 as if God spoke in our mouths. So we hold the place of Christ, and 
 our exhortation is the language and speech of God the Father. There 
 is no more presumption for the bishop to say that he occupies such a 
 position than for the chancellor to say, "I am chancellor;" for the 
 general of the army to say, " I am commander-in-chief ;" for the man 
 in the navy to say, "I am chief admiral aboard this fleet." I have 
 the power ; I am the ambassador of Christ, and God speaks in my 
 mouth. Turn the whole Bible through, and you can not find such 
 another document. This is the fullest document in the whole Bible. 
 Here is text after text, title after title, power after power* an accu- 
 mulation of titles and warrants for fear this great case should lose any 
 importance for want of the largest amount of accumulative evidence. 
 
 Luke x. 16 : "He that heareth you, heareth Me; he that despiseth 
 you, despiseth Me." Now the Greek is better than the English. It 
 says, " he who hears you, hears Me." It is not "who understands 
 you, understands Me." The Greek word, akouo, signifies what falls on 
 the ear. So perfectly are you identified with me in my office. 
 
 nThe moment your words fall upon the ear of a man, he is to 
 take them as my words. Hearing and understanding in Greek 
 are two words. 
 
 'O dxojwv Cfiwv, l(jiou dxo^si* xa 6 d&ST&v ufta::, IJAJ ddsTS?' o os 
 
 2 text after text, title after title, and power after power. 276; 
 
 p. 63, xix. of this Reader. 
 
 O1 J Pronounced, according to the usual modification of the Erastnian pro- 
 * nunciation, Ho akuron hu'mon, em-ui akurl; kl ho ath'eton hu'mas cure 
 atlreti ; hO'de enve ath'eton, atlreti ton apgstllan-ta me. 
 
 No system of stenography can enable a reporter to tnke down accurately a pas- 
 sage as long as this, in a language with which he is not nearly us familiar as his 
 own ; arid hardly then, it' the reporter has not accustomed himself to writing it, espe- 
 
102 8ECOXD STANDARD-PIIOXOGRAPHIC READEB. 
 
 The moment your words barely fall upon the ear of a man, that 
 moment he hears my words. He who despises you despises me. I am 
 so identified with you that my words are your words, and a contempt 
 of you is a contempt of me. 
 
 St. Paul uses a beautiful text, which you will not forget. "Faith," 
 he says, " comes by hearing." He docs not say faith comes by under- 
 standing. If you look at that text, there will be found more than at 
 first strikes the eye. Faith comes by hearing. How can a man hear 
 unless somebody speaks to him ? Faith does not come by reading nor 
 by reasoning. No; it comes from the speaking of the accredited 
 orator. 
 
 Galatians iv. 13: "I preached the Gospel heretofore, and you 
 received me as the angel of God, even as Christ Jesus." That answers 
 all the objections you can propose. Did the Apostles understand what 
 Christ said? Yes. But did the people understand ? Yes. Gal. iv. 13 : 
 ' ' I preached the Gospel heretofore, and you received me as the angel 
 of God, even as Christ Jesus." 2 
 
 cially if it should bo uttered rapidly. But a reporter who has some general knowl- 
 edge of one or more foreign languages, especially if he has a quick ear for discrim- 
 inating sounds, may usually take a few words at the beginning, and the concluding 
 word, and thus be able to complete the extract by referring to the proper books. 
 
 In this case, I very well knew ihat the speker gave the Greek for Luke x. 16, 
 which be had just before quoted, and upon referring to my Greek New Testament, 
 I there found it; and the Greek letters being quite familiar to both eye and hand, 
 it was easy to insert the quotation in my transcript. 
 
 The student will naturally ask, What would have been done if you had not been 
 so fortunate as to get a clew to the passage? I will answer, that usually, unless 
 you desire and are able to be very accurate, you would omit such passages; and in 
 the majority of cases, such omission would be no detriment to a report ; for, often 
 such passages are thrown in more for a display of learning than to add anything 
 by the way of idea or illustration. Take this very case. How much is lost of real 
 force of argument, or of idea, by omitting this Greek quotation, and the sentences 
 introducing ii? Thus 
 
 Luke x. 16: "lie that heareth you hearelh me ; he that despiseth you despiseth 
 me." Now the Greek is better than the English. It sa\s, "lie who hears you 
 hears me." It is not " who understands you understands me." The Greek word, 
 
 ukouo, signifl- s * hat falls or the enr The moment your words barely fall 
 
 upcn the ear of a man, that moment he hears my words. 
 
 a I preached the Gospel Christ Jesus. When a reporter knows that 
 he can have easy access to a work from which quotations are made, especially if 
 the quotations are lng, and particular reference is made, it will be sufficient to take 
 the beginning and concluding words, and, of course, the reference to chapter, page, 
 or section, if such a reference is given. The extracts can be afterward found and 
 inserted in the transcript. (l. If the quotations are short, and the reporter wishes to 
 save himself the trouble of reference, he may take the complete quotation, (c) But 
 where the same quotat'on is made several times, it would not only be unnecessary 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXEKCISES. 103 
 
 Now, you have the warrant given by the Father and by the Son ; 
 you have Paul's assertion that the people of Galatia received him as 
 if Christ spoke. Now, have I got out of my way ? Have I said a 
 word too much when I said you were called upon to hear me ay 
 if Jesiis Christ addressed you? Not from any importance of mino. 
 but from the office I hold. What the people of Galatia did, the 
 people of Brooklyn ought to do. We have here the Galatians proving 
 to your face my proposition. They received Paul as the angel of 
 God, even as Christ Jesus. Would they not receive Timothy in the 
 same way, and the men appointed by Timothy, wherever that Cross i.s 
 seen. 
 
 Mark xvi. 16: " Go, and preach the Gospel, and he that believetli 
 and is baptized shall be saved, and he that belicveth not shall be con- 
 demned." 
 
 Here we have Christ saying, " Go and preach" two commandments 
 " and he that belie veth and is baptized shall be saved, and he that 
 believeth not shall be damned." "Do you say that if the people 
 believe the Gospel in the mouth of this man, that they are saved, and 
 that if they believe not they shall be damned ?" Yes. Can there be 
 any mistake in their believing ? No. How could God attach damna- 
 tion as a penalty, unless they were wrong in rejecting it ? Could that 
 j faith be fallible ? No ; how could eternal fire be attached to disbeliev- 
 i ing it. if it were uncertain or erroneous ? Therefore, it is a clear case 
 that since Christ attaches eternal damnation to the man who does not 
 believe my words, that my words must be as infallible as his own 
 existence. How could He punish you by an eternal penalty, if my 
 
 to take it in full, 1/nt injwlicioux ; for the oftener the quotation as, for instance, a 
 text is rcpea'ed, the more rapidly, as a usual thins, is it uttered ; and it may easily 
 happen that it would be uttered so rapidly that the reporter would fall so far be- 
 hind the speaker in taking ir down, that he might lose the following sentence, 
 (f?) It is no discredit to a reporter that he can not take down a long and rapidly- 
 u tiered passage, quoted from the dUtinct memory or read from a book : for it may 
 be utt;.T;.-d too rapidly to be reported. A practiced speaker can read with tolerably 
 good articulation from 400 to 45:) or 500 words in a minute varying, of course, with 
 different individuals and the different matter spoken. It is not a necessary 
 part of the business of a reporter to insert such extracts, though it is usually done, 
 when it can be conveniently, the reporter being paid for them at the same rate as 
 for other matter. 
 
 When tbe reporter intends to insert the quotations, if they are long, he should 
 usually take not only the beginning and concluding words, but a number of words 
 or sentences in the body of the quotation, for the purpose of more readily finding or 
 identifying the extract. This will be the more necessary when the reference to 
 page, etc., has not been given; and it is sometimes more necessary when the refer- 
 ence lias been given ; for the reference is not unfrequently wrong. 
 
104 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 words could possibly lead to error? How could He attach lasting 
 punishment, in His imperial anger, for not believing my words, unless 
 my words were beyond all cavil, perfectly, constitutionally, and meta- 
 physically infallible ? Eternal damnation, therefore, being the penalty 
 attached to any one not believing my declaration, 
 
 OO proves that my words must be as infallible as the very throne 
 ^^ on which the Father sits. You hear it. Argue ,vith me, but 
 do not reject what I say. Am I talking anything but what is in the 
 Gospel ? 
 
 Matthew xviii. 17 : "He that will not hear the Church, let him be 
 as the heathen and the publican." If he will not hear the Church, I 
 command you to look upon him as a heathen and a publican a man 
 of the most atrociously bad morals. The man who will not hear the 
 Church that sole crime constitutes him per se a man destitute of all 
 religion, a man of the most degraded character. 
 
 Matthew xvi. 19 : "Peter, who do men say that I am ? They say 
 that you are Christ. Blessed art thou, Simon Barjona, because neither 
 flesh nor blood told you that, but my Father who is in heaven." 
 Simon was his name, but after he fell everybody doubted him. Oh, 
 they said, Peter can never be depended upon ; he betrayed his Master. 
 You recollect the text. Peter, said Christ, Satan attempted to take 
 you from Me, but I prayed that your faith shall never fail. Your 
 name was Simon ; I now call you Peter Petros, a rock within a rock. 
 Peter, you will yet betray me, and the world will think you are a 
 coward, and not to be depended upon ; but I want to show you that I 
 can raise a man of the most despicable character into the most exalted 
 position of a human being. I will now satisfy the world by changing 
 your name. I will lift you up and call you Petros, a rock within a 
 rock. You can never be touched by the waves that beat against the 
 rock. You are in the rock. I am the rock. Peter, thou art Peter ; I 
 give you the keys of all my possessions. I give the whole flock into 
 your hands ; feed the lambs, the little children, and feed my sheep, 
 the parents, secondly. The whole flock, the sheep and the Limbs, are 
 under your control, and lo ! I am with you all the days, even to the 
 consummation of the world, and the gates of hell shall not prevail 
 against you. 
 
 Peter, I have given that statement to all the bishops through Paul. 
 I said I would teach 1 them. I am now with you particularly. I give 
 
 c\c\ 1 1 sold I would teach. Won!/! is here joined as a book, upon the 
 "" principle of joining it to the horizontal <.7><i-tick. See *nl, E. 6, a, which, 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 105 
 
 you a promise by yourself. I give you supreme authority over the 
 whole Church. Here are the keys of the whole kingdom of heaven. 
 You have all the keys and all the flock, and lo ! I am with you always, 
 to the consummation of the world. Peter, there shall be but one fold, 
 .'. iJ <>ue shepherd, even as there is one faith, one Lord, one baptism. 2 
 There shall be but one fold and one shepherd, and you are the shepherd 
 over all my flock. The oneness of faith is the same as the oneness of 
 God. There is no change in God, and there is none in faith. God 
 iao yesterday, to-day, and forever ; the same in faith. God, one ; 
 faith, one. No other idea in the whole universality of human thought 
 can tell you what the oneness of faith is except comparing it to the 
 oneness and unchangeableness of God himself. " Lo ! I am with you 
 always, and the gales of hell shall not prevail against you." I there- 
 fore put my document out of my hand, and I ask you is the death of 
 Christ itself put 
 
 O *> in stronger language than that ? No. Is it oftener expressed ? 
 
 *' No. Is it clearer? No. If you can not believe that, therefore, 
 how can you believe in the death of Christ, or His life, or resurrection ? 
 What do you depend on for salvation ? The death of Christ. Is it 
 clearer than the document I have read ? No. Is it fuller ? No. It 
 is one plain, legal, constitutional, didactic document. Do you believe 
 it as firmly as the cross? I certainly do. Therefore, instructed 
 according to all this testimony, the testimony of God the Father, the 
 Son, and the Holy Ghost, you must believe me or any man in my 
 place. It is a plain statement clear, constitutional language. I 
 therefore submit to you Is the death of Christ, or His resurrection, 
 or His cress, told with a more accumulated evidence than the clear 
 infallibility of the Catholic Church? You say, certainly not. You 
 believe, then, we are infallible? I do. Now, I conclnde my argu- 
 ment. I call the Pope, and I put him in a large chair, and I say, 
 Sir, you will please take the presidency of this meeting. Then I call 
 all the bishops, and I put them in one large congregation before the 
 
 to he sufficiently comprehensive, should read" The reporter joins a brief Way 
 like an En-hook to tlie ticks ami dashes in the direction of Pee, Kay, or Ray to add 
 viluit or iconlil ; thus, Pentoid', of whtit; Pentoid-, to what; Bendoid 1 , all woulil ; 
 Kentoid 1 , and what; Kentoid^, and would (sometimes, in plirase-wriling, Iicouhl); 
 Rentoid'-', he would." 
 
 2 bnpti.Mti The word one is here omitted twice, and a space left for it. As 
 it is not a " clause" or " a few words" omitted each time, neither a dash nor comma 
 is substituted ; a little more space than usual between words serving to suggest the 
 omitted word. See 276. 
 
106 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Pope. I say there is Peter, and here are Paul and the apostles and all 
 the bishops of the Church. Then recollect the promise that he is with 
 them. The Father has given a particular promise. The Father has 
 baid it, the Sou has avowed it, and the Holy Ghost declares it. Now, 
 I call upon that whole assembly to tell me what is the faith. They 
 do ; and when they have got up a document and signed it, I believe 
 that is infallible as surely as Christ is alive. And if you can put that 
 out of my head, I do not believe one word of the Book. 
 
 THE AMERICAN BIBLE SOCIETY. 
 
 [An Address by the Rev Dr. William J. Sassnett, of Alabama, delivered of the 
 Academy of Music, at the celebration of the Forty-fourth Anniversary (I860) 
 of the American Bible Society. Reported in full by Andrew J. Graham, for 
 the Society.*} 
 
 THE Rev. WILLIAM J. SASSNETT, D.D., of Alabama, offered the fol- 
 lowing resolution : 
 
 " Resolved, That this Society is entitled to the hearty co-operation of 
 every philanthropist and Christian, because, in the principles upon 
 which it is based, and in its grand design, it prominently* represents 
 those great central ideas which most concern the highest and best 
 interests* of the human race." 
 
 Sir, I offer* this resolution because I believe it expresses a great truth 
 in connection with the 7 enterprise which it is the object of this occa- 
 sion to serve, a truth which ought always to be" clearly set forth* and 
 urged whenever we attempt to announce to the world the grounds 
 
 8 The officers of the Society, in the pamphlet containing the Anniversary ad- 
 dresses, credit the reporting in the following words: "We are indebted, for the 
 excellent repons'of several of these addresses [all the unwritten ones], to the skill 
 and fidelity of the reporter, Mr. Andrew J. Graham." 
 
 prominently. See Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, ADMOSISH. 
 
 4 and best Interests. The inconvenience or impossibility of joining a word 
 to a preceding loop Is frequently obviated by the application of the principle of 286) 
 3, as in this case. 
 
 I offer. Fer 1 for offer is here vocalized, to distinguish it from form (Fer 1 *; 
 though there is no special need of its being vocalized. 
 
 i In connection tvlth the. 250, 3, example With. 
 
 always to be. p. 61, v. of this Reader. 
 
 clearly set forth. p. 63, xvii. of this Reader. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 107 
 
 upon which this enterprise rests its claim to public sympathy, confi- 
 dence, and co-operation. 
 Sir, the only conflict 10 in the world 
 
 O^ is between ideas good ideas and bad 1 ideas, true ideas and 
 ^ * false ones; 
 
 The American Bible Society is based upon 8 and represents ideas ideas 
 vast, all-comprehending ; as wide as is the sphere of human interest, 
 us enduring as human destiny. 
 
 It is because it does represent these ideas, and for their vast dynamic 
 and aggressive operations, that I shall claim, to-day, that this Institu- 
 tion is one of the grandest agencies of usefulness that the world now 
 affords ; that it is an honor to the American people ; 3 and that it de- 
 serves the countenance and the co-operation of every man arid woman 
 who wishes to turn his or her influence to the very best account in ad- 
 vancing the happiness of mankind. 
 
 What, now, are these ideas ? To some of them, at least, I propose 
 to call the attention of this assembly to-day. The first great idea 
 upon which the American Bible Society 4 is based is this, that if the 
 
 i only conflict. p. 112, E. 7, b. Conflict is here contracted in analogy with 
 the contraction for effect. See these words in the Dictionary. 
 
 ni J ami bad 259, E. 1, b. 
 
 Abased upon. The impossibility of joining Pen (upon) to the loop of 
 based (Beest) is obviated, in order to secure a desirable phrase-sign, by omitting 
 the*. 236, S. 
 
 8 American people. If this phrase were occurring often, I should omit one 
 of the hooks ; that of American (Em-Ken), of course, rather than of people; for 
 this can, on account of its larger number of consonants, best suffer contraction 
 without impairing its legibility. 
 
 American Bible Society. The engraving of this speech will illustrate 
 flnely progress! re contractions. "When this phrase occurred above, it was written 
 in full, with the exception that the settled contraction (Em-Ken) for American was 
 used. In this case the principle of 237, E. 2, ft, is acted upon in writing Bee for 
 Bible, and Es for Society, the latter being written through Bee to secure greater 
 legibility. Let me write as though I were des'-ribing the actual, the wonderfully- 
 rapid and marvelous operations of the mind in reporting. " This phrase will prob- 
 ably occur ma"V times in this speech. The next time it occurs I will fully apply 
 the principle for forming special contractions (237, E. 2, 1>), writing Em for Ameri- 
 can, Bee for Bible (to be expressed by widening Em), and Es for Societr/." Sup- 
 pose that the form EmbtEs has been employed one or more times, the Es, for sake 
 of legibility, being written through Em v /; the practiced reporter will next seek 
 to save the lifting of the pen, and will join Es to Emb, trusting that memory and 
 the context will enable him to read correctly this very brief contraction, by which 
 
108 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGBAPHIC READEB. 
 
 world is ever redeemed it must be by external, supernatural agencies. 
 There have* always been two leading opinions or theories in the world 
 in reference to religion. The one is, that the world contains or em- 
 braces within itself* all needed elements for its own development, and 
 progress, and salvation ; and that whatever has ever been achieved of 
 good, and whatever has pertained to the world's progress, is due alone 
 to these elements embodied within its own organization. The other 
 is, that the world has within itself, that man has within himself, no 
 good, and that all that is redeeming and saving must come from a 
 higher and supernatural source ; and that whatever exists, that what- 
 ever may exist, whatever may have the appearance of improvement, of 
 growth and progress, outside of these agencies and elements, but leaves 
 man upon the same dead level of moral depravity and alienation from 
 God. These two theories, we say, have ever been in conflict ; and 
 perhaps this conflict was never waged with more violence than in the 
 present day. The activity of the human reason, the degree in which 
 all those fields of thought have been occupied which come under the 
 supervision of the mere reason, the activity which is given to human I 
 elements, has developed a vain philosophy, in the form of rationalism, | 
 naturalism, and secularism, which is at this time imperiling the faith 
 of God's people, antagonizing the divine and supernatural as regards 
 our faith, and as regards what promotes the weal of our race. I; there 
 ever was a time when God's people should fall back upon the super- 
 natural, and should express their faith in God and his sovereignty ; if 
 there ever was a time when they should bring out this faith in a spir- 
 itual' and personal God, and rely upon agencies that are alone spiiitual 
 and supernatural for the accomplishment of these great results,* now 
 is that time. If there ever was a time when we should cling to those 
 
 he will save as much as the writing of Bible and Society every time the phrase 
 "American Bible Society" occurs. 
 
 * There Have. Dherf " is a word-sign for tliert liare, introduced into Stand- 
 ard Phonography, in accordance with the license of 182, R. 1, ti. 
 
 * within Itself. See the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, under ITSELF. 
 
 * In a spiritual. p. 16S, E. 10. 
 
 e these grent results. The essential principle of 171, 1, 2, 3 and 4, of the 
 Compendium is that An initial circle implies an A --hunk irfien written differently 
 from, the, simple circle. No caso of joining a Spcr sign t" a preceding curve was 
 there specified, because there is no instance of it in a simple word; but guch join- 
 ing is sometimes useful in phrase-writinir, as in the present phrace-sign. In thi 
 sign, las must be understood to imply un Ar-hook (\n accordance with the principle 
 Just mentioned); for otherwise it i-hmikl have been on the upper side of Get, in 
 accordance with tbe rule for writing the circle between two .-troki-s. 27, 4. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 109 
 
 institutions whose* design is to hold up the supernatural and the divine 
 in opposition to a vain, worldly philosophy, now is that time. I glory 
 in the American Bible Society because it is such an Institution, and 
 that, as far as it speaks at all, it speaks for God a personal God for 
 the bupeiiUvUiiai, for the divine, for the spiritual, in all the agencies 
 which look to the growth and the salvation of man. Let us cleave to 
 it, therefore. 10 If all else were banished, if it were to lose all other 
 agencies, still, as far as the American Bible Society lives, and speaks, 
 and has influence in the world at all, it is for the truth, for evangelical 
 truth, for a spiritual religion, for the Bible in opposition to the tide 
 of secularism and a vain, wicked philosophy, that is now doing so 
 much to damage the faith and practice of God's people. 
 
 Another idea upon which the American Bible Society is based is, 
 that if the world is ever" Christianized it must be by the active instru- 
 mentality of those among whom God's oracles are deposited. While 
 the Society clings to the supernatural, while it recognizes the fact that 
 the world is redeemed and saved only through the agency of God a 
 personal, spiritual God yet at the same time it does not hold that it 
 is by an invisible, miraculous agency that the world, after :ill, is to be 
 redeemed and saved, to the exclusion of the human ; but that God ex- 
 pects every man and woman to contribute to the great work of redeem- 
 ing the human race. The American Bible Society looks abroad ; and 
 while it does not controvert the 12 question or the position as to whether 
 the heathen are to be saved outside of religious life, the advantages 
 and teachings of the Bible, or not, 13 yet it proclaims that more heathen 
 will be saved, under any and all circumstances, 
 
 9 wliose. In the Old Phonography, who, icJione, and rchom were written re- 
 spectively, Jedoid 2 , Zee 3 , Em 3 . In Standard Phonography this confusion is re- 
 moved by writing who and whom by Jedoid-, and forming a sign for whose by the 
 general rule f.>r writing derivative sign-words. Please read p. 142, It. 5. 
 
 > to it, tlu-rcf.irc 264, R. 5, 2. This instance of the <idvant:igeous com- 
 l>i<>ation <>f two <-f the pocnl.ar principles of Standard Phonography ouulit not, to 
 be passed ovtr without remark. Compi.n- it with the Old-Phonographic expres- 
 sion, Petoid^-Tee Dher--Ef. See Part Y. of the Hand-Book, 11. 
 
 H 1.4 ever. 246, 4. 
 
 15 mid while it tlocs not controvert tkr. The practiced reporter may 
 imply conti'ii-r), etc., as well as con-m, by writing the remainder of ihe word par- 
 tially under the preceding, as in this phrase-sign. 
 
 i 3 or ii t. The defect of tiie Old Phonography in providing only a compara- 
 tively sl"w expression for the rapidly-spoken phrases Of not, Btt. ../, is remove'' 
 in Standard Phonography by adding an En-hook (for not) to Of (IVjoid 1 ) sin i But 
 (Tetoid 2 ). See p. 71, Noie ifl, of this Header, as to the liability of such signs (as 
 Tentcid, ett.,) conflicting with other signs. 
 
110 SECOND STANDARD-niONOGKAPIIIC READF.E. 
 
 O K with the light of the Bible than without it. It claims that 
 '**** it would lead them to a higher standard 1 than they have under 
 heathenism. It claims, too, that the salvation which would be real- 
 ized under the teachings of the Bible is a nobler arid broader salvation, 
 brought about under the full development of God Almighty's agency 
 for the world's salvation. It claims, too, as a matter of some conse- 
 quence, to banish from heathen lands the cruelties, the immoralities, 
 and depravities that prevail, and to let in among them the light, 
 knowledge, and happiness which flow from the prevalence of a lofty 
 Christian civilization. Hence it is that they are eager to disseminate 
 Christianity in heathen lands. The Bible Society is founded upon the 
 idea of aggression in these quarters; and the Bible Society looks 
 around and sees these dark places that are in our cities and towns, 
 these precincts of deadness and darkness where there is no God recog- 
 nized, and where the people are sunken in their ignorance and de- 
 pravity, and feels that if these people are ever enlightened and re- 
 deemed, it must be through the instrumentality of those outside of 
 them whom God has enlightened, and with whom He has deposited 
 his Sacred Oracles. Hence it is that the American Bible Society is 
 engaged in the work of translating the Bible into all languages ; and 
 how it presents itself to my mind, that from this Society a Bible is 
 to go out adapted to all people in all climes and all circumstances a 
 Bible translated for the hordes of Asia, Africa, and South America, 
 and the islands of the sea our own Bible translated so as to be acces- 
 sible to all these people. The Bible Society is aggressive in its rela- 
 tions in other respects. Look at its system of colportage, with agents 
 scattered all over this land ; and that is one reason why I have loved 
 the 2 Bible Society so long. I have seen* those agents moving about 
 here and there, over those plains and mountain sides, carrying the 
 
 or i standard 286, 4. 
 
 I Have lovctl thc.-'When the Vee-hook of Teflokl 1 (for fhate^ will 
 prevent the formation of a desirable phrase-sign, the hok (for have) may be omit- 
 ted, and hare be supplied by the context, especially if it be made a rule that Tetoid 1 
 for / is followed by have, WHENEVER SOME OTHER DIRECTION OF THE I-TICK MIGHT 
 HAVE BEEN AS CONVENIENTLY EMPLOYED. Hence, Tetoid in this phrase-sign is to be 
 read I hurt, because / al me might have been even more conveniently ropresi-nt- 
 e<l liy Petoid. (1i) But observe that this rule does not apply in the phrase-signs 
 TotoidMVuh, I would-; and Tetoid'-Retoid, 1 shoubi. 
 
 3 I hnve seen. (<f) Hurt in this phrase mnxt and may readily be supplied 
 to comp'ete the sense, and is omitted under the principle of 250, 9. (I) There is no 
 difficulty in supplying hare preceding ANY past participle whose outline differs 
 from the past tense (or time), as do the following : 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. Ill 
 
 Word of God, and scattering it among the destitute of the land. I 
 love the Bible Society because I see that it is aggressive, that it is mis- 
 sionary, and that it has planted itself upon the true missionary prin- 
 ciple of the Gospel that of carrying, by its own active efforts, the 
 Bible into all lands and countries. 
 
 Again, we could not get 4 along, and I tell our people so, in our mis- 
 sionary operations without the Bible Society. We send our mission- 
 aries to China, to Tuckey, and elsewhere over the earth ; and what* 
 can we accomplish there, 8 but for our 7 reliance upon the American 
 Bible Society ? It is our strong earthly arm of support. And so ha 
 reference to our missionary fields among these thinly-populated sections 
 of our country, and in the dark places of the land, we could not 
 achieve anything without the agencies which are furnished from the 
 American Bible Society. Therefore it is, 8 that I regard this Society as 
 based upon a great idea, the missionary idea, the idea of aggression, 
 the idea of putting into the hands of God's people a Bible to be carried 
 anywhere on the face of the earth. And in this view, how the import- 
 ance of the American Bible Society is magnified ! 
 
 Look around. For the first time in the history of this world, the 
 bars of intolerance everywhere upon the face of the earth are broken 
 down. In Europe, by reason of international association and commer- 
 
 Arisen Driven Laden Stolen 
 
 Awaked Eaten Lain Striven 
 
 Beaten Fallen Kisen Sworn 
 
 Been Flown Seen Taken 
 
 Bitten Forsaken Shaken Thrown 
 
 Blown Frozen Blain Told 
 
 Borne Gone Smitten Torn 
 
 Broken Grown Sown "Woven 
 
 Chosen Hidden Spoken Written. 
 
 Drawn Known 
 
 (cl BUT OBSERVE, that have should not be omitted when it can be conve- 
 niently expressed by a hook, as in writing I have chosen, Teftoid'-Chays-En; 1 have 
 taken, Teftoid'-Ten ; I have known, Teftoid'-Nen ; I have gone, Teftoid'-Gen. 
 4 we could not get. p. 62, xi. of this Eeader. 
 and what. See p. 104, 22 1 , of this Eeader. 
 
 can we accomplish there. p. 169, K. 12. See, also, p. 81, 9 4 , of this 
 Eeader. 
 
 i for our. The general rule is that when our is added by an Ar-hook, the 
 word to which it is added should retain its position; thus, Ber 1 , by our; Ter 3 , at 
 onr; Cher 2 , which our. But in a few cases the new sign takes the position cf the 
 added word for the sake of distinguishing it from some other sign, as Fer 3 , for our, 
 to distinguish it from Fer 2 , from. 
 
 therefore It Is. p. 63, xvi. of this Eeader. 
 
112 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 cial communication ; in. Asia, China, Japan, the islands of the sea, 
 anywhere and everywhere over the face of the earth, the Bible and 
 missionaries may now have access. Why should not this excite 
 within us a desire to do more than we have ever done, that we may 
 make our labors in this respect commensurate with our responsibili- 
 ties! Oh! if there ever was a time when God's people should be 
 aroused, it is now. The world is open to us ; the Protestant nations 
 of the world have acquired an ascendancy over, the balance of man- 
 kind, such as gives us unlimited access to all portions* of the race. 
 The old, effete, worn-out religions are actually turning loose their 
 millions to our embrace, and they are ready to receive the Word of 
 God, and all that is necessary is to furnish this agency with the means, 
 and soon all over the earth the Bible of God will circulate. 
 
 O /? Another idea upon which the American Bible Society is based 
 ^" is, that if the Christian religion is to save the world, the Bible 
 is the grand instrumentality by which this work is to be accomplished. 
 No matter what other means 1 may be relied upon, and there should be 
 other means, 2 there must be church organization ; there must be min- 
 isters ; there must be prayer and faith ; yet, after all, God expects us 3 
 to employ and rely upon the Bible, as one of the chief agencies by 
 which this great work 4 is to be accomplished ; and I tell you that we 
 honor God most when we honor his Bible most ; when we rely upon 
 his Word most, when we bring it out, and give prominence to it in all 
 our church movements and evangelical enterprises, we honor God most, 
 and put ourselves where we open most of the channels through which 
 God's grace, and love, and mercy shall flow out upon the world. Now, 
 
 to all portions. This phrase is constructed in accordance with the prin- 
 ciple of But it (Tetoid-'-Tee). Pletoid 2 -Pee is distinguished from Pel 3 by the fact 
 that the El-ho"k is barely above the line, when-as on Pel 3 it would be considerably 
 higher; for half of Pel 3 would be above the line. 
 
 o/* i what other means. p. 62, xiii. of this Reader. Here this rapid 
 ^" means of expressing attier not only secures speed in writing this rconl, 
 
 but avoids two liftings or else inconvenient junctions that would otherwise have 
 
 been required. 
 
 a and there should lie other means. In this phrase otlte- might have 
 been joined in the Old Phonography by Dher ; but the novel Standard-Phonographic 
 principle of lengthening to express other secures a great gain. See DHB in the 
 Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 God expect* US.-2J4, K. 8, 1 ; 182, K. 2. 
 
 this great worlt. See p. 108, 24 s , of this Header. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 113 
 
 I believe in employing all other instrumentalities that are recognized 
 as right and proper. I believe that it is right to have* a religious 
 literature. I believe that we should rely upon all these subordinate 
 agencies ; but I am not sure that, in our reliance upon these, we have 
 not too much excluded the Bible as the grand instrumentality in the 
 conversion of the world. I am not so sure but that we ignore and 
 disregard this, God's own light, too much in all our efforts to save the 
 world. The church must embody it. Not that it should rely less 
 upon other means 6 and agencies which it employs, but that it should 
 use this more. I would to God 7 that all our denominations were more 
 active in the circulation of the Bible. I would that they felt more 
 that it is God's Word, and that, whatever other means they may em- 
 ploy, this is the light of heaven, and the instrumentality which God 
 recognized in the accomplishment of this grand design. 8 Now, the 
 American Bible Society is based upon this grand idea. Its whole effort 
 is to circulate God's Word ; in so far as it has any design, any efficiency 
 at all, it is to give prominence to the Bible ; it is to give it a world- 
 wide circulation. And if the views I have presented 9 in regard to it 
 be true, then is the American Bible Society an important agency, one 
 that we should all love, and should co-operate with one which we 
 should seek to develop, and make more efficient th:m it ever has been 
 in all the past. I have had my heart often glow with enthusiastic de- 
 light, when traveling up and down the country, going into log cabins 10 
 to preach, and finding a Bible, and upon opening it, seeing the imprint 
 of the American Bible Society. It is this agency, I tell you, which 
 gives prominency to the Bible over American lands. Depend upon it, 
 
 s that It Is right to have. ffuve is here added by the Vee-hook (201, 
 B. 4), and to is implied. See p. 61, v. of this Reader. 
 
 6 upon other means. p. 169, E. li. See Standard-Phonographic Diction- 
 ary, DHR. 
 
 7 I -would to God This, and thousands of similar phrases exclamations, 
 modifying clauses, etc., which are rarely found in books, but. which sire frequently 
 introduced into extemporaneous discourses, and spoken with great rapidity- are 
 expressed in Standard Phonography with ease and rapidity, which in the Old 
 Phonography were not only expressed with confusing slowness, but not unfre- 
 quently with considerably less speed than other portions of speech le.-s rapidly 
 uttered. 
 
 s this grand design See p. 108, 24", of this Eeader. 
 
 8 I have presented. See p. 11", N. 2, of this Eeader. 
 
 1 lo^ cabins. The combination Gay-Kay or Kay Gay is comparatively diffi- 
 cult, and in phrase-writ ng the n-porter may usually obviate the dilliculty by omit- 
 ting out. of tie consonants; writing, for instance, E:-Gay-Bens (('. ., log-'abinz) for 
 Ivg Kill/ins, 
 
SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 if you were 11 to shut out the American Bible Society, and the circulation 
 which it gives to the Bible, and banish it from the land, awful would 
 be the vacuum. It does more to give prominence to the Bible, to 
 bring out a pure evangelical religion, to resist the tide of infidelity 
 and secularism, I verily believe before God, than any other one dis- 
 tinct, isolated agency in all this country. I love the Society, because 
 I have seen its fruits away off yonder ; I have seen what it has <lu :e 
 in circulating the Bible among the poor and destitute, by means of the 
 efficient agency system which it has employed in those dark and desti- 
 tute places. I feel, before God, that if you have money, and menus, 
 and influence, and want to do good, and lay up treasure in heaven ; if 
 you want to make an impress for God, in your day and generation, 
 stand nobly by the American Bible Society. 
 
 Another idea upon which the American Bible Society is based is this, 
 that the Christian religion is the world's great civilizer ; and the great 
 blunder of the world is in trying to find cut the best means to govern 
 men, whereas the true idea should be to teach men to govern them- 
 selves. We look 12 around over the country ; we look at our states- 
 men, our legislators, and political philosophers, and we see them 
 moving heaven and earth to control men; but the American Bible So- 
 ciety seeks to reverse the policy, and proceeds upon the opposite idea, 
 that of training and teaching men to govern themselves that of in- 
 fusing the elements of intelligence, knowledge, wisdom, and virtue, 
 by which they can regulate and direct themselves and their own con- 
 duct in life. Now, I hold that this is a great idea, important to be 
 looked to. A great drawback 
 
 07 upon our civilization, in these dark places, these precincts of 
 
 ^ ' our country, is that they are made up of men so depraved, 
 
 so wretched, and so ignorant as to be incapable 1 of self-govern- 
 
 11 If you were A distinction might be made between you were and you 
 would, by writing Yeh'weh for the former and Yulrwuh for Hie latter. But this 
 distinction is of little consequence, since the context will suffice to distinguish them 
 if both are written alike; and besides, to write them both alike (Yulrwuh or Yen'- 
 well, according to convenience) is following the analogy of Wayweh 1 for ice were 
 or we icould; Wulrwuh 1 for what icould, what were. 
 
 >3 -we look. p. 168, R. 3, 1>. (//) Rnuml or around may be joined to Look by 
 writing Lay-Krend. See LOOK in the Stumlard-l'honographic Dictionary. 
 
 (yj i Incnpnble. The Corresponding Style contraction, Kay-Bel 3 , for rapa- 
 " ' Ife, may itself suffer commotion In ihc Reporting Stylo, being written Kay- 
 Bee 3 , the affix-sign for -lie being used because more rapid than Bel. This plan of 
 
KEY TO THE KEPOKTING EXKKCISES. 115 
 
 ment. 2 Educate and elevate the mind, so that they can judge and de- 
 termine for themselves, and all is well, and peaceful, and happy in 
 society. Now the Christian religion we hold accomplishes this object. 
 It teaches men that the body was made for the soul. It teaches men 
 t"'at ths doctrine of their immortality, and that the great end of life, 
 is to subject their lower nature to the higher nature. The Christian 
 religion, I boldly maintain, is the author of all that is truly good and 
 benevolent in human nature ; that outside of the teachings of the 
 Christian religion all is selfishness ; that our ideas of charity, and true 
 benevolence, and love for our race, we get pnly in the Christian re- 
 ligion. It infuses in its ethics the true idea, regulates the conscience, 
 the interior man, and so enables him to govern himself. Now the 
 American Bible Society acts upon the idea that the great honor of this 
 country is the schoolmaster and the preacher ; not so much govern- 
 ment, law, and legislation. The Bible Society holds itself aloof from 
 other objects and plans ; but it seeks to elevate the individual man, to 
 give the Bible a wide circulation among the poor and the ignorant, to 
 train them for God and eternity. Remember that when you are help- 
 ing the 3 Bible Society, you are helping on your race in the true way of 
 progress, elevation, and salvation. When you help on other causes, 
 it may or may not have this effect ; but, depend upon it, just in pro- 
 portion as you sustain the American Bible Society, you sustain those 
 elements and agencies which look toward the real, positive progress 
 of your race ; you are doing that which elevates the mind, which im- 
 proves the conscience, which makes men capable of self-government 
 and advancement toward true civilization ; for there is no political 
 economy, no true political philosophy, no true government, or system 
 of morals, but such as flows immediately out of the teachings of the 
 gospel of Jesus Christ. Religion is not merely intended to save the 
 soul in heaven, but to elevate the human race, and give it a loftier 
 civilization even here, and we should look upon it in this light ; and 
 because the Bible Society, without hindrance, without modification, 
 without let, without restriction or qualification, is consecrated to this 
 one end, I love it, and pray for it, and co-operate with it. 4 
 
 writing -lie by the affix-sign may be adopted by the reporter in many cases where, 
 ill the Corresponding Style, Cel would be and could be conveniently employed. 
 
 2 self-government. p. 113, E. 14. 
 
 3 \ lieu you are Helping tile. See p. 61, iv., 4, of this Ecader. 
 
 with It. It is desirable that With it shall be written Dhet 1 , in analogy 
 with For it, If it, etc. To more readily distinguish it from that (I)hot'), it may be 
 written with the bottom of the Dhet resting on the upper line, or Dhet (1. ., Dhet 
 wro), as ill the engraving. 
 
116 SECOND STAXDAED-PHOXOGRAPHIC EEADER. 
 
 Allow me, as I have never had the pleasure of meeting with you upon 
 this platform before, and as I have come a long way, to present one 
 more idea. The next idea upon which the American Bible Society is 
 based, and which it repi'escnts prominently, is that of Christian unity 
 the entire oneness of God's people everywhere. Look at its organ- 
 ization. When was there ever a time when I met my brethren as I 
 meet them here to-day brethren of all the glorious old communions 
 that I have been hearing about, and thinking about, and praying 
 about so long ? Oh, brethren ! my heart is glad to meet you here upon 
 this platform to-day. The organization embodies representatives from 
 the prominent churches of our land. Its basis is such that all love it, 
 though we may to some extent put different constructions upon some 
 parts of it ;* we all recognize it as the same Holy Book as coming 
 from God the grand supernatural light, to teach a benighted world 
 the way to God and heaven. Upon that platform we are all united. 
 We are all united in the enjoyment of its effects ; for your heart glows; 
 with gratitude and enthusiasm, as mine does, whenever I see the dis- 
 plays of God's work anywhere. We glory in the effects wrought by 
 the American Bible Society. If it has been anywhere the instrument- 
 ality of bringing some poor unlettered man or woman to God, we re- 
 joice in it, no matter where it is, in what part of the country it is. 
 Whenever we hear that good has come from this Society, we all delight 
 and rejoice in it. Brethren, in this day of mutual antagonism, of 
 strife, of divisions, and to some extent sectarian bitterness, I rejoice 
 
 OO that there is a platform upon which we can all stand; I rejoice 
 ^U that I can meet my brethren 1 here of the various denomina- 
 tions of the country ; that here we are all one, all alike standing on 
 the same common foundation ; I rejoice in this platform. Coming, as 
 I do, from Alabama, I rejoice to meet upon this platform my brethren 
 from the great State of New York, from New England, and the North- 
 west, and to feel- that here we are one, bound by the same love to God 
 and the same love to man, and destined to the same common heaven, 
 and with the same common Bible. I rejoice to meet them where I 
 
 * up .11 some pni ts of It p. 169, K. 12. The shortest expression for il.ii 
 phrase in Hie Old Phonography would have been Pen 2 Sein 2 Pee'-'-E(Us Petoid 1 - 
 Tee. 
 
 OO i my brethren. 24G 
 ni.d to feel. Awl 
 
 my brethren. 24G, 1. 
 
 iTetoid) is hrre prefixed to Frl for t.-> feel. Tlie 
 context will prevent this being read to n-n (Teloid 4 ), especially when the reporter 
 practices wriving to <t-n in accordance with the principle of p. til, v. of this Ueuder. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 117 
 
 l>elieve there is a cementing and uniting power in the American Bible 
 Society. I feel it, and know it ; and here, my brethren, standing upon 
 the same common platform, 3 with the same common Bible, and destined 
 to the same common heaven, can we not have, and will we not have, 
 the same common country. I feel and believe that we will press on- 
 ward in the great work of spreading God's religion over all the face of 
 the earth. These are aggressive ideas ; they are wide, all-comprehen- 
 sive, dynamic ideas, and we should adhere to the American Bible Soci- 
 ety, because it is based upon and represents these aggressive ideas. 
 
 Brethren, I love to feel, when I am engaged in any cause, that it is 
 an expansive cause, and expanding world-wide, all-embracing ; that it 
 has love, and mercy, and hope. I love to think that it has a platform, 
 whereon all the lovers of the good and true can stand. And it is for 
 these reasons, among others, 4 that I love the American Bible Society, 
 and I shall carry home with me a strong affinity* and love for it, be- 
 
 3 tipoii tlie same common platform. p. 169, R. 12. Form, is usually 
 contracted in t!ie Reporting Style of Standard Phonography, Em being omitted. 
 See INFORM, UNIFORM, REFORM, MULTIFORM, TRANSFORM, DKFOEM, PERTORM, PLAT- 
 JORM, etc., in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. These, in compliance with 
 the great principle of UNIFORMITY observed throughout Standard Phonography, 
 have analogous contractions. 
 
 4 r.moit ; others. See DHR, in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 8 affinlly. The cases in which contraction is resorted to in the Reporting 
 Style of Standard Phonography, in writing words ending with ty, may be specified 
 as follows 
 
 1. In many words the consonant (t) of the termination tij is expressed by shorten- 
 ing a letter; thus, Ent--Gret, integrity; Pet-Blet, compatibility; Tee'-'-Telt, total- 
 
 Flet 1 , faulty ; Tiiret 1 , authority ; Met 1 , mighty; Si ns-Ket, sincerity ; Mct-Ret 3 , ma- 
 turity ; Em-Jert 1 , majority; Em'-Nert, minoriU ; Slay-Bret, celebrity; Ef-Kelt, 
 faculty ; Pers 2 -Pret, prosperity ; Emter 2 -Let, materiality ; Fer'-Let, formality ; Lay-- 
 Kelt, locality. 
 
 2. The termination ty is frequenlly omitted when the preceding part of the word 
 is sufficient to characterize it, especially when a rather difficult junction would be 
 avoided; thus. Veld 1 (i.e., valid), validity; Ray 3 -Ped (i. ., rapid), rapidity; Kay- 
 Ped 1 (i. ., cupid), cupidity: Tee'-Med, timid-ity ; Emtern 3 (i. e., matern), mater- 
 nity ; Fertern 2 (t. e., fratern), fraternity ; Ner^Em (i. f., enorm), enormity ; Lay 1 - 
 Brel if. f., liberal) liberality; Rel 1 , real-ity; Mori 2 , morality. 
 
 S. When ty forms a part of the termination -l-ti/or -/-<;/, (1) these terminations are 
 
 (a) either implied, by disjoining the preceding lett> r, ac in the Corresponding Style 
 
 (232, 8), (!/} or, what is more usual in ihe Reporting Style, absolutely omitted, the 
 
 prei-ec/iiif/ litter not being diyainfd ; time, Efs^Bee, feasibility ; Sens-Bee, sens - 
 
 i hility; Fels 2 -Bce, flexibility; Per--Bee, probability ; Per'-Pee. property; Pet-s Q - 
 
 Toe, posterity ; (2) or, if more convenient, the principle of specification 1 or 2 is em- 
 
118 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 cause, since coming up here, I see elements of development, of prog- 
 ress, of love, of expansive benevolence, such as enlist me, more than 
 ever, in this glorious cause. May God help you, and the groat city of 
 New York, to stand by this, your glorious institution, that reflects so 
 much honor upon you* all over this laud. May God help you to sus- 
 tain it, that its influence may go out all over this land, and that it 
 may go onward, extending further and further, 7 until, in its benevo- 
 lent embrace, it covers the whole earth. 
 
 POLITICS. 
 
 SPEECH OF MR. GAULDEN, OF GEORGIA. 
 Delivered in the Baltimore Democratic Convention, in I860. 
 
 MR. PRESIDENT* AND GENTLEMEN OF TIIE CONVENTION I come here from 
 the State of Georgia, indorsed by that State Convention and by the 
 Convention at Charleston. 9 This ought surely to give me ti right to be 
 heard before you ; M and though I have not joined my fortune" in the 
 State of Georgia either to the House of York or to the House of Lan- 
 caster, '- 1 feel that I have a right here to speak to the great Democratic 
 party of the la United States. I have been pained, as a citizen of these 
 
 ployed, as in writing prosperity, majority, minority, locality, faculty, mattri* 
 ality. 
 
 upon yon. p. 169, R. 12. 
 
 7 further ami farther. 276, c. 
 
 8 Mr. Prrttldfiit The word president is here contracted topres., under the 
 principle of23T, E. 2. 
 
 at Chnrlfstoii. Cherlst is a special contraction for Charleston. 237, R. 8. 
 
 > before you.- p. 60, iv. 4. 
 
 " my fortune. 246, 1. 
 
 i j I.aix a.-:tf .236, 4. Kay or Gay may very frequently be omitted when 
 coming between Ing and other letters ; as, Linguist, El-Ingst ; sanguine, Sirg'en 2 ; 
 links. El-Ing(-Kay>-Iss. 
 
 Ucuicx-rntir party. This phrase will occur several times :n the course 
 of this speech ; and it will fa'rly be entitled to a special contraction. But I hare 
 given it h- re as it would probably be written when first occurring. ('/) The re- 
 porter who seeks to save himself unnecessary labor will very shortly afttr com- 
 mencing to report a convention, a law case, a debate, and even shoriei matltrs. de- 
 vise special contractions for phrases which he perceives will be of frequent occur- 
 rence, units* the ordinary expression should be sufficiently short. See 237, 11. t. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISKS. 119 
 
 United States, to see the elements of disruption and disorganization 
 which seeni to prevail in the midst of this most intelligent assembly. 
 I have fult 14 that the experiment of the capability of man for self- 
 government was about to prove a failure here, and that the Genius of 
 Liberty was about, shrieking, to leave the world. But I trust that this 
 may be the darkest hour just before the day ; and th-.t from these ele- 
 ments of discord the representatives of the intelligent American people 1 * 
 1 >:re assembled may be able to devise a plan upon which the great 
 Democratic party of the United States 1 * may be united, and that we 
 will yet add another" victory 
 
 OA to the many we have already achieved. 
 
 ^ v I am an advocate for maintaining the integrity of the Na- 
 tional Democratic party ; I belong to the extreme South ; I am a pro- 
 slavery man 1 in every sense of the word aye, 2 and an African slave- 
 trade man. 3 [Applause 4 and laughter.] The institution of slavery, as 
 
 i* I have felt that the rave is implied here in accordance with the 
 principle of p. 110, 25 2 , of this Eeader. 
 
 i 5 intelligent American people. The Em-hook of both intelligent and 
 American is omitted here for the sake of a desirable phrase sign. p. 169, B. 12, b. 
 
 i Democratic parly of the United Stales In this phrase-sign, the 
 Em of Dee-Em (for Democratic) is widened to add I' for part//. Of is implied by 
 joining, p. 61, vi. of this Eeader. 
 
 ^ add another See, in the Standard Phonographic Dictionary, DHR, 2, 
 and 3, c. 
 
 29 
 
 I nm a pro-slavery man. The reporter of a political convention, 
 **} or debate, or any legislative body, of the present day, will find that the 
 word ulavery will be of such frequent occurrence as to deserve a special contrac- 
 tion. It may be written Slay, as in pro-slavtry, Per 2 -Slay; anti-slavery. En-Tee 2 - 
 Slay ; slave States, Slay 2 -Stets ; slavery in the Territories, S!ay 2 -En-Ter-Ters ; 
 slave-breeding, Slay 2 -Bred:(' iny') ; slave-trading, Slay 2 -Tred:('ing'); slaveholder, 
 Slay 2 -Layder; slave State, Slay 2 -Stct; slavery extension Slay 2 -Sten. 
 
 2 aye 102, E. 3; 98; 102. 
 
 3 African slave-trade man. African, in accordance with the principle 
 of special contraction (23T, E. 2, I), is here contracted to Fer. 
 
 * applause. This sign for applause is distinct from Phonoaraphy, and hr.s 
 the advantage of being quite rapid, and at the same lime constructed upon a plan 
 which may be followed in indicating cheers, /</**, etc., th<> first longhand letter of 
 the word being written, and the pen swept around it, as in the case of a in the i n- 
 graving. (b) The modifiers, "great," 'immense," "tremendous," " prolonged," 
 etc.. may be sufficiently indicated by writing the letter large, "great applause," for 
 Instance, by a made quite large and, of course, with the line around it. (c) 111 
 transcribing, the words appluune, etc., should be treated as independent sentence*, 
 
120 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 I have said* elsewhere, has done more to advance the prosperity 8 and 
 intelligence of the white race, 7 and of the human race, than all else 
 together. I believe it to be founded upon the law of Nature, and upon 
 the law of God ;* I believe it to be a blessing to all races. I believe that 
 liberty would not truly exist in this Western world 9 except by main- 
 taining the integrity of the great National Democratic party. 10 [Ap- 
 plause.] As for this " Irrepressible Conflict" party," with their serried 
 ranks now ready to march down upon us, 12 1 have no faith in it, be- 
 cause it is founded in anarchy, in everything anti-republican, in every- 
 thing that is opposed to human progress; while I understand the idea 
 of the great National Democratic party to be non-intervention in its 
 broadest sense. 13 [Applause.] Now, my Northern friends, 14 1 do not 
 know that I can do anything in Georgia to reconcile these matters ; 
 but whatever I can do," I will do. [Applause.] 
 
 I say that our friends in Georgia, who are crying out for protection 
 to slavery in the Territories, are advocating a mere theory, a mere ab- 
 straction, a thing that is not and can not be. They would do much 
 better if they would demand protection from the General Govern- 
 
 and inclosed in brackets to distinguish them from the words of the speaker; thus, 
 ' [Applause.]," but without the period if introduced in the middle of a sentence. 
 Generally, for the better appearance' of typography, and because the "case" is not 
 fuily supplied with brackets, the curves are used instead. 
 
 6 I have sa.d. Have is implied here. See p. 1 10, 25 2 , of this Reader. 
 
 prosperity. -This word might be written Pers-Pee; but, to distinguish it 
 from prospect, Pers 2 -Pee, it is better to write it in this manner. 
 
 ' -white race. 188, K. 1 ; 148, E. 1, b. 
 
 s law of God. 182, E. 1, 6. 
 
 8 Western world. The En-hook is omitted to secure a desirable phrase- 
 sign, p. 169, K. 12,6. 
 
 lo^rcat national Democratic party. En is here used for national. 
 The whole phrase-sign transferred to the common print is " Great N. Dem. P." 
 237, E. 2, b. 
 
 11 Irrepressible conflict party. This is a special contraction. If very 
 frequent, Ar simply would be written for irrepressible. 
 
 12 upon us p. IS ', E. 3. 
 is brca;lest s-.'iise. 236, 3. 
 
 n my Northern friends. Ner is here used for "Northern," in accord- 
 ance with the principle of special contraction. 237, E. 2. 
 
 n net whatever I can do Tef for what ver is here Joined to Tetoid 2 (foi 
 but), iee p. 74, i. 1 *, of this Reader, wh>re it is shown that the plan of joining Tee 
 tn but was originated by the author, (ti) I is omitted here, as it m;iy be in many 
 other cases where some pronoun must be supplied, nnd wh<-re ihe context directs 
 what one. Bee under I in the Standard-Phonographic Dictiouary. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 121 
 
 ment, 18 and have a line of police established along the border of the 
 Slave States, to catch and hang the thieving Abolitionists who are 
 stealing our niggers. [Laughter and applause.] This is a means of 
 protection. Why ? Because it is practical. [Renewed laughter and 
 applause.] Here is my old native State of Virginia" the slave-trading 
 aud slave-breeding State of Virginia 1 * [Laughter.] 
 
 DELEGATE FROM VIRGINIA" I call the gentleman to order. He casts 
 an imputation upon Virginia by calling her the "slave-breeding State 
 of Virginia. ' ' 
 
 MR. GAULDEN** Well, I will say the slave-breeding State of Georgia, 
 then. 1 glory in being a slave-breeder 21 myself. [Loud laughter.] 2 -' 
 I will face the music myself, and I have got as many negroes as any 
 man from the State of Virginia. And as I invited the gentlemen of 
 this Convention at Charleston to visit my plantation, I will say again, 
 that if they will come to see me, I will show them as fine a lot of 
 negroes, and the pure African, too, as they can find anywhere. And I 
 will show them as handsome a set of little children there as can be seen 
 [laughter], and any quantity of them, too. [Renewed laughter.]'- 3 
 And I wish that Virginia may be as good a slave-trading and slave- 
 
 from the general government. Jay here stands for general, under 
 the principle of special contraction. 237, E. 2. 
 
 ' 7 State of Virginia In some cases, as in this, it is better to express Of by 
 a hook than to imply it. 
 
 '8 slave-breeding State of Virginia. 237, E. 1, 6. See p. 94, IT 1 , of 
 this Header. 
 
 i> Delegate from Virginia. It seems natural to commence the words of 
 a speaker with a paragraph ; but for the reporter such a practice is not best, espe- 
 cially in the case of one speaker interrupting another ; for too much time would be 
 onsumed in carrying the pen back to commence a paragraph. (6) It is best usu- 
 ally, in the case of a change of speakers, to phonograph the name of the speaker, 
 inclosing it in a circle ; (e) or, if there could be no confusion as there might be if 
 two speakers had the same initial write the first longhand letter of the speaker's 
 name, usually inclosing it. In this phrase-sign from is omitted, under the prin- 
 ciple of 250, 3. 
 
 20 G.- G. is here written for Gaulden. Of course, in transcribing, " Mr." should 
 be prefixed. See preceding note. 
 
 s sSnve-breeder. The formative of an 'actor' may frequently be omitted. 
 p. 142, E. 5; p. 194, E. T. 
 
 " Loud laughter. The modification of loud is indicated by making the sign 
 of pleasantry or laughter larger than usual. See p. 119, 29 4 , of this Eeader. 
 
 > 3 Rrntwed lau^htc' . I see no particular necessity of inserting renewed 
 here. It was probably done by the reporter to avoid the monotony of the repetition 
 of the word laug/tter. 
 
122 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC EEADEB. 
 
 breeding State as Georgia ; and in saying that I do not mean to be 
 disrespectful to Virginia, but I do not mean to dodge the question 
 at all. 
 
 Now, I want no office ; I never asked any ; I did not ask the State 
 Convention to send me here ; but I am here to tell the truth to you 
 all, and this is my idea of non-intervention. I want the State of Vir- 
 ginia, if she has negroes, to have as many as she pleases. If you want 
 slavery in the State of Massachusetts, I want you to have it. If you 
 want slavery in Indiana, and Ohio, and Wisconsin, and Minnesota, in 
 God's name have it. It is your right to have 9 * slaves, and just as 
 many or as few as you please ; I will never join any party which de- 
 sires to force slavery anywh'ere, or to keep it from any place. [Ap- 
 plause.] I believe that is regulated by the law of God, of nature's 
 God, and all history proves that to be so, and all that I ask is " hands 
 off ;" leave it to the people of the States and of the Territories to settle 
 that matter for themselves under the Constitution of the United 
 States. 28 [Applause.] 
 
 And now, while I am up, I want to put my veto upon one thing. " 
 I know that I am not going to be applauded" in what I say ; but seed 
 sown in good time will bring forth fruit ; and though you may say now 
 that I am wrong, yet I think I shall live to see the day when the doc- 
 trines which I advocate to-night will be the 
 
 O A doctrines of Massachusetts and of the North ; for, 
 
 " Truth crashed to earth will rise again ; 
 
 The eternal years of God are hers ; 
 While Error, wounded, writhes in pain, 
 And dies amid her worshipers." 
 
 a It Is your right to have. ffave is added here by the Vee-hook, in 
 accordance with the method of writing hope to have, Pef 3 . To must be supplied to 
 complete the construction. 
 
 " under tin- Constitution of the United States. One of the Tees of 
 Constitution is here omitted to secure this sign. 236, 8. See p. 106, 23 s , of thU 
 Reader. 
 
 '" upon one thing. p. 169, R. 12, b. 
 
 27 I know that I am not. going to be applauded. The affix-sign 
 * ing' is omitted in writing going (237, R. 1, i), to secure the advantage of phrase- 
 writing. This phrase would have been written in the Old Phonography, Rctoid 1 - 
 En-Dhet Petoid ] -MentGay:' ing' Bee 3 PeP-Ded. Compare the two expressions. 
 
 a8 In what I say. p. 68, xvi. of this Reader. This phrase, so easily and 
 beautifully expressed in Standard Phonography, would have been written in the 
 Old Phonography, En 1 Wuh 1 Retoid-Eg. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 123 
 
 I say I go for non-intervention in the broadest sense of the term. I 
 say that this whole thing should be taken out of the hands of the 
 General Government. I say it is 1 all wrong to be spending two or 
 three millions of dollars 3 annually from our pockets, and sacrificing 
 thousands of lives upon the coast of Africa, 3 in that terrible clime, 4 to 
 prevent our going there to get a few negroes. If it is right for us to 
 go to Virginia and buy a negro, and pay $2,000* for him, it is legally 
 right for us to go to Africa, where we can get them for $50. [Applause 
 and laughter.]* Here is the condition we are placed in, and you may 
 as well come to your senses and face the music. 
 
 There are 2,000 of our negroes now down at Key West, begging and 
 pleading not to be sent back. If they should be sent back, what would 
 be the result ? One half of them would die before they got there, and 
 the other half would be turned upon the coast of Africa, upon the 
 coast of Liberia, among strangers, to be eaten up by cannibals, or be 
 caught and sold again, or die of starvation ; and this you call human- 
 ity. I say it is piracy. I say that our Government is acting against 
 right and reason in this matter. And if the Southern men had the 
 spunk and spirit to come right up and face the North, I believe the 
 Northern Democracy 7 at least would come to the true doctrine of 
 popular sovereignty and non-intervention. [Applause and laughter.] 
 
 Think of it ! Two thousand of these poor barbarians from Africa, 
 caught within the last four weeks, and kept upon that miserable island 
 of Key West, dying there from disease and starvation, and what do not 
 die* are to be sent back by our Government at an expense of one or two 
 millions, though they are pleading and begging not to be sent back and 
 
 A I say It is. p. 63, xvi. 
 
 2 two or three millions of dollars. See p. 74, 6 2 , of this Beader. 
 250, 3. The word millions is here represented by Ems, under the principle of 
 special contraction. 23T, E. 2. 
 
 s upon tlie coast of Africa. 286, 3. See p. 106, 23 s , of this Reader. 
 
 In that terrible clime. A slight saving is here effected over the Corre- 
 sponding Style by writing 'ble' by the affix-sign (Bee) instead of Bel. See p. 92, 
 16 3 , of this Header. 
 
 s $3,OOO 2T4. 
 
 Applause and laughter. The signs for applause and laughter are here 
 written without lifting the pen, constituting a sort of phrase-sign. It illustrates a 
 reporter's care to effect every possible saving of labor. 
 
 1 Northern Democracy. Northern is here contracted to Ner, in accord- 
 ance with the principle of special contraction. The phrase-sign, transferred to 'he 
 common priiit, is "Nor. Dem." 
 
 and what do not die. p. 104, 22 1 , of this Eeader. 
 
124: SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 landed npon the coast of Africa. It is cruel, inhuman, wrong, and I 
 appeal to the good sense of the American nation against it. Look at 
 John Bull.* He has bound us to catch all we can and send them back 
 at an expense of $25 per head. We send them hack. But what does 
 John Bull do ? When he gets them he apprentices them out again, and 
 makes slaves of them. That is the hypocritical treaty that you are 
 hound by. And yet I hear no Southern voice or Northern voice raised 
 against this aggression upon the law of nature and of nature's God. 
 But I intend to raise my voice against it, humble as it is. 
 
 Now this may be a secondary question before us to-night. The great 
 point is harmony and union in the great Democratic party. Let us 
 whip the Black Republicans ; 10 let us win the fight ; and when we have 
 settled these things, let us act together, and all will be right. [Ap- 
 plause.] 
 
 NO LAW FOR SLAVERY. 
 
 [Speech of Gerrit Smith at the State Anti-Slavery Convention, in Milwaukie, 
 June 17, 1857.] 
 
 I HAVE not come here to denounce slaveholders, nor to say that they 
 are worse than other men. If they are worse, it is owing to the mis- 
 fortune of their circumstances. If, as many suppose, they are the very 
 worst of men, it is because they are the subjects aad victims of the very 
 worst education. 
 
 That the slaveholder is to a large extent unconscious" of the wick- 
 edness 12 of his relation is beyond controversy. Deplorable, however, 
 as is this unconsciousness, it happily leaves room in him for goodness. 
 
 John Bull. This is a special contraction. The sign, transferred, la "J. 
 Bull." 28T, K. 2. 
 
 i Black Republicans. Bel 3 is here written for Slack, in accordance with 
 the principle of general contraction (287, K. 2). If the phrase were occurring fre- 
 quently, in accordance with the principle of 237, E. 2, b, it would be wriiten Eel 3 - 
 Eays ; f . ., " Bl. Es." 
 
 11 unconscious. The preflx-sign for tmcon- is here Joined, and the final is 
 omitted, as in many other words ending with the sound shim. See p. "u, 4 3 , of this 
 Header. 
 
 i* wickedness. 237, . 1. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 125 
 
 Virtues the slaveholder can certainly have. 13 "Washington 1 * was a 
 slaveholder, and strikingly were the nobler virtues grouped 
 
 O1 in him. \Ve must dismiss 1 our prejudices against the slave- 
 *-J * holder and do him full justice. In innumerable instances is 
 he graced with beautiful traits of character. 2 Of course this could not 
 be, did he know the wickedness of his relation. 3 Were he to know 
 that, and yet to continue in the relation, 4 to see his sin and yet to cling 
 to it, his whole soul would be so debased that nothing* virtuous, nothing 
 generous could spring up or live in it. Unconsciousness of his wrong 
 explains the* possibility of his goodness. 
 
 That the slaveholder should persist in remaining a slaveholder ought 
 not to surprise us ; nor ought we to regard him as pre-eminently wicked 
 for such persistence. Think how rarely, 7 even among ourselves, a man 
 becomes," in the full and emphatic sense of the word, an Abolitionist. 
 All over the world a new education is needed an education into a 
 simple, honest love of manhood, and into a deep and abiding reverence 
 
 is ran certainly have. p. 169, R. 12. This phrase, in the Old Phonog- 
 raphy, would have heen written Ken 2 Iss Ret 2 En-El Vee' 2 . 
 
 n Washington. This word is too long to write in full, and the best contrac- 
 tion is Ish J -Ten. 
 
 O1 l we must dismiss. 236, 8. p. 106, 23 s , of this Reader. 
 
 2 beautiful traits of character. 171, 8. This phrase, in the Re- 
 porting Style of the Old Phonography, would have been written Bet 2 -fel Treta 2 
 Petoid'-Ker-Kay. 
 
 3 wickedness of his relation. Wickedness is here contracted, as a few 
 lines before ; his is added by a circle, of being implied. 
 
 * in the relation. In relation is distinguished from In real-ity by the En 
 in the former being brought down so that Rel may rest on the line, while in the 
 other phrase Rel is above the line. 246, 1. 
 
 * that nothing. A needless fear on the part of the Old-Phonographic pub- 
 lishers caused them to prohibit the joining ol letters in many cases, where they 
 might have been joined with ease, and with advantage in respect of speed. 
 
 8 explains the. (a) The plan of omitting initial Kay in many such words as 
 exist (Scs-Tee 2 ), experience (Sprens 2 ), explain (Splen 2 ) an omission correspond- 
 ing to the rapid and defective utierance of these words, i. e., almost 'ais*, '*pei-iencr, 
 >pfi was first presented in the Hand-Book. It is no valid objection to such 
 contractions that they do not save much ; it is conceding that they save something, 
 and that, without gome countervailing disadvantage, they are useful. Their advan- 
 tage is that they save time in the omission of a letter, and aleo by facilitating phrase- 
 writing. (&) As to joining the in this case, see 187, R. 1. 
 
 how rarely. See p. 60, iv., 2, of this Reader. 
 
 * a. man becomes. 244, R. 3, (1). 
 
126 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC HEADER. 
 
 for it. Hitherto, at the North* as well as at the South, our schools and 
 churches have not been such as to impress men with the dignity and 
 grandeur of their 10 common nature. 11 In every part of our country the 
 work is still undone of bringing men to believe 
 
 " That the one sole sacred thing beneath the cope of Hearen is man." 12 
 
 Open the eyes of the slaveholder to the greatness and glory of man 
 even of the most bruised and battered specimen of man and he is at 
 once an Abolitionist. The like discovery can alone transform the 13 
 non-slaveholder into an Abolitionist. All those before whose heaven- 
 anointed vision stand revealed the divine image and the moral sub- 
 limity of man all those, and none others, 14 are Abolitionists. As im- 
 possible would it be for him who is blessed with this revelation to 
 oppress or despise his brother, as to pour contempt upon the pyramids 
 among the works of men, or upon Mount Blanc 1 * among the works of 
 God. 
 
 Nor have I come here to oppose the doctrine of " compensation" a 
 doctrine so unwelcome to the mass of Anti-Slavery men. On the con- 
 trary, were the slaveholders to emancipate their slaves, I should be 
 glad to have the nation give five hundred millions of dollars to the 
 emancipators, 18 and bestow something on the emancipated also. In- 
 
 nt the North.- 23T, K. 2. 
 
 o of their.- See p. T4, 6', of this Reader. 
 
 11 common nature. (a) The word-sign for common was first presented in 
 the Hand-Book. (b) Common was previously written 'com':En. 
 
 i" man." The quotation marks ('") are placed at the end of this quotation, 
 but not at the beginning, where it is sufficiently indicated by the words introducing 
 the quotation. 
 
 is transform the. Standard Phonography beautifully exemplifies the great 
 law of UNIFORMITY in accordance with which it was constructed, in the con- 
 tractions for words ending in form-ed; thus, Form-ed, Fer 1 ; Conform-ed, 'Con': 
 Fer 1 ; Deform-ed, Deei-Fer ; Inform-cd, En-Fer 1 ; Perform-ed, Per 2 -Fer; Reform- 
 ed, Kay'-Fer; Transtorm-ed, Ters'^-Fer ; Uniform, En-Fer 3 ; Multiform, Melt-Fer. 
 
 i and none others In a few cases the Dher-tick is written upward, as in 
 thin phrase-sign. "With a pencil it will be easy to make it, and even with a pen it 
 will not be so difficult that its use will not be advantageous. 
 
 is Mont Blanc. The foreign pronunciation of this word is Mo, Bla, ( ( ) sig- 
 nifying the nasalization of the preceding vowel (p. 2; 3, 11 and 13). For the method 
 of ttenographically indicating nasalization, see p. 2i>3, 12. These words might have 
 been written Ment 1 Bel 2 -Ing-Kay, as if pronounced Mont Blank, the letters being 
 interpreted by general English analogy, as is usually done in phonographing foreign 
 words and names. See p. 90, 15 3 , of this Reader. 
 
 ' cmn >:<!]> tor* (//) In many cases, when a verb, as emancipate (Em-Ens- 
 Pet), ends with a shortened straight-line, and tue actor, as emancipator, is formed 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXEECISKS. 127 
 
 deed, inasmuch as the North has sought her own commercial gains and 
 her own political and ecclesiastical advantages, in allowing, not to say 
 encouraging, the South to extend the area of slavery and multiply her 
 investments 17 in slaves," I do not see how she could be honest, and yet 
 leave the South to bear alone the whole pecuniary loss of emancipa- 
 tion. Such loss there would be. I admit that time would turn it" 
 into great gain. But, for the present, it certainly would be loss. 
 
 To my enumeration of the things for which I have not come here I 
 will add but one more. I have not come to oppose the dissolution 20 of 
 the Union. Nay, I am free to declare that if the South or the North, 
 the East or the West, desire to secede 51 from it,'" I would 23 have no 
 force employed to prevent the secession. 24 Let the seceder go in peace, 
 
 by the addition of the consonant r tae reporter may write for the 'actor' the form 
 for the verb, (b) But if, in order to avoid confusion, as of emancipated and rman* 
 cipatoi; some other mode of writing the actor must be adopted, the reporter may 
 lengthen the stroke, as in writing emancipator, Em-Ens-Peeter. p. 62, xii. 
 
 IT investments 237, E. t, b. 
 
 is in slaves. p. 168, E. 10. 
 
 i would turn it. p. 63, xvi. of this Reader. 
 
 20 dissolution of the Union. Dissolution is written Dees-Elshon, to dis- 
 tinguish it from Desolation, Dees 2 -Layshon. 
 
 2 ' desire to secede. The word Secede and its derivatives may be advan- 
 tageously written in accordance with the navel, Standard-Phonographic principle 
 of using an initial large circle. In this case, in connection with the principle of 
 implying to by joining, a phrase-sign is secured which is considerably shorter than 
 the Old expression of this phrase I)ces-Ar Petoid 2 Es 2 -Sdee. 
 
 22 from it. p. 63, xvi. of this Eeader. The Old-Phonographic expression of 
 this phrase was Fer 2 Tee 2 . 
 
 23 I would. The advantage of a stenographic device may not, when con- 
 sidered alone, be very apparon 1 . It might, for instance, be objected that Tetoid for 
 /was but little briefer than Petoid-Retoid. But it might be replied that the aggre- 
 gate saving of a number ot little contrivances of frequent use would be consider- 
 able. And if these devices, in addition to securing a briefer expression for certain 
 words, obviate frequently the loss of time in lifting the pen, their value is greatly 
 enhanced. This phrase-sign is a good illustration of this idea. First, Tetoid for I 
 is nctrly twice as rapid as Petoul-Eetoid. Secondly, the lifting of the pen which 
 would have been required if the latter form for / had been employed, is obviated 
 by Tetoid. So that there s effected a gain over the Old Phonography of more than 
 Wu per cent. 
 
 24 employed to prevent the secession. () To is implied here by join- 
 ing. The is omitted, and to be supplied. (&) I have found it very useful in various 
 kinds of reporting, especially legislative, to write Se**ion by Isseslron, or by en- 
 larging the final circle of a prc-ci-ding wonl, and adding the Ehvm-hook; thug, 
 End of the session, Endseslron 2 ; at the tension Teescsh-on 3 ; this sesti'U, Dheeses 2 - 
 
128 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 followed with our blessings and not with our curses. At the same 
 time, let me declare that I am the friend of the Union ; would not have 
 it dissolved, hut would have it endure forever. What is more, I should 
 he glad if, with the consent of all parties concerned, 3 * it could spread 
 over all North America, 2 * and carry its superior vigor, intelligence, and 
 civilization to peoples who are perishing for need of them. 
 
 Having now said for what I did not 27 come, I will proceed to say for 
 what I did come here. It was for only one thing ; and that is, to be- 
 seech you to know nolawfor slavery, ** and to trample underfoot whatever claims 
 to be a law for slavery. Possibly, however, there are persons in this 
 assembly who would stop me on the very threshold of my argument 
 by telling me 29 that the Constitution is for slavery. But what if it 
 is ? What if, from beginning to end, it is all for slavery ? That does 
 not make slavery a law. That does not make the Constitution 30 a law 
 
 Eshon ; next session, Enses 2 -Eshon ; at the last session, Tee 3 -Layses-Eshon. Seces- 
 tion may be added to a preceding word (without a final circle), as in this case, in 
 an analogous manner. 
 
 as of all parties concerned. Three novel, Standard-Phonographic prin- 
 ciples and devices combine in this case to produce a remarkably condensed expres- 
 sion of these four words : 1. The addition of all by an El-hook to Petoid 1 (of). 
 2. The formation of phrase-signs, even in case of necessary disjoining, commencing 
 the disjoined letter near the preceding; overlapping them. (See p. 94, IT 1 , of this 
 Eeader.) 3. The use of a new word sign for party (Pee). Compare this expression 
 with the Old-Phonographic expression Petoid 1 Bedoid 1 Pee 3 -Eay-Tees Sarned 2 . 
 
 2 over all North America. The Old-Phonographic expression of this 
 phrase would be Ver* Bedoid 1 Ncr-Ith Em-Bay-Kay. 
 
 27 for what I did not. (ti) What is here added by shortening the sign 
 (Ef 2) for For. See p. 63, xvi. of this Eeader. (&) The practiced reporter may, in 
 some phrases, omit /, BATHEB THAN DISJOIN THE LETTEB FOLLOWING IT, writing, 
 for instance, Fet 2 -Dent, instead of Fet a -Tetoid:Dent>, for "For ichat I did not." 
 (See the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary, under the word /.) There is an in- 
 stance of the application of this plan in the following phrase-sign for "For what 1 
 did come." 
 
 as no law for slavery. Slay being used as a (special) word-sign fur 
 flowery, this phrase-sign falls under the general principles of phrase-wri ing even 
 as to using, for sake of convenience, Sel instead of Slay ; for it is allowable and not 
 unfrequent to change the direction of a letter having two directions, or to change 
 the outline of a word (sometimes even of a sign-word), in order to secure a plirase- 
 sign. For instance, in Tees 2 -El-En-Ef, it is a ^ctU-^cnmcnf<lct, not only is the hook 
 of the word-sign of icM (Wel s ) omitted, but the stroke is written downward. The 
 hook of knovm is also omitted so that/uc< (Ef) may be joined. 
 
 29 by telling me. 23T, R. 1, o. 
 
 so a law <lie Constitution. In this case a long dasli is substitute I for 
 
 the repeated words, " That does not make." 276, a. This is a novel and valuable 
 characteristic of Standard Phonography. 
 
KEY TO TUB REPORTING EXERCISES. 129 
 
 for slavery. That but proves that the Constitution itself is no law. 
 The first thing in regard to any 
 
 f) O statute, constitution, or decree is not to determine by means 
 ''^ of it what other things are or are not law, but whether itself 
 is or is not law. Preliminary to applying the 1 yard-stick 2 to the meas- 
 urement of the cloth is the inquiry whether it is a yard-stick whether 
 it is a true measure. 
 
 Yii, ( institution can not be a law for slavery. It can not be, if for 
 no other reason than that, so far as it may be for slavery, it is void. 
 Just so far 3 it is void for absurdity. Not less, but infinitely more, ab- 
 surd would the Constitution be in declaring man a chattel than in de- 
 claring wood stone, or stone wood. But surely 4 you would not 6 regard 
 as law the declaration that wood is stone or stone wood. How much 
 less, then, should you suffer the declaration that man is a chattel to 
 command your respect and obedience ! 8 We are surprised and amused 
 
 OO 1 to applying the. The Old-Phonographic expression of this phrase 
 Y* 1 would be Petoid* Pel 3 :' ing' e 1 i. ., two strokes, two dots, and three lift- 
 ings, while the Standard-Phonographic expression requires but two strokes and one 
 lifting, and has the merit of greater legibility. 
 
 yard-stick In this contraction stick is represented by the Steh-loop (#) 
 The character of the discourse here hardly justinVs ihe use of this sign as a special 
 contraction. It is rather an instance of the use for general purposes, by the expe- 
 rienced reporter, of contractions which would be employed by the beginner for 
 special purposes only. The experienced reporter, in the course of his practice, will 
 so thoroughly memorize many contractions invented for special purpose?, that he 
 may safely introduce them into any kind of reporting, especially if they are suffi- 
 ciently suggestive not to depend much upon the context for legibility. 
 
 3 just so far. The principle of 236, 8 allowing the omis-ion of t when it 
 occurs between s and another consonant is almost as applicable and serviceable in 
 phrr.se-writing as in the writing of single words. See phrases commencing with 
 JUST in the Standard-Phonograplrc Dictionary. 
 
 4 but surely The Standard-Phonographic principle of enlarging a small 
 Ar-hook to add I may be advantageously employed to add the termination ly to 
 ture, Slier 2 ; Slier] 2 , surely ; and near, Ner 1 ; Nerl 1 , nearly; but never when the 
 s : gn thus produced would have some other and conflicting value; and hence Merl J 
 should not be used for merely ; for this use might conflict with the use of that sign 
 for ininwrally. 
 
 6 you -would i>ot. See p. 61, x. of this Reader. 
 
 and obedience. (a) The general rule which I have observed in devising 
 a contraction for a word and as many of its derivatives as can safely be represented 
 by one comraction, is, to po only so far in their expression as they coincide, and 
 sometimes to stop short of that if the words are very Ion:.', and a suggestive contrac- 
 tion can be secured without. To illustrate, Disobedient, Disi>letlienily, and Diso* 
 beJience, being of different parts of speech, can safely be represented by one con- 
 
130 8EOOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 by the historical fact that a Roman challenged for his favorite horse 
 the honors due only to a man. But wherein is it more absurd to count 
 a horse for a man, as did the Roman, than to count a man for a horse, 
 as docs the slaveholder ? 
 
 Is it claimed that the Constitution is a law for slavery on the ground 
 that it is a bargain between the whites and blacks for making one the 
 slaves of the other ? But such a bargain would be void for lack of 
 mutuality and consideration. It is not credible that the blacks 7 came 
 into it ; and if they did, it is not possible that they received an equiva- 
 lent, or, indeed, any return whatever for consenting* to be reduced to 
 slavery. Such a reduction does of itself incapacitate for receiving any, 
 even the least measure of compensation. In the very selling of his 
 manhood, the seller puts it out of his power to receive the* purchase- 
 money. He can not be paid for making himself a chattel. Eveiy 
 attempted bargain for unmanning himself is necessarily void. Per- 
 haps it will be said that the bargain in question was not between the 
 whites and blacks, but between the whites and the whites the whites 
 
 traction; for, the context will determine whether the contraction should be read as 
 an adjective, an adverb, or a noun. These three words coincide in the syllables 
 (linol/ed, which is all that is necessary to express to suggest Uu-se words. Those 
 syllables are expressed by Di-es'-Bed. (//) It sometimes happens that, while a word 
 which is formed by prefixes (as din-obedient from obedient) can be contracted, the 
 primitive word can not, because the expression of the common part of the primi- 
 tive and its derivatives (as Bed for OBEDient-ly-ce) is not sufficiently suggestive, 
 and may have some other and conflicting use. (c) Vocalization, however, as 
 Bed(e) 1 for Obedient, may render the contraction sufficiently suggestive, and there- 
 fore allowable. 
 
 7 blacks. This is a special contraction, formed in accordance with the prin- 
 ciples of -J8T, K. 2. 
 
 for consenting. p. 112, B. 7, 6. 
 
 pats It out of Ms power to receive the. (a) The sign for It is short- 
 ened to tidd Out (see p. 63, xvi. of this Reader) ; Of is implied, as is very frequently 
 the case before hi*; Hi* is added by the small circle (Iss) ; and To between Power 
 and Receive is implied by joining, (b) It may be observed here that To, in such a 
 c:ie, is not implied without any reference to the context; for a junction in one case 
 may imply nothing, in another case Of, and in another case To. The tame prin- 
 ciple of legibility and distinction applies here that was defined on p. 72, 4 13 , c, 
 namely When the same thing (letter, word, or principle, no matter what) has 
 different uses (as the joining has, as just mentioned), the uses must be so different 
 that one could not reasonably be substituted for the other in any case, (c) This 
 phrase Puts it out of Ms power to receive would very probably have been written 
 it the Reporting Style of the Old Phonography, Pets 3 Tee* Tee 3 Petsoid'-Pee-Ar 
 Petoid'-Iiays-Vee i. e., nine strokes and four liftings; while the Standard-Phono- 
 graphic expression requires but five strokes and not one lifting, i. e., gains 100 per 
 cent, over the Old expr jssion. 
 
KEY TO THE KEPOETOiTG EXERCISES. 131 
 
 of the North and the whites of the South. But quite as emphatically, 
 in such case as in the other, would the bargain lack validity. For cer- 
 tainly it is not competent for two parties to annul the rights of a third. 
 They may enter into a compact to confirm, but not to destroy, his 
 rights. To say that the Constitution is a bargain between two descrip- 
 tions 10 of persons to take away all the rights, ay, even all the man- 
 hood, of a third, is to say that the Constitution is the guiltiest and 
 foulest of all conspiracies, and at the very furthest remove from all 
 possibility of being law. 
 
 But to return to my declaration, that even if the Constitution were 
 from beginning to end in favor of slavery," it nevertheless could not 
 be a law for slavery. Do not understand me' 2 to admit that it is in 
 
 i" between two descriptions. This same sign might in some other case 
 be written for " between all descriptions ;" but the context here makes the use of it 
 for " between two descriptions'* safe and allowable. The following words " all tbn 
 manhood of a third" would not accord with reading this sign "between all de- 
 scriptions." That " between two descriptions" is the proper reading is also infer- 
 rible from the fact that the preceding sentence is speaking of ttco parties annulling 
 the rights of a tldi-d. The words, "7b say that tlie Constitution is a bargain," etc., 
 commencing this sentence, show that Ihe speaker is continuing the discussion of the 
 question of "a bargain between the whites of the North and the whites of the 
 South," mentioned in the fourth sentence preceding; and mentioned or adverted to 
 in every sentence following that up to the word in which this phrase-sign (Bet 1 - 
 \Wn-Bedoid-Skershons) occurs. I give the few preceding sentences as a specimen 
 of the discriminating criticism which is now and then required in reading notes 
 not that it takes the practiced reporter a hundredth part of the time to settle such a 
 question as I have consumed in setting forth the reasons in favor of the correct 
 reading of the phrase-si^n which is the subject of this note. The exercise of dis- 
 crimination which will be demanded through a few years' practice of reporting is 
 beiter calculated, in my opinion, to develop a fine critical sense, a minute knowl- 
 edge of language, an ability to determine from what a speaker has said what he 
 thould say, than any other study, not even excepting that of the Classics. There 
 is a close similarity between the mental exercise required by the study of the 
 Classics and that demanded by the study and practice of reporting ; bat the re- 
 porter's profession (which calls for constant study) more imperatively requires that 
 beneficial mental exercise which is induced by classical study; and his reputation 
 as a reporter and his income depending upon the earnestness and carefulness with 
 which he pursues his profession, he has greater inducements to call forth his utmost 
 power than are usually afforded to classical students. There is the additional ad- 
 vantage that the constant and varied accumulation of knowledge necessitated by 
 the pursuit of his profession sustains and adds to his native and acquired intellectual 
 ' power ; while the modicum of valuable knowledge secured by the many months 
 of study required for the attainment of a barely tolerable knowledge of the classical 
 languages is a meager compensation for the toil. 
 
 i In favor of slavery. 246, 1. 
 
 n do not understand me. p. 169, B 12, b. 
 
132 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 favor of it. Most emphatically do I deny that it is. Such denial w 
 due to truth and to the memory of the men who adopted the Consti- 
 tution. 
 
 The Constitution is not for slavery, 13 unless they who adopted it 
 meant it to be for slavery. But there can be no evidence that they so 
 meant, unless there is evidence that they saw slavery in the Constitu- 
 tion. 1 * When the masses vote for a paper, it is never to be alleged 
 that they vote for crime in it, unless the crime is on the face of it, and 
 they are thereby certainly apprised of what they are doing. Hence we 
 do our ancestors great and cruel wrong when we charge them with 
 having established the superlative injustice of slavery in a paper which, 
 at the most, but covertly alludes to it. If slavery is openly there, then 
 blame them ; but not if it only lurks there. It is worthy of mention 
 that the courts concur with common sense in holding that no law is to 
 be interpreted in behalf of palpable 1 * injustice, unless such injustice is 
 expressed" in irresistibly clear terms. Says the Supreme Court of the 
 United States : ' ' Where rights are infringed, where fundamental prin- 
 ciples are overthrown, where the general system" of the laws is depart- 
 ed from, the legislative intention must be expressed with irresistible 
 clearness to induce a court of justice 
 
 O9 to suppose a design to effect such objects." 2 Cranch, 390. 
 
 *^*-^ Surely he must be quiteignorant of the spirit which prevailed 
 among the American masses at the close of the Eevolutionary War, 
 who believes that a Constitution expressly and clearly for slavery 
 would have been adopted by them. 
 
 is Constitution Is not for slavery. The frequent occurrence of this word 
 brings it under the phrase-writing principle of 244, E. 3, 1 namely, " A common 
 substitute, or a noun of frequent occurrence, ia frequently joined to a following 
 verb." 
 
 i In tile Constitution. The first t of Constitution is omitted here (In 
 accordance with 236, 8, ft), in order to secure the advantage of phrase-writing. The 
 same principle is followed in writing wii-onntitntionti/. See this woid in the 
 Standard-Phonographic Dictionary; also the Compendium, p. 113, K. 15. 
 
 i palpable See p. 92, 16 3 , of this Reader. The form given for this word in 
 Isaac Pitman's Vocabulary is Pee-Lay-Pee-Bel. Standard Phonography makes a 
 considerable gain over the Old Phonography by its improved outlines in many cases 
 where no new principles are involved except the principles of analogy, uniformi'y, 
 and speed, which for the first are fully developed (or applied) in Staidard Phonog- 
 raphy. 
 
 Is expressed. p. 1S2, E. 4; 246, 1. 
 
 " general system. p. 169, E. 12, b ; 237, E. 2. 
 
33 
 
 KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 133 
 
 But it is said that they who framed the Constitution intended it to 
 be for slavery. What if they did ? The Constitution is not what the 
 handful 1 who framed it, but what the masses who adopted it, intended 
 it to be. A deed of land is not what the scrivener, but what the 
 grantor auu grantee meant to have it. 2 
 
 I am not willing, however, that the framers of the Constitution 
 should be misrepresented or dishonored. I see not one particle of evi- 
 dence that they meant to establish slavery, or even to spare it for 
 another generation. They put into the Constitution* many powers, 
 any one of which is capable of being 4 wielded for the immediate and 
 entire* overthrow* of the whole system of American slavery. 7 Did they 
 qualify them so as to exempt slavery from their operation ? This they 
 certainly would have done had they been intent to establish slavery, 
 or even to prolong its life beyond a few years.* But they did it not.* 
 
 handful. p. 194, K. 9. 
 
 meant to Have It.. To is implied here by Joining, and it is added to 
 hare by shortening its sign. The best expression in the Old Phonography for this 
 easily and rapidly uttered phrase would be Ment 2 Pet"id 2 -Vee-Tee ; i. e., four 
 strokes and one lifting; while the Standard-Phonographic expression requires but 
 two strokes and no lifting ; i. e., is more than twice as fast as the Old expression, 
 and yet probably not faster than the utterance would be. 
 
 3 isito the Constitution. The is omitted here under the principle of 250, 3, 
 and the flrst t of Constitution is omitted (in accordance with 236, 3, 1), to secure a 
 desirable phrase-sign. 
 
 Is capab'.c of beliijj. See p. 92, 16 3 , of this Header. If the usual form for 
 being were Bee-Ing, the Ing would be omitted in such a combination as this, be- 
 cause of its difficulty. If the usual form were Bee:ing (i. e., with the dot ' ing'), the 
 dot might be omitted in such a phrase, under the principle of 237, R. 1, b. 
 
 s cut Ire. Enter 1 .is a word-sign for entire, and Enter'-EI for entirely, were 
 flrst presented by the author. The Old-Phonographic outlines were En-Tee-Ray, 
 entire; En-Tee-Kay-Lay, entirely. " Entirety" will be written by the derivative 
 word-sign, Enter'-Tee. p. 142, E. 5. The Old-Phonographic form for this word 
 was En-Tee-Ray-Tee. 
 
 overthrew. 229, R. 1, a. 
 
 7 American slavery. This is a special contraction, formed in accordance 
 With the principle of 23T, R. 2, b. 
 
 8 beyond a few years. 246, 1. 
 
 but they did It not. The best Old-Phonoaraphic expression for this 
 phrase would have been Tetoid 2 -Dhee-Dee-Dee (or -Ded) Tee 2 Net 1 . The Old Pho- 
 nography would have done better with the more usual form of expression Bn t'i(>/ 
 did not do it (or do no). But Standard Phonography is us. well adapted to extempo- 
 raneous speech as to the studied compositions of books. It not in Standard Phonog- 
 raphy is represented by Tent. It could not be joined to Dud ; yet to avoid the loss j 
 
 i 
 
134 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 They did not say, "No person except a slave," but " No person shall 
 be deprived of life, liberty, or property without due process of law." 
 They did not say, "The right of the people except slaves," but "The 
 right of the people to keep and bear arms shall not be infringed." It 
 is superfluous to remark that the masters will throw down their whips 
 whenever Government shall obey the Constitution and protect the 
 slaves in taking up their 10 muskets. The framers of the Constitution 11 
 did not say, "The right of the people except the slaves," but "The 
 right of the people to be secure in their persons," etc., 12 " shall not be 
 violated." Nor did they confine Congress to color or condition in ob- 
 taining recruits for the army and navy. I need not say that slavery 
 would come to a speedy end were Congress to go among the blacks as 
 freely as among the whites to supply the army and navy with officers 
 and privates. It is only by observing in every direction the policy of 
 proscribing, degrading, and outraging the black man 13 that slavery can 
 be maintained. Again, in forbidding attainder, the framers of the 
 Constitution did not except slavery, which is the worst possible 14 form 
 
 of time of writing it in its proper position when standing alone (i. e., on the line), 
 U is made to overlap the Ded as a substitute for joining. 
 In taking up their. 237, E. 1, 6; 264. - 
 
 11 the framers of the Constitution. 164. To secure a desirable sign 
 for this phrase, which it now appears will probably occur frequently in this part of 
 the speech, the of Framers is omitted, and the first t of Constitution, in accordance 
 with 236, 8, 1. 
 
 12 etc. (a) The common "<fc" is a contraction for the Latin ET (and), the 
 left-hand portion being E and the right-hand portion being intended for the upright 
 portion of T, which is made into T by tbe concluding stroke; I say concluding 
 
 \ stroke, for the proper and easiest way of making this sign is to commence with the 
 
 I right-hand stroke, as though making a v backward, and making a circle at the top 
 
 i of the left-hand side of ttie V, to run a line across the two strokes; which line may 
 
 ! be joined, in rapid writing, with the following word, or with the fo'lowing letter as 
 
 j in writing " ere." (&) The expedient " <fc" may properly be written (if written cor- 
 
 ( rectly) for and in all cases in transcribing, except, of course, at the beginning of a 
 
 1 sentence, (c) The contraction " &c." or " etc." (which last is the form now usually 
 
 ' adopted in books) is a contraction of the Latin ft cet-era. (See Webster's Un- 
 
 i abridged Dictionary, under ET CETERA.) It is sometimes pronounced " et sctera," 
 
 ' or (being translated) " and so forth." In either case the reporter may write Tees-- 
 
 Ter ('. #., et si-t-era). (d) If any person should wish a greaier disiinction between 
 
 the phrase Et c,tera (Tees 2 -Ter) and It in true (also TeesVTer) than the 1:011- 
 
 conflicting uxes of the sign, it may be secured by writing the more frequent et cetera 
 
 with Tees'-'-Ter. with the Ar-hook implied (171, 2), and Jt is true with TeeMss-Tor. 
 
 i. 6., with a distinct Ar hook. 
 
 blacfe mnn. Bel 3 for 'black is a special contraction. 237, R. 2. 
 i worst possible The t of icot-xt is omitted here, in accordance with 200,8, 
 in order to sec ire the advantage of a phrase-sign. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 135 
 
 of attainder. Nor did they provide for the defeating of the writ of 
 habeas corpm u by allowing the plea the entirely effectual plea of 
 property in man. They provided for the suspension" of the writ in 
 certain specified cases ; but slavery is not one of those cases. Well did 
 Professor Christian say, " It is this writ which makes slavery impossible 
 in England." 
 
 When I said that the framers of the Constitution put many powers 
 into it that could be used effectually for the destruction of slavery, I 
 hope you did not understand me to claim that such use of them was 
 their purpose. All I claim at this point is, that inasmuch as it was 
 understood on all hands that slavery was to cease in a few years, no 
 care was taken, and no disposition was felt, to protect it from being 
 swept away by the principles and provisions of the Constitution. 
 
 Am I asked why the framers of the Constitution did not in terms 
 provide for the abolition of slavery, I answer that, in the first place, 17 
 inasmuch as slavery was dying 18 and doomed, this was not thought to 
 be necessary ; and that, in the second place, 19 they were not willing to 
 
 is habeas corpus. This is a contraction formed in accordance with the prin- 
 ciple of 237, R. 2, 1, Hay standing for Habeas and Ker for Corpus. But it may be 
 used as a general contraction. 
 
 ' suspension. The publisher of Standard Phonography, in devising con- 
 tractions, has constantly kept ia view the principle of making ANALOGOUS 
 CONTRACTIONS FOR ANALOGOUS WORDS; so tliat one contraction famil- 
 iarized unually indicates or mtggexts Vie contractions for analogous words. Many 
 contractions, for instance, are formed in analogy with the contractions for appre- 
 henxiV'-sionCPri-ii 3 ); apprehensible (Prens 3 ) ; as Ses-Pen 2 , suspension-sive ; Sten", 
 extension-give; Stens 5 , extensible ; Spen 2 , expensive-ness ; Spen 3 , expansive-sion; 
 Spens 3 . expansible; Dee-Klen, declension; Rays-Pen, responsive; Rays-Pens, 
 responsible bility ; i. ., contractions of words ending with -nsion-sive-niveness, 
 terminate with an En-hook; while the contractions of words ending with -nftible- 
 ility, terminale with the "Ens-circle. 1ST, R. 2, a. Compare the Old-Phonographic 
 Kays Pens, expensive; Bays-Pens, responsible. If you make a contraction for 
 rexponsive (Rays-Pens) in analogy with that for expensive (Kays-Pens), it conflicts 
 with responsible. Kays-Pens 3 , expansive (in analogy with expensive), would con- 
 flict with Kays-Pens 3 , expansible (in analogy with rexpunxible). So Analogy, Uni- 
 formity, Consistency, being sacrificed at the outset, had to be sacrificed to the end. 
 
 i' in the first plnci^. This phrase-sign, though employed in any kind of 
 reporting, is formed in accordance with the principle of 237. JR. 2, 6 Ef standing 
 tor fii-st and Pel for place. 
 
 is slavery -was dying. The frequent use of the word slavery in this 
 speech brings it under the principle of phrase-writing expressed in 244, R. 8, 1. 
 
 10 In the second plnce. This phrase-sign, though properly used in all 
 kinds of reporting, is formed in accordance with the principles of 237, R. 2, b Skay 
 
136 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 let posterity learn from the pag ;s of the Constitution that their country 
 had ever been disgraced with slavery. The silence of the Constitution 
 respecting slavery shows far more loathing and shame of it than could 
 any express condemnation of it, however emphatic. 
 
 But it is said that there is history to prove that the framers of the 
 Constitution were willing to let slavery continue. I admit it. What 
 is more, I admit that there are clauses in the Constitution which con- 
 tribute proof of the truth of this history. Nevertheless, to go into 
 history for the sake of interpreting these clauses in behalf of crime is, 
 as we have already seen, wholly unwarranted by the rules of interpret- 
 ation. It is its letter, and not its history, that is the Constitution. 
 For the sake of the argument, however, I will admit that these clauses 
 refer to slavery. 
 
 But for how long was slavery 90 to continue ? Only for some twenty 
 years were they willing to let it 
 
 O A continue. And what is 1 more, the mass of it was reasonably 
 -* * expected to be of the comparatively mild type of house and 
 farm slavery, and not of the severe type of plantation- slavery. 
 
 (i. e., sec.) standing for second and Pel for plicf, (>>) Other signs for correspond- 
 ing phrases may be formed in like manner, as Kn-lth-Pel, in the third place Ith 
 standing for third ; En'-EfMth-Pel, in the fourth pliice with Ilh to distinguish it 
 from In Vie flrxt place; En EP-Ef-Pel, in the fifth place; En-En Pel, in the next 
 place ; En-El 2 (fi>r <)-PeI (or Nels-Pels 2 ), in the last place. 
 
 20 was slavery. 244, R. 8, 4. 
 
 OJ * and ivltat is p. 104, 22', of this Reader. 
 
 3 plantation. This may be regarded as a special contraction. The full 
 form would be Plen-Teeshon. (//) Generally, in Standard Phonography, when the 
 same sign stands for a primitive word and one or more derivatives, some or nil of 
 them being contracted, that sign is written in the proper or assigned prition .f the 
 primitive, whatever may be the accented vowel (i. e., the proper position) of the de- 
 rivatives; thus, Es'-Km, assimilate-d-ion; Picnt 3 , plant-ed (er)-ation; Kay-Pee J , 
 cs~~ 
 
 II 
 
 i 
 
 Kret, hypocrite-iciil ; En-Dren 1 , iii'ioctrinate-d-ion ; En-Sper 1 , inspire-ation ; Ent 1 - 
 Ket, intellfCt-nal-U'ility ; Ent'-Med, intimidate-d-ion ; Kn-Vet', invit.-d-ation; Em- 
 Jay 3 , majesty-ic ; Ein-Thed", mcthod-i<--ical. Methodism; Em Thedst 2 , Metlmdist- 
 ic-ical ; Fet'-Ger, photography-ic ist-er; Pers'-Pet, precipitate-d ion ; Ray'-'-Fet, 
 refute-d-ation ; Ray'-Pet, repea>ud, repetition; Ila> 3 -Pet, repute-d-ation' Ray a - 
 Ped, rapid-ity-ly. (c) This general principle correspond* to the general rule of 
 position applying to lerivative word signs. See 261, R. 2. It serves to distinguish 
 many contracted outlines, which by the general rule of position would occupy the 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 137 
 
 I said that the framers of the Constitution expected slavery to con- 
 tinue for only some twenty years. The historical truth that, in this 
 country 3 as well as in England, 4 the cessation of the African slave- 
 trade was looked to as the cessation of slavery itself, is undisputed. Now 
 history is 6 confirmed at this point by the migration and importation 
 clause of the Constitution that clause protecting the trade for only 
 twenty years. But that slavery itself was expected to continue only so 
 lung is manifest from the fact that this protection, brief as it was, was 
 to be enjoyed only by the then existing States." But if the new States 
 (and remember that the Constitution expressly provides for their ad- 
 mission)' were not to be allowed to participate in the African slave- 
 trade, it was because they were not to be allowed to have slavery. 
 Having slavery without recruiting it from Africa was a thing not then 
 thought of. If, however, the new States were denied the right to 
 have slavery, it follows that the old States were not to be allowed to 
 establish it, since that would be to allow an inequality of rights he- 
 same position, and hence be undistinguished except by meaning (or the context). 
 (d) The suggest! veness (i. e , legibility) of contractions for derivative words is 
 favored by placing them in the position of the primitive; for. the primitive word 
 being first read or suggested, that and the context will at once indicate what deriva 
 live is to be employed. For instance, Em-Tbed 2 will easily be read as, or suggest, 
 >ii<-t/ii)if, and Hint, if it be not the required word, will suggest, in connection with 
 the context, the proper word for the place, namely, methodic, method toil, method* 
 it-till;/, or Methodism, (e) When the proper position of a primitive wrd and that 
 of the derivative words would be different, as of Jieftitf{ 3 ) and RefuttitionC*), and 
 the corresponding position of the two words would be the same, they are both 
 placed in that position (as Bay'-'-Fet, Refute-d-ation), units* a. different position is 
 required for distinction's sake; as Ray 3 -Pet, Eepute-d-ation, to distinguish these 
 words from Eay--Ped, rapid-ly, rapidity (which is in conformity with the rule), aud 
 Kay'-Pet, repeat-ed, repetition. 
 
 s i-i tUis counti y. The word-sign Kay 2 for country was flrst introduced by 
 the Hand Book. 
 
 * In E up;! a ucT. Ing-end 1 (/.*., Eng'nd), as a word-sign for England, was 
 introduced by the Hand- Rook. It is distinct from the fign for Englixh and thing 
 (Ing 1 ), and is more suggestive in phrase- writing, especially when brought out of its 
 proper position, than the Old sign (Ing 1 ). 
 
 * history Is 244, K. 3 (1). 
 
 existing Statcs._237, K. 1, 1) 
 
 1 ( ). The reporter should endeavor to indicate parentheses as often as pos- 
 sible. If not indicated, they are apt frequently to cause difficulty in reading; for. 
 if the reader should not at once observe the parenthesis, and read it with suitable 
 inflsctious, the idea not being received, the sentence would appear confused, and 
 tuach time would be lost in arriving at the correct reading. 
 
138 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 tween the new and the ol i States.* No one claims that such inequal- 
 ity exists in the contemplation* of the Constitution. 
 
 Another proof that slavery 1 * was allowed only a brief duration is to 
 be found in the Ordinance for the Northwest Territory. ' ' That and 
 the Constitution were framed at nearly the same time, 12 and to some 
 extent 13 by the same men. The Ordinance provides for the recapture 
 of fugitive servants ; and, inasmuch as it speaks expressly of slavery, 
 we will assume that fugitive slaves are included. But the Ordinance, 
 like the migration and importation clause in the Constitution, conlir.as 
 its benefits at this point (if benefits they may be called) to the old 
 States. It was only those who had escaped from "any one of the 
 original States" that might be recaptured. Hence, like that clause, 
 the Ordinance also shows that the new States were not to have slavery 
 at all, and that the old States were not to have it after the few years 
 allowed them in which to bring it to a peaceful and gradual close. 
 
 But I may be asked why, since the Ordinance and the migration and 
 importation clause both prove so clearly the policy and purpose of 
 abolishing slavery, there is nothing in the fugitive servant clause of 
 the Constitution to prove the like policy and purpose. Why does not 
 this clause, like that in the Ordinance, limit the right of recapture to 
 
 8 and the old States. The, is omitted here, and and is adapted to the posi- 
 tion of old. (6) The practiced reporter may thus usually dispose of the phrase and 
 t/if, thus saving many a lifting of the pen, without at all impairing legibility. 
 
 In the contemplation. 250, 3. This phrase-sign might be read in con- 
 tfmplation; instead of "in the contemplation." In all such cases of omissions and 
 possible double readings, either the intended sense is not affected by the omission 
 of a word, or the context, carefully considered, will show that a word needs to be 
 supplied. 
 
 i that slavery. 244, E. 3, (6). 
 
 " Northwest Territory. The principle of special contraction is partially 
 employed in writing this phrase-sign. If ttiis phrase were occurring frequently, it 
 might be written tin accordance with 237, R. 2, 1) Ner-Way-Ter, i. e., transferred to 
 common print, "Nor. W. Ter." 
 
 12 at licnrly the same time. This phrase would very probably have been 
 written, in the Reporting Style of the Old Phonography, Tee 3 Ner>-Kl 6 1 (i. e., a 
 dot above the line) Hem" Tee 1 ; i. e., with five strokes, one dot, and four liftings; 
 vhile the Standard-Phonographic expression requires but four strokes and no dots 
 and no liftings ; i. e., is nearly 100 per cent, faster than the Old expression, (b) tiime 
 time may usuully l>e written fcfemt, without vocalization (with ii), and be di.'tin- 
 guished from some time ^Semt>, provided the preceding the is expressed, as in this 
 phrase-sign. 
 
 i* and to some extent. And (Ketoid) is here prefixed to Sem 4 , to some. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 139 
 
 "the original States?" 14 The simple and sole explanation is that this clause 
 in the Constitution does not refer 1 * to slaves. 
 
 The fact that this clause does not limit its uses to the old States 
 utterly forbids the putting of a pro-slavery interpretation upon it. If 
 the Convention intended to have it apply to slaves, why did they not 
 qualify it so as to make it correspond with the Ordinance and the I 
 migration and importation clause ? 
 
 Again, the language of the fugitive servant clause in the Constitu- 
 tion makes it wholly inapplicable to slaves. The persons referred to in 
 this clause are debtors. Service is due from them. But the slave, 
 being a mere chattel, and. therefore, incapable of making a contract, 
 can owe nothing. Says Justice Best: " A slave is incapable of com- 
 pact." The slave codes" all declare that he can own nothing." But 
 manifestly, he who can own nothing can owe nothing. 
 
 And there is still one other reason \vhy we should believe that the 
 framers of the Constitution did not intend to help slavery live, and 
 why we should believe that they committed themselves to no guiltier 
 policy guilty I admit it was than that of allowing the dying demon 
 a few years in which to die. It is, that to believe the contrary involves 
 them in the grossest hypocrisy. They began the Constitution with the 
 solemn declaration that they intended it to "secure the blessings of 
 liberty ;" and when they had finished it, and were about to submit it 
 to the people, they unanimously struck from it the word " servitude," 
 and supplied its place with "service," for the avowed reason that 
 servitude denotes the condition of slaves, and service the obligations 
 of freemen. For one, I am not prepared to call them hypocrites, as 
 all virtually do who impute to them pro-slavery purposes. 
 
 35 
 
 I will, at this stage 1 of my remarks, speak of the pro-slavery 
 interpretations of the Constitution by anti-slavery men. 
 
 i to the original States. p. 169, E. 12, &. 
 
 > 8 does not refer. 25. 
 
 i slave codes. 182, R. 1, 7>. 
 
 i 7 nothing. Isaac Pitman has sometimes written this word En 3 Ing, and to 
 prevent clashing with Anything, the latter word (or phrase) was written Kn-Ith- 
 Iri;r. This plan did not produce satisfaction, and no other mode of remedying an 
 obvious difficulty having presented itself, he wrote En'-Ing, anything, and En-Ith- 
 Ing. nothing. This trouble is easily disposed of by providing Nothing with a needed 
 contraction, En-lth 2 . 
 
 O~ * at tills stas;e. This common phrase n^eds a phrase-sign, -which is 
 *}'' secured by changing for the purpose the usual form of stage (Steh- Jay), as 
 In the engraving. 
 
140 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Coming from such a source, they are peculiarly pernicious. The mass 
 of the American people 2 are worshipers 3 of the Constitution. They 
 recognize no higher authority. For anti-slavery men, therefore, to tell 
 them it is pro-slavery, is to bring them under a mighty influence to 
 uphold slavery. 4 Most lamentable, therefore, is it that so many of 
 these sincere lovers of freedom should be taxing their* ingenuity* to 
 prove that the Constitution is 7 pro-slavery. 
 
 Freedom can bear any other opposition better than 8 this, which she 
 encounters in the house of her friends. She can bear to be opposed by 
 the current religion of the country, for the people are fast losing all 
 respect for a conventional and spurious religion, which mixes itself up 
 with slavery,* instead of sternly demanding its extinction 10 She can 
 bear to be opposed by the Democratic party, which, Ahab-like, has 
 sold itself to work evil, or by such Republicans as use freedom to 
 serve party. But the one thing that freedom can not bear" is to have 
 anti-slavery men, anti-slavery leaders, the most distinguished 12 and 
 influential anti-slavery newspapers, at work to rob the poor and power- 
 less slave of the Constitution, and give it to the proud and powerful 
 slaveholder. Oh ! if there is anything that belongs to the slave, 13 it is 
 this paper, which our fathers 14 would not consent 16 to stain with the 
 word "slavery," and which they were 1 ' determined should go down 
 to posterity with a clean and fair face for liberty. 
 
 American people. p. 169, R. 12, 6. 
 
 3 worshipers. p. 194, E. 7. 
 
 4 to uphold slavery. 244, E. 8, (4). 
 
 taxing their. See the Standard Phonographic Dictionary, DHB, 5. 
 
 Ingenuity. p. 11T, 2S 5 , 1, of this Eeader. 
 i Constitution Is. 244, E. 3, (1). 
 
 s better thanSee this Eeader, p. 63, xiii. 
 
 with slavery. 244, E. 3, (5). 
 
 i extinction. See this and the related words in the Standard-Phonographic 
 Dictionary. 
 
 u freedom can not bear. 244, E. 3, (1). 
 11 most distinguished. 236, 8. 
 
 13 to the slave. To is implied before the by writing the tick (.Petoid) for the 
 latter in the fourth position. 
 
 14 which our fathers. See this Eeader, p. 62, xr. 
 18 -would not consent. p. 112, E. 7, l>. 
 
 ' and which tliey were See DHR in the Standard- Phonographic Dic- 
 tionary ; and also p. 62, xii. of this Eeader. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXKECISE8. 141 
 
 I have said" much to you in praise of the Constitution. Let it not 
 be 18 inferred, however, that I claim for it the first place in your hearts. 
 Among all state papers, such pre-eminence 18 belongs to the Declaration 
 of Independence. They greatly exaggerate the 20 merits of the Consti- 
 tution who see in it the origin of the Union. As it does itself declare, 
 it was made "in order to form 21 a more perfect Union." The Union 
 already existed. It had heen entered into even before 1776. - a It was, 
 however, the Paper of that memorable year the noblest political 
 paper ever sent over the world that was the first to set forth, formally 
 and authoritatively, the reason why the American Colonies" 3 should 
 become one nation, and the first 24 thus to set forth the sublime and 
 mighty principles which were 25 to vitalize and forever govern that na- 
 tion. This is the paper which deserves to be called the first Constitution 
 of our country ; for it is the first in the order of time and the first in tbe 
 degree of authority. One of the eminent statesmen (General Hoot) of 
 my State pronounced it "the 26 fundamental law of the land;" and 
 another (John C. Spencer) declared it to be "above all 27 constitutions 
 and all laws." The Federal Constitution should be interpreted in the 
 light of the Declaration of Independence. 28 But, alas ! in these de- 
 generate days, that Constitution, Tvith all its pro-slavery interpreta- 
 tions, is blindly worshiped, and the great and heavenly principles of 
 
 1" I liave saitl. See this Reader, p. 110, 25", and '. 
 
 1 9 liet it not be. Tent 5 , -it not, is a valuable word-sign, first presented by 
 the Hand-Book. See phrases beginning with LET IT NOT in the Standard Phono- 
 graphic Dictionary. 
 
 i such pre-eminence Pre-eminence is written in full, as in the engrav- 
 ing, and thus distinguished from P/ominence-y and Permnnence-y, which are 
 contracted. See these words and EMINENCE in the Dictionary. 
 
 20 exaggerate the Isaac Pitman gave Kays-Jay-Ret as the outline of this 
 word. See this Reader, p. 125, 3 1 8 . 
 
 i in order to form See this Reader, p. 68, 3 33 . 
 
 22 '76 See this Reader, p. 76, 7 3 . 
 
 23 American colonies p. 169, R. 12. 
 
 a and the first.- See this Reader, p. 138, 84 8 . 
 
 25 which were. See this Reader, p. 66, 3 11 . 
 
 * pronounced it the. 236, 3. 
 
 * nbve all. See this Reader, p. 62, xiv. The principle of adding all and 
 will by an El-hook, or of are, were, or our by an Ar-hook, is, of course, as applica- 
 l>le within a word, as in this case, as in ihose words to which an El-hook or Ar-hook 
 is prefixed, as Bel 1 , by all; thus, Bee 2 -Vel, above all; Schel 2 , such will; Bee--Ver, 
 above our ; Sober 11 , such are. 
 
 28 Declaration of Imlependence. This, like any other similar phrase, as 
 oon as it appears likely to occur often, is contracted under the principle of 237, R. 2. I 
 
 f 
 
14:2 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 the Declaration of Independence are ridiculed as "a fanfaronade of 
 nonsense," and as "glittering generalities." The Constitution, instead 
 of being used to disparage and make void the Declaration of Inde- 
 pendence, should rather he viewed as supplemental to it, and as serv- 
 ing to carry out into 29 detail the broad and precious principles of that 
 first and greatest Constitution. Our fathers could have had** no pos- 
 sible right to contravene or slight those principles. Had they, when 
 making and adopting the 31 Constitution, been guilty of overlooking or 
 in any wise dishonoring them, they would therein have been guilty 
 of the most infamous treason toward all their countrymen who had 
 expended treasure or periled life to establish them, and also toward 
 the good Lafayette and the other gallant foreigners whom those prin- 
 ciples had attracted to our shores. 
 
 I spoke of the principles of the Declaration of Independence. Prom- 
 inent among them is that which asserts that " all men are created 
 equal." This principle is the very soul of the Declaration of Inde- 
 pendence ; and being therefore the very soul of the Constitution, it 
 instantly annihilates all possible pro-slavery interpretations of that 
 instrument. I do not forget that, according to Chief Justice Taney's 
 recent discovery, black men did not come within the scope of this prin- 
 ciple, and were not a part of "all men." 
 
 O ? Nevertheless, they were men, and they voted and fought by 
 *^" the side of those who affirmed that "all men are created 
 equal." Why, then, does the Chief Justice exclude them 1 The words 
 of the Declaration of Independence do not intimate their exclusion. 
 What rules of interpretation are there to authorize him to go away 
 from the plain meaning of these plain words for the purpose 1 of fasten- 
 ing the crudest wrong upon the black man, and of involving the 
 fathers in the deepest and basest and most hypocritical injustice? 
 There are none. 8 In gross violation of the rules of legal interpreta- 
 
 carry out Into. See this Reader, p. 63, xvL 
 so could Have Had. p. 63, xvi. of this Reader. 
 '-' when malting and adopting the. See this Reader, p. 72, 5 4 . 
 
 9/ i for the purpose. This phrase sign, though properly employed in any 
 *-'" kind of reporting, is formed in accordance with the principle of special 
 contraction (287, R. 2, &), the being omitted under the principle of 250, 3. 
 
 11 there are none. Are, in phrase-writing, is frequently expressed by Ray; 
 but when written alone, and generally when commencing phrase-signs, the most 
 convenient sign is Ar. It is the most convenient also because of allowing shorten- 
 ing for the derivative sign-word art, and lengthening for the addition of cihr. See 
 
KEY TO THE KEPOKTKSTG- EXERCISES. 143 
 
 tion, at the expense of blackening the fame of the fathers, and at the 
 expense of outraging all the rights and murdering all the manhood of 
 his equal brothers, 3 has the Chief Justice undertaken to show that our 
 fathers, when speaking of " all men," did not mean all men. And all 
 this has he done, notwithstanding the fathers spoke so evidently with 
 philosophical precision, and notwithstanding, too, that they spoke with 
 religious solemnity, 4 and called God to witness their* sincerity. But 
 our fathers knew as well as we do that all parts of the human brother- 
 hood are equally dear to the great heart of their common Maker. 
 Were they, then, such brazen-faced hypocrites as to dare appeal to His 
 knowledge of their conscious rectitude, when all the while they were 
 guilty of the mental reservation which the Chief Justice imputes to 
 them ? guilty of deliberately excluding a portion of their fellow-men 
 from the equal rights of all men ? nay, guilty of denying that God has 
 sent" that portion into the world with rights 7 equal to those of other 
 men? 
 
 The Chief Justice admits that 8 " All men" " would seem to embrace 
 the 9 whole human family." 10 "Seems, Madam! Nay, .it is." He 
 also admits that the words " would be so understood if used in a simi- 
 lar 11 instrument at this day." Important admission ! Entirely fatal, 
 as we shall see, to his attempt to pervert their significance ! For that 
 the statesmen of this day have a broader, juster, and more fraternal 
 
 DHK in the Dictionary. It would not be allowable to shorten Bay for art; and if 
 allowable, the sign would not be suggestive. In Standard Phonography it would 
 be allowable to lengthen Ray for are tkr, but Eaydher, though allowably used after 
 another word for these words, would not, when alone, be so suggestive as Ardher, 
 nor so convenient for joining with a following word. Therefore, the general use of 
 Eay for are, when standing alone, can not be approved. 27, B. 2, 0. 
 
 3 equal brothers. 246, 1. 
 
 solemnity. See this Eeader, p. lit, 28 . 
 
 to -witness their. See this Eeader, p. 62, xiil. 
 
 God has sent. 244, B. 3, (1). 
 
 i with rights. With as well as We may be joined to Em, En, Eay, Lay, by 
 the Way-hook, as in this case. p. 163, E. 3. 
 
 s admits that. The rule of 27, 4, of turning the circle between two strokes 
 in the most convenient manner, is complied with in this case by writing it as in the 
 engraving though it might be nearly as easy to write the circle on the back of 
 Dhet ; which method some writers may prefer. 
 
 would seem to embrace the. See this Eeader, p. 71, 4 13 . 
 
 10 human family. p. 169, B. 12, Z>. 
 
 11 In a similar. p. 168, E. 10, a. 
 
144: SECOND BTANDAKD-FHONOGKAPIIIC READER. 
 
 sense of human rights than had the 12 statesmen of that day, is a deep 
 delusion. All false is it that the statesmen of that day were BO bigot- 
 ed as to forget, and that the statesmen of this day are so catholic as to 
 remember, that Africans are men. 
 
 Who was the first President of the United States ? An open Aboli- 
 tionist. For Washington not only emancipated his own slaves, but 
 confessed his 13 anxiety to vote for the emancipation of other men's 
 slaves. 
 
 Who was the most intellectual among the great men of the Revolu- 
 tion ? This honor would probably be accorded to Alexander Hamilton, 
 who said : " The sacred rights of mankind are not to be rummaged for 
 among old parchments or musty records. They are written as with a" 
 sunbeam in the whole volume" of human nature, by the hand of the 
 Divinity itself, and can never be erased or obscured by mortal power. 
 All men are by nature entitled to equal privileges. Natural liberty is 
 the gift of the beneficent Creator 18 to the whole human race." 
 
 Who was the pre-eminently practical and common-sense" man of 
 the Revolution ? Perhaps Benjamin Franklin. 1 * Nevertheless, scarcely 
 was the Constitution, of which he himself was a framer, adopted, ere, 
 as President of the Pennsylvania Abolition Society, he petitioned 1 * 
 Congress to abolish slavery. His petition said that the power of 
 Congress should be exercised impartially in behalf of " all descriptions 
 of people, without distinction of color." 
 
 Who was the first Chief Justice of the United States ? John Jay, 
 the President of the New York Abolition Society the m;in who said : 
 
 ia than had the. See this Reader, p. 63, xvi. 
 
 is confessed his. 244, E. 8, (4). 
 
 i as with, a. 245. 
 
 i* whole volume. 164. 
 
 " beneficent Creator. See BENEFICENT In the Standard-Phonographic 
 Dictionary. 
 
 17 and common-sense. Though in moat cases of joining Teloid 1 for either 
 or or and, the context would make the necessary distinction, yet, for distinction's 
 sake, it is well not to join or to a following stroke, when and would necessarily be 
 Joined in the same way. Or can be safely joined, of course, in all cases where and 
 might be joined by Ketoid. 
 
 >* Benjamin Franklin. Franklin is contracted to Fer-Klen, In accord- 
 ance with a general principle (236,4); but Benjamin is represented by Bee, in 
 accordance with the principle of special contraction (237, R. 2). Of course, such a 
 contraction for such a familiar name may be used in any kind of reporting. 
 
 he petitioned. Sec Standard-Phonographic Dictionary under AXCIEMT. 
 
KEY TO THE KEPOBTING EXERCISES. 145 
 
 "Till America comes into this measure (the abolition of slavery), her 
 prayers to Heaven will be impious." 80 Moreover, it was he who said 
 that one reason why the word "slaves" was not put into the Constitu- 
 tion was, that 21 slavery is " repugnant" to that part of the Declaration 
 of Independence which says, "All men are created, equal." In other 
 words, John Jay said that "all men," in that instrument, includes 
 Africans. Roger B. Taney says it does not. 22 Which is the better 
 authority ? 
 
 Chief Justice Taney has four reasons for his conclusion that, in the 
 days of the Revolution, "all men" did not mean all men. 1st. The 
 Constitution is for slavery.* 3 
 
 O 'J But, as we have seen, ' it is full of powers for killing, and has 
 *-* * none for saving, slavery. It is ashamed to mention, the hate- 
 ful 2 word. His three other reasons are : 1st. The whites of that period 
 would not intermarry with the blacks. 2d. Nor consent to serve with them in the 
 mUitia,. 3d. Nor consent to the naturalization of alien blacks. But will the 
 whites of this period ? Oh, no no more than the whites of that. 
 Poor Chief Justice ! Greatly do you need to improve your logic ! 
 1st. You admit that, 3 in our day, "all men" includes Africans. 2d. 
 You admit it because of our greater respect for their rights. But this 
 respect is, in fact, immeasurably less than it was 4 in the Revolution ; 
 and hence, in the Revolution, far more emphatically than it does now, 
 did ' ' all men' ' include Africans. 
 
 What, however, have these prejudices, or, indeed, any other of the 
 prejudices of the whites against the blacks, to do with the question of 
 citizenship ? The mutual prejudices of Catholics and Protestants are 
 
 20 impious. This word is written Emp-Es, in order to distinguish it from 
 imponsilile. Both words being of the same part of speech, one would be liable to 
 be read for the other, if written alike. 
 
 -was tHnt. 217. It should be observed that the joined ends of Zee and 
 Dhet are not tapered. To taper them, would lose the advantage of joining. 
 * It does not 28 ; 244, K. 3, (1). 
 " Constitution Is for slavery. 244, B. 3, (1) and (5). 
 
 07 ' as we have seen. 245. 
 
 ^' hatcfal.-p. 119, E. 8. 
 
 you admit that. p. 62, xi. of this Header. 
 
 less than It was. The direction of even word-signs whose stroke is El or 
 Lay is sometimes changed for convenience of phrase-writing, as Layshon is changed 
 to Elshon in the very next phrase, ft is added to than by halving. See p. 68, xvi. 
 of this Eeader. Bee LESB in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
146 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC KEADEB. 
 
 strong. Nevertheless they let each other vote and be citizens. So, 
 too, the whites, notwithstanding their prejudices against the blacks, 
 let them vote and be citizens. This is true now. More emphatically 
 true was it in the times of the Revolution. The articles of Confedera- 
 tion betrayed this prejudice in the use of the word " white." Never- 
 theless they accorded citizenship to the blacks South Carolina and 
 Georgia alone voting against it.* How absurd to doubt that it is 
 accorded' in the Constitution, which contains not the word "white !" 
 
 But I must hasten to the end of my words. I said that I came here 
 to beseech you to know no law for slavery, but to trample under foot 
 whatever claims to be a law for slavery. I honor your intelligent 
 Judiciary for declaring the Fugitive Slave Act unconstitutional. I 
 honor Wisconsin for standing bravely by her brave Judiciary. A good 
 and glorious example is all this. But I am here to call on you for a 
 still better and more glorious example. Wisconsin both her people 
 and her judges must know no law, nor admit the possibility of any 
 law, for slavery. A statute may be in favor of slavery ; a constitution 
 even the idolized Federal Constitution may be in favor of slavery ; 
 but the voice of all Wisconsin must be, that slavery is too repugnant 
 to justice and humanity, to reason and religion, to be capable of wear- 
 ing any, even the least, semblance of law. 
 
 A blessed result of your disowning the lawfulness of slavery will be 
 releasing your conscience from all obligation to re-plunge into the hell 
 of slavery your poor brothers and sisters, who have come up out of it 
 with their scarred bodies, and, by the help of the friendly North star, 7 
 worked their danger-crowded way as far as your borders. Wherever 
 the conscience is so perverted as to admit this obligation, alas ! how 
 baleful must be its influence upon the whole character ! How such a 
 conscious obligation must shackle all manly freedom ! How it must 
 debase and sink the nature that has fallen under it ! So long as this 
 soul-shriveling obligation remains in the public conscience of Wiscon- 
 sin, so long the religion of Wisconsin can not be the generous and en- 
 nobling religion of Jesus Christ ; can not be characterized by the bold- 
 ness, honesty, and impartial love of the true religion. Young as your 
 State is, you nevertheless have a University at your seat of govern. 
 
 against it. See phrases beginning with AGAINST In the Standard-Phono- 
 graphic Dictionary. 
 
 that It Is accorded. Kred for accorded is here vocalized with & for the 
 sake of greater legibility. 
 
 7 North star. In this special contraction, North is expressed by Ner, and 
 the consonants of star by the Ster-loop. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 147 
 
 ment, well endowed, prosperous, and with a ripe scholar at its head. 
 It was my good fortune to spend a day with him during the past week. 
 I know the great worth of this cherished friend of my youth and man- 
 hood. But I also know that if the Fugitive Slave Act, or any pro- 
 slavery interpretations of duty, shall be allowed to continue to exert 
 their withering influence upon the moral sense and public sentiment 
 of your State, this Institution, notwithstanding its great advantages, 
 can not fail to suffer immensely 
 
 O O in common with all your educational and religious interests ; 
 *-KJ ay, and with your material interests also. The highest cul- 
 ture of the understanding can not be reached where the people receive 
 the behests of slavery as law. Wisconsin manhood can never realize 
 the beau ideal of manhood until it shall have been aroused to throw off 
 from its conscience, indignantly and forever, all obligation to do what 
 is mean and cruel and wicked. And when, I ask, is a man doing what 
 is mean and cruel and wicked, if it is not when he permits himself to 
 be transformed into a bloodhound, ' to bay upon the track of innocent 
 human prey ? 
 
 Among the most valuable results of your ignoring all law for slavery 
 will be the preparation of your way to grow in the knowledge of true 
 law a knowledge inferior to no other in its happy influence upon the 
 character. To whatever extent you are now guilty of recognizing in 
 slavery the name and obligations of law, and of thus according to the 
 very worst thing the name and obligations due to the very best, to 
 that extent do you now trifle with, and twist, and blunt your moral 
 nature. But when you shall have come to identify law with right, and 
 to acknowledge nothing to be law which is not right though I readily 
 admit that there are many violations of right, and therefore many ille- 
 galities, 2 which it is better to bear with than resist then you will have 
 entered a law-school 3 in which wisdom and goodness grow as constantly 
 as do folly and wickedness outside of it ; 4 a law-school in which, under 
 
 OO l bloodhound. 25. 
 
 2 Illegalities See this Reader, p. 117, 28 s . 
 
 ' a law-school. In many compound words, the elements of which it is de- 
 sirable shall be united in their forms as they are joined by the voice, the form of 
 one or the other of the elements is changed so as to admit of their being joined, as 
 in this word, Laic-school ; in writing which, school is changed from its usual out- 
 line (Skel), which would not join with Lay (law). 
 
 * outside of It. It is here added by halving, of being implied. 250, 3. 
 
148 SECOND STAND ARD-PHCMSTOG RAPIIIC READER. 
 
 the teachings of true law, the mind expands as rapidly as it bccomt-a 
 dwarfed when under the influence of those conventional legalities 
 which lack all the great elements and all the soul of true law. 
 
 I have done. I came here, as I have repeatedly told you, to ask 
 you to know no law for slavery. There is no remedy for slavery but 
 to deny its legality. Do what you will against slavery, you will only 
 be helping it, so long as you acknowledge it to be law. In vain will a 
 man talk, and pray, and labor for the prevention of forgery, perjury, 
 theft, and murder, if nevertheless he admits in their behalf the plea 
 that they are sacred, obligatory law. Once, however, declare it an 
 outlaw, and make your declaration sincere and effective by refusing to 
 vote for any man who recognizes its legality, and then slavery will 
 have nothing to do but to die. 
 
 The abolition of all American slavery !* How joyful* the anticipation 
 of an event which shall terminate wrongs so sad, miseries so unutter- 
 able ! Thrice blessed, then, the slave, whose weary bondage will at 
 last be ended ! Even still more blessed the liberation of the slave- 
 holder ; for the sorrows in which slavery binds the 7 slave are as nothing 
 compared with the sins in which slavery binds the slaveholder ! Thrice 
 blessed, then, our nation, when delivered from its great curse and 
 peril ! Thrice blessed, then, and no longer thrice cursed, its influence 
 upon the other* nations of the earth ! Safe, then, the Union purchased 
 with precious blood ! Indivisible, then, our beloved country, when 
 slavery shall be blotted out, and when all the great beneficial* inter- 
 ests, no longer hindered by that one terrible, 10 destructive, and dis- 
 uniting interest, shall be left free to work harmoniously and mightily 
 in binding North, and South, and East, and West in a peaceful aud 
 loving fellowship, never more to be broken ! 
 
 of all American slavery. American xlavery, \n accordance with the 
 principle of special contraction, is represented here by Em for American and Slay 
 for slavery. 
 
 Joyful p. 119, E. 8. 
 ' binds the. 187, R. 1. 
 
 upon the other. 264, R. 4. See the Standard-Phonographic Diet onarjr, 
 under DHL 
 
 beneficial. See this word in the Dictionary. 
 terrible See thw Reader, p. 82, 16 s . 
 
KEY TO THE BEPOKTING EXEECISE8. 149 
 
 LAW REPORTING. 1 
 
 MR. EDWIN SMITH SWORN. 
 Direct Examination. 
 
 OQ Q. 2 What is your occupation. 3 
 
 ^^ A. 2 Civil surveyor; have been so since 1831. 4 
 
 Q. In this city. 5 
 
 A. Yes, sir.* 
 
 OQ 1 Law Reporting. See an article on the subject of "Phonography in 
 *'' Law Courts," in the Phonographic Intelligencer, p. 181. 
 s Q, ami A. It is best to begin every question -with the letter Q, written small, 
 as in the engraving, for the sake of speed. Close at the end of the question write 
 a for the double purpose of denoting the termination of the question (i. e., as a 
 period) and the beginning of the Anxicer. A small q at the end of the Answer has 
 a corresponding use. There is thus saved the necessity and the loss of time of 
 making a period, or of commencing a new paragraph with every question and 
 answer. 
 
 (I/) In transcribing testimony, place Q. and A. just at the left of a line (either ruled, 
 as in " Legal Cap," or formed by folding the paper, as lawyers sometimes do) about 
 one inch from the left-hand side of the page, or perhaps H little more in case the 
 manuscript is to be stitched or bound at the side. This margin should be consider- 
 able, so as to allow of annotations at the side. However, in case of the report being 
 bound (as other books usually are) at the side, room in the margin need not be left 
 for annotations ; for, they can then be placed on the opposite page, which should 
 be blank. 
 
 (c) Ease of reference to testimony is favored by leaving an extra blank line be- 
 tween an Amswer and the following Question. 
 
 (d) The letter Q is to be placed before every sentence to which the witness re- 
 sponds as to a question ; i. e., before every real question, even though it should not 
 have the form of one. 
 
 (<?) In transcription, it is unnecessary to write th6 interrogation point (1), for it 
 would be superfluous, the sign of a question (Q) having already been written at the 
 beginning. 
 
 3 Whnt Is your occupation. The word your is omitted here, under the 
 principle of 250, 8, in order to secure the advantage of a phrase-sign. See this 
 Ecwler, p. 71, 4 13 . 
 
 < 1831. See this Header, p. 78, 8". In law-reporting there is no need of 
 placing an apostrophe or stroke before the last figures of dates. 
 
 * In this city. The circle of Dhees might have been enlarged to express 
 the flret sound of city; but one may be omitted safely, and with an advantage as 
 to speed, in accordance with p. 194, K. 8. 
 
 6 Yes, sir. This very valuable word-sign, especially for the reporting of tes- J 
 timony, was first presented by the Hand-Book. 
 
150 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Q. Have you made a map showing where a line 48 feet west of the 
 
 westerly line of West-st. T will come. 
 A. I have. 
 Q. Is that it. 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 The diagram here shown to the witness was marked " Exhibit 
 
 No. 4." 8 
 
 Q. Did Mr. Smith make this. 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Cra ss- Examination* 
 
 Q. At whose request did you make the map in question. 
 
 A. At the request of the plaintiffs in the suit. 10 
 
 Q. What data did you make your estimates upon. 
 
 A. There is no 11 estimate made about the map ; it is a simple survey 
 
 showing where a line 48 feet west of the westerly line of West-st. 
 
 would cross these premises what portion would be taken in ; 
 
 showing an absolute fact. I can go on and describe the process 
 
 if that is what is wanted. 
 
 i West-st. The t of West is omitted, in accordance with 236, 8 ; and then one 
 of the Es-sounds is omitted under the license of p. 194, R. 8. 
 
 * Exhibit No. 4. It is well for the reporter of testimony to insert in the 
 margin of his notes the number of the Exhibits, as in the engraving, so that he can 
 readily refer to the testimony concerning them ; and also in the margin of the tran- 
 script, for the ready reference to them by the lawyers, or other persons, making use 
 of the report. 
 
 Cross-Exumlnntlon. It is well, if there is sufficient time, to write " C. E." 
 for Crosx-Esramination, as in the engraving, at the beginning of the notes of the 
 cross-examination. But if there is not time, go on, even without any break, pimply 
 writing "trq" before the first cross-question; as"./?<ty" is written before the first 
 question on the Re-direct Examination, imd u Bxq n before the first question on 
 the Re-cross Examination. (6) Before every question by the Court write "qc; n 
 and " yj" before every question by a Juror. 
 
 10 plaintiffs In the suit 1ST, B. 1. 
 
 11 there Is no, etc. The distinct affirmations of a witness, which in ordinary 
 matter would be regarded as separate sentences, are usually in reports of testimony 
 separated by semicolons (;) instead of periods ; though, if these sentences were quite 
 independent, I should conform to the ordinary rules of punctuation, and separate 
 them by periods. It is advisable to punctuate quite freely in taking the words of a 
 witness, because there is more difficulty frequently than in most other kinds of re- 
 porting in determining the correct punctut.tion; upon which, perhaps, in testimony 
 very much may depend. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 151 
 
 Q. Are tL-?re any estimates of distances in the map. 
 
 A. There are measurements in the map. 
 
 Q. Upon what data did you make your measurements. 
 
 A. On the known fact that West-st. is 70 feet wide at right angles . 
 
 and I was instructed to ascertain where a line 48 feet from the 
 
 westerly side of West-st. would intercept these stalls as they arc 
 
 called. 
 
 Q. And that is the line in red. 
 A. One red line shows the westerly line of West-st. ; the other, the 
 
 48 feet. 
 Q. And the first red line looking westerly shows the westerly line 
 
 of West-st. as it is at present. 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 Q. And the other red line parallel with it shows where 48 feet west 
 
 of the westerly line of West-st. would come. 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Re-direct Examination. 
 
 Q. Did you at any time make a map showing the amount of surface 
 
 filled in between Vesey and Dey-sts., west of West-st. 
 A. I did. 
 
 Q. Have you that map. 
 A. I have it here. 
 
 The map was here marked by "the Referees " Exhibit No. 5." 
 Q. This is the westerly line of West-st. 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 
 Q. From what was that line established. 
 A. As by the law of 1798. ' 
 
 Q. The premises in the suit on that map are shown in blue lines. 
 A. They are shown by a pink-shade around them. 
 Q. Does this pink-shade exclude the piers and include the 48 feet 
 A. Yes, sir. 
 Q. Since when have these premises been filled in. 
 
 Objected to ia as assuming a fact not proved. 
 
 1798. This date not belonging to the present century, had to be written in 
 lull. See this Eeader, p. 78, 8 a . 
 
 is Objected to. I usually write 06;, as in the engn.ving, for Objected to; 
 1, because I can then more readily refer to the Objections; 2, because it saves 
 making a period, or commencing a new paragraph. 
 
152 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC HEADER. 
 
 Q Are those premises filled in. 
 
 A. They are. 
 
 Q. Since when were they filled in. 
 
 A. Since 1829 ; they have all been filled in since 1829. 
 
 Q. Were you at any time employed by any of the city authorities 
 
 to survey the ground then filled in and make a map of it. 
 A. I was, sir a portion of it. 
 Q. When. 
 A. In 1849. 
 Q. By whom. 
 A. By the Street Commissioner, at the request of the Chairman of 
 
 the Market Committee. 
 Q. What was the object of that survey. 
 
 Objected to. 
 MB. E ." I want to show that the ground was occupied as far 
 
 back as five years prior to our lease ; that is, as far back as 1853. 
 ME. B . No matter what the answer to that may be, it won't 
 
 show that. 
 
 Objection sustained, because the inquiry went to the motive 
 
 of the party having the 
 
 Af\ survey made. 
 
 Q. Did you make a map of your survey. 
 A. I did. 
 Q. Is it here. 
 A. No, sir. 
 Q. A copy of it. 
 A. No, sir. 
 
 14 E This is the initial of the name of one of the lawyers employed in this 
 
 ease. The initial, or (perhaps, for distinction's sake, when two or more names be- 
 gin with the same letter) two letters, is all that is necessary to wriie instead of the 
 lawyer's name. These letters might be inclosed by a curved line, as suggested in 
 this Reader at p. 121, 29" ; but this may usually be saved in law-reporting, without 
 causing confusion or doubt, especially when the long period is placed, as is the case 
 in the engraving, before the initial letter or letters. (&) When a lawyer's name is 
 written at the commencement of his remarks, especially in a body of testimony, the 
 transcriber should commence it a little to the left of the left-hand line of riting, as 
 in this Key. It should be underlined with two strokes of the pen. And upon the 
 neatness of doing this, and other little things of the kind very much of the good 
 appearance of a manuscript-report will depend ; and hence it pays to do them well 
 neatly. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 
 
 153 
 
 Q. What did you do with that map. 
 
 A. It was taken to the Committee and left with them ; that is the 
 
 last I have seen of it. 
 Q. Woro you employed in 1850 by any person connected with the 
 
 city authorities to take soundings near these premises. 
 A. I was. 
 
 Q. Did you make soundings. 
 A. T rli.l. 
 
 y. Did you draw a plan. 
 A. I did. 
 Q. Plan of what. 
 
 A. Plan of filling the outer bulkhead. 
 Q. What did you do with that plan. 
 A. I left it with the Street Commissioner. 
 Q. When was that. 
 
 A. In 1851, I think ; late in the spring of 1851. 
 Q. On that plan was there any designation of the outer bulkhead 
 
 as it is now. 
 
 A. No, sir, not as it is at present. 
 Q. When was the present bulkhead first begun. 
 A. I think it was along in the early part of the fall of 1851 ; I 
 
 speak from memory alone ; I may not be strictly correct as to 
 
 the date ; it was in 1851 ; I think the early part of the fall. 
 Q. When was it finished. 
 A. In 1858. 
 Q. During that time was there any filling in of the intermediate 
 
 space. 
 A. It was going on all the time. 
 
 Cross-Examination Resumed, 
 
 Q. Did not the bulkhead give way, so as to render useless the land 
 
 in front within the pink-shade upon Exhibit No. 5. 
 A. Not that I am aware of. 
 Q. Since 1853, and about the time of its completion in 1853, as you 
 
 have stated, were you in the habit of being upon or adjacent to 
 
 these premises. 
 
 A. I have been there occasionally, but for no particular purpose. 
 Q. Which of the city authorities employed you to make soundin^i, 
 
 as you have stated. 
 A. The Street Commissioner. 
 
154: SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 Q. What was his name. 
 A. Mr. Dodge. ' 
 
 CHARGE TO THE JURY. 
 
 \Charge of His Honor, Judge Nelson, in the case of Alexander Smith, et al, versus 
 
 Alvin ffiggins, et al. In the United States Circuit Court for the Souttiern 
 
 District of New York.] 
 
 GENTLEMEN OF THE JURY : 2 The patent 3 in this case was originally 
 granted to Alexander Smith on the 18th of June, 1850. On the 10th 
 of December of the same year, an undivided half of the patent was 
 assigned to Jonathan Smith. 4 The suit is in the name of the two.* 
 The patent was surrendered and re-issued with an amended specifica- 
 tion on the llth of May, 1852. The suit is founded upon this re-issued 
 patent and amended specification. 
 
 The first question to be considered by the Court and Jury* is, what 
 is the invention of the plaintiff? This we must ascertain and settle in 
 order to be able to determine whether or not it has been appropriated 
 or infringed by the defendant. 7 
 
 40 
 
 Dodge. It is usually unnecessary to insert in the notes the word Mister 
 (see Webster). If it should be inserted in the transcript even when not 
 spoken, it could do no harm. At any rate, the memory may be relied upon, in such 
 a trivial matter as that 
 
 a Gentlemen of the Jury. p. 169, E. 12, b. 
 
 patent. The use of Pee 3 as a word-sign for patent originated with the 
 author. Its value will be seen in the engraving of this Charge. 
 
 to .Jonathan SmMh. Jay is here written for Jonathan, under the prin- 
 ciple of special contraction (237, E. 2). When it first occurred in reporting itfe case 
 (of which this Charge, of course, was but a small part), it was written in full Jay- 
 En-Then. See this Header, p. 107, 24< ; 118, 2S 13 . 
 
 * of the two. See this Eeader, p. 74, 6 3 . 
 
 by the Court and Jury. 250, 8. The words Court and Jury, in law- 
 reporting, are usually commenced with a capital letter. 
 
 ~i by the defendant. The use of Dee 3 for Defendant, and Def 2 for Defense, 
 originated with the author. I mention this fact here, as in many other cases I have 
 mentioned the fact of having devised word-signs and contractions and introduced 
 valuable principles, in order that his'ory may not be falsified or concealed by those 
 who for any reason would obscure or deny my improvements of the art, or under- 
 rate their value. But it must not be supposed that I have mentioned a tithe ot the 
 instances of my improvements. They are too frequent to permit that. Take Ibis 
 line for instance. Ken 2 is a new word-sign for Question ; the phrase-sign for By t/ie 
 Court and Jury would not have been found in the Old Phonography; En-Ven 3 for 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 155 , 
 
 The invention is described* by the patentee as a new and useful ap- 
 paratus for parti -coloring yarn.* 
 
 It is therefore a patent for machinery for the means to be used in 
 this work. The patentee then refers to the modes of parti-coloring in 
 use at the time he made his invention ; the first being by printing, and 
 the second by dipping the skeins into a dye-vat, the part not to be 
 dyed being clamped, or tied, or wrapped around, to prevent the access 
 of the dye. 
 
 He then states that these methods 10 in previous use were imperfect, 
 the printing not admitting of permanent colors, besides requiring 
 complex machinery, and the dyeing by clamping, tying, etc., being 
 unsuccessful on account of the access of the dye to the parts sought to 
 be excluded. He then speaks of the nature of his improvement, which, 
 he says, con&ists of parti-coloring yarns that have been reeled, 11 by 
 means of direct immersion 12 
 
 41 
 
 in the dye, by the use of movable frames 1 adapted to receive 
 and hold the 2 skeins as they are arranged upon a reel, and so 
 
 invention is a new contraction, in analogy with which many other contractions are 
 formed. Plent 2 is a new word-sign for Plaintiff. Dee 2 -Tren is a new contraction 
 for determine. Whether or not would not have been so quickly written by the Old 
 Phonographers. Per 2 -Pret is a new contraction for appropriated, formed in 
 accordance with a new general principle, which makes a saving of one or more 
 strokes in thousands of words. En-Fren 1 is a new contraction for infringed. In 
 the next line there are fourteen variations from the Old Phonography, by which 
 fourteen strokes and eight liftings of the pen, besides other advantages, are gained 
 over the Old Phonography. 
 
 a Is described p. 182, K. 4. 
 
 parti-coloring yarn. This is a special contraction, in which Pret-Kel 
 stands for parti-coloring (ing being omitted), and yarn is added, as though it were 
 the word ya'n, by the En-hook. The phrase might have been written Pret-Kel-Arn, 
 but the Arn in rapid writing would degenerate into nearly an En-hook ; and thus, 
 in fact, originated the sign in the engraving, so far as representing yarn by an En- 
 hook is concerned, (o) In this contraction the word color should strictly have been 
 represented by its sign, Kler ; but the small hook is used, because the making of the 
 large hook would require more time than the small one ; and there is no counter- 
 vailing objection on the ground of legibility, because the contraction given in the 
 engraving is perfectly legible; and no principle is violated, because it falls under 
 the principle of special contraction (237, E. 2), which permits the abbreviation of 
 eign- words quite as readily as others. 
 
 10 that these methods. See this Pveader, p. 87, 18 s . 
 
 11 that have been reeled. See this Header, p. 128, 31' 8 . 
 
 12 direct immersion. 164. 
 
 A -i i movable frames. This is a special contraction. 287, E. 2, 5. 
 
 adapted to receive and hold the. And is omitted here. This 
 
156 SECOND STAND ABB-PHONOGRAPHIC KEADEB. 
 
 comlined with the dye-vat that ihey will permit the yarn to be let 
 down to a determinate distance in the dye. There is then a particular 
 description of the machinery used in this process, and finally the more 
 material part of the specification, particularly when we are inquiring 
 as to the thing invented or discovered the claim. What the patentee 
 claims to have secured is the method substantially as described, 3 of 
 parti-coloring yarns which have been reeled, 4 by direct and free im- 
 mersion, by means of frames carrying the reeled yarns,* combined with 
 the dyeing-vat by machinery adapted to let down and draw up the 
 frame and measure the extent of the immersion. The reel on which 
 the yarn is reeled (which was exhibited in Court) is not a part of the 
 combination, and as regards this question of novelty in the combina- 
 tion described by the patentee, and in which his invention consists, 
 may be laid out of view. The thing invented, then, is this : The hori- 
 zontal frame carrying the reeled yarns combined with the dyeing- vat 
 by machinery adapted to let down and draw up this frame and measure 
 the extent of the immersion, or the extent of the line of dyeing upon 
 the yarn. In other words, the thing discovered is the combination of 
 the horizontal frame carrying the reeled yarns with the dyeing- vat by 
 machinery which must always be kept in view as very important 
 which lets down the frame carrying the yarn, and draws it up, and at 
 the same time measures the line of yarn to be dyed. 
 
 Now, this being the thing invented the improvement patented 
 the next question* is, is it new and useful ? It must be both in order 
 
 phrase occurred very often throughout the entire case ; so that the omission of and 
 from it was safe, although it would not have been, perhaps, if it had occurred but 
 rarely. 
 
 3 substantially as described This phrase is of frequent occurrence iu 
 patent suits, and this phrase-sign makes a great gain over the Old-Phonographic 
 expression Sbees*-Ten Iss 3 Dee-Sk ay-Bed. 
 
 * which have bten reeled. p. 169, E. 12. In case the Advanced Corre- 
 sponding and the Reporting outline for the present tense of a verb terminates with 
 a full-length stroke with a large initial hook as Bee-Kel, barrel ; Kler 3 , color the 
 Advanced Correspondent may add the d of the past tense either by Dee or . rather) 
 by shortening ; (2) but the Reporter in such case writes the present for the past 
 tense (or time), because. (A) he thereby saves either an ad'liiional stroke or the liltle 
 extra care of shortening, (B) and secures the further advantages (") of adding a 
 consonant, as n (for yarn) in the special phrase-sign lii-l'di 1 . Keeled yarn ; (b) of 
 shortening to add it, as Reid 1 , Reel (or Reeled) it; KUnl-, Color ed it; (<) and of 
 lengthening to add thr, as in Reldher 1 , Reel (or Reeled) thr ; Klerdhi r 1 , Cleai-ed 
 thr. 
 
 reeled yarns. In this special contraction yarns is added the tame as in 
 Pret-Klens, particolored yarns. 
 
 next question. 286 8. 
 
KEY TO THE KEPORTING EXERCISES. 157 
 
 to constitute a valid patent. The utility of the arrangement and com- 
 bination I have not understood to be contested by the learned counsel 
 for the defendant. 7 
 
 As to the novelty of the arrangement and combination, there has 
 been introduced in the course of the trial, intending to bear upon this 
 question, as well as upon the question of infringement, the previous 
 printing apparatus, the clamping process and apparatus, and the 
 methods of Graham, Stevenson, Whittock, and that of Kerr, one of 
 the witnesses who testified on the part of the defendant. 
 
 Now, the question of novelty is not whether free immersion has 
 been before used for dyeing parti-colored yarns ; but whether this 
 dyeing of parti-colored yarns by free immersion was done previous 
 to the date of the invention of the plaintiff, by an arrangement and 
 combination of machinery like that described in his patent. 8 This is 
 not a patent for the discovery of the idea of dyeing parti-colored yarns 
 by immersion in the dye, but it is for an arrangement and combination 
 of machinery, as a means to be used in dyeing parti-colored yarns by 
 immersion in the dye. In order, therefore, to disprove the novelty of 
 the invention, it must be shown that these previous modes used prac- 
 tically in dyeing parti-colored yarns by immersion or otherwise, em- 
 braced within them this combination and arrangement of the machinery 
 described in the patent. If it was done by modes and processes not 
 embracing this combination and arrangement, then such previous use 
 would not disprove the novelty of the plaintiff's invention.* 
 
 On this point, therefore the question of novelty it will be your 
 duty to look into these old modes of parti-coloring yarn by immersion 
 or otherwise in the dye, and say whether they contain the special com- 
 bination and arrangement of the machinery described and used by the 
 plaintiff. 
 
 If you should arrive at a conclusion in favor of the plaintiff as to 
 the novelty or utility of his improvement, the next question will be as 
 to the alleged infringement by the defendant in the adoption of ma- 
 chinery whereby yarn is parti-colored by immersion. That question 
 
 ' by the l<-arned counsel for tHe defendant. Lay-Kay-Dt-e for Ifiirnfd 
 counsel for the defendant may be introduced into general reporting, though it is 
 formed in accordance with the principle of special contraction (237, R. 2, t) Lay 
 standing for Learned, Kay for Counsel, and Dee for Defendant. This sign, trans- 
 ferred to the common print, would be "L. C. D." See phrases commencing with 
 Learned Coiinnel in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary 
 
 8 described In Ills patent. 246, 1. 
 plaintiff's Invention. 1ST, K. 1. 
 
158 SECOND STANDAED-PIIONOGRAPIIIC HEADER. 
 
 will depend upon the fact whether or not the arrangement of the mi- 
 chinery used by the defendant in dyeing yarn embraces the combina- 
 tion of the plaintiff; in other words, whether the defendant's mode 
 and machinery embodies within it the new ideas of the patentee ; 
 whether or not he has appropriated the ideas which ae at the founda- 
 tion of the plaintiff's improvement or discovery. 
 
 In order to constitute 18 an infringement, it is necessary that the 
 arrangement and combination of the party charged with the infringe- 
 ment should be the same to the eye, or in point of fact. If they em- 
 body the ideas of the patentee, and the machinery of the defendant 
 operates by such adoption and appropriation, then, though the arrange- 
 ment inay be apparently different, in reality" and in judgment of law 
 an infringement exists. Hence, it will be not only proper, but essen- 
 tial, that the jury should look into the arrangement and operation of 
 the machinery used by the defendant for the purpose of ascertaining 
 whether or not it embodies within it the principle of the patentee ; 
 whether or not its successful operation is attributable to such appropri- 
 ation. If it does, then it is 12 an infringement. If it does not, then 
 there has been no infringement. 
 
 k O It has been insisted by the learned counsel for the defendant 1 
 *** that he does not use the reeled yarn, or rather the yarns on 
 a reel, as is done 2 by the plaintiff; and hence it is insisted that in 
 this respect the defendant's arrangement or combination of machinery 
 differs from that of the plaintiff's. It is true, 3 however, that the 
 combination and arrangement of the machinery of the plaintiff is use- 
 less, and would not be* patentable without yarn to be operated upon 
 
 10 In order to constitute. This phrase might be written by the advanced 
 reporter, NertP-Stet, the first t of Cbnutitute being omitted under 286, 8. 
 
 11 In reality.- See these words, and In relation,^mong the phrases begin- 
 ning with In in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 12 then It Is See this Reader, p. 63, xri. 
 
 A O * by the learned counsel for tlic defendant This phrase-sign 
 ** is formed in accordance with the principle of special contraction (23T, B. 2, 
 6). For tlm is omitted under 250, 8. See this Reader, p. 156, 41 T . 
 
 as la done. 245. 
 
 It is trueSee this Reader, p. 134, 83". 
 and would not be See this Reader, p. 104, 22' 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 159 
 
 in the process of dyeing ; and in order to make out* an infringement, 
 it must appear that the defendant not only used the combination of 
 the plaintiff, but that it is used for dyeing by letting down and taking 
 up the 8 reeled yarn into and out of the vat, and measuring the extent 
 of the immersion at the time. 
 
 I will state this proposition again, as it is undoubtedly important. 
 1 have said that the combination and arrangement of the plaintiff's 
 machinery is useless, and would not be patentable without yarn to be 
 operated upon 7 in the dyeing process. The invention is the combina- 
 tion for the purpose of dyeing by immersion, and the machinery 
 which is employed to effectuate this process. It must therefore ap- 
 pear, in order to constitute an infringement, that the defendant uses 
 this combination and arrangement for the purpose of dyeing by immer- 
 sion, by means of machinery which lets down the yarn into the dye ; 
 that he uses the combination of machinery which effects, or appears to 
 effect, this, and at the same time measures the extent of the dyeing. 
 Whether or not the yarn to be dyed is on a reel, like the plain tiff's, is 
 not material. If the yarn is so arranged as to be acted upon by the 
 plaintiff's combination, and is so acted upon by the defendant's 
 arrangement that it may be let down into the dye and taken up, and 
 at the same time measure the extent of the immersion, then an in- 
 fringement exists. There would then be an embodiment of the ideas 
 of the patentee in the arrangement or combination of the machinery 
 of the defendant, and an appropriation of the improvement of the 
 patentee. Gentlemen, this branch of the case, the question of nov- 
 elty, is a question of fact which, under the views of the law which I 
 have endeavored to explain to you, must be examined and determined 
 for yourselves. Undoubtedly, before the plaintiff is entitled to re- 
 cover, 8 he must have established to your reasonable satisfaction that 
 his new mode, combination, or arrangement of machinery for the pur- 
 pose of dyeing parti-colored yarns, and the ideas involved and em- 
 bodied in this new arrangement and combination which enabled him 
 to work out his improvement as a useful one ; that these are substan- 
 tially, practically involved, embodied in the defendant's arrangement 
 
 8 and In order to make out. To is implied by joining, and out added 
 to the word-sign for make (Em) by halving it. p. 63, xvi. 
 
 and taking up the. 23T, K. 1, 6. 
 i to be operated upon. 94, IT 1 . 
 
 * Is entitled to. This contraction for entitled (En-Tee 1 ) is raluable. Sec 
 ENTITLE-D in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
160 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC KEADKE. 
 
 and operation of his machinery. If you find these there, although 
 the form may be different to the eye if you find the essence of the 
 plaintiff's arrangement, the practice and operation of it embodied 
 within the defendant's, then, in judgment of law, there is an infringe- 
 ment. This is a question of fact, which it is your province to de- 
 termine. 
 
 The remaining question in the case is the question of damages, 
 which has been presented by the counsel fur the plaintiff. Upon this 
 question the general rule is that the patentee or his assignee, in case 
 of an infringement or appropriation of his invention by another' with- 
 out his license, the patentee or the assignee, as the case may be, is en- 
 titled to the actual damages 10 which he has sustained by reason of this 
 infringement. It is often, indeed almost always, an exceedingly diffi- 
 cult 11 question to arrive at, upon any certain 18 or satisfactory data. 
 The theory, or the principle in respect to the damages, is that a person 
 who adopts, appropriates, or uses the improvement of another, inter- 
 feres 13 with his custom, his monopoly, or rather property (for it is not 
 a monopoly, it being the fruits of his own mind) , and affects the bene- 
 fits which he would otherwise 14 be entitled to ; and the jury should 
 look into the case with a view to ascertain the actual damage which 
 the patentee under such circumstances has sustained. The rule of law 
 excludes any exaggerated or vindictive damage, which is sometimes 
 allowed in cases of willful trespass. That rule of damage has no appli- 
 cation in this case. 
 
 In this case, one view probably to be taken upon the question of 
 damages would be this : the benefits and advantages, whatever they 
 may be, if there are any, derived in the use of the plaintiff's improve- 
 ment over the old modes practiced and in use ; and this is the useful 
 
 by another. See under DHB in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 10 to actual damage*. As the word damage will probably occur often in 
 this part of the Charge, it may safely be contracted to Dee Era (I. ., d<im.). 
 
 11 an exceedingly difficult. The word erceedingly is written in full by 
 Kays Dee:' ingly' (232, 5). In analogy with the word-siun l\>r erixt (Ses-Tve 2 ). the 
 Kay may be elided ; and ingly may be omitted under the principle of 237, E. 1, 6. 
 I prefer, however, to make at once Sdee 1 a word-sign for Exceedingly. See these 
 words in the Dictionary. 
 
 i> upon any certain Any is vocalized with e, so tltat the phrase-sign may 
 not be read upon unctrUiin. 
 
 is Interferes* See this Reader, p. 94, IT 4 . The words Interfere-d are con- 
 traded in analogy with Infer-red (En-Ef-) to Eut-EP. See these words in the Dic- 
 tionary. 
 
 14 which he would otlierw 1st. Sec this Bender, p. 104, 22' ; p. 62, xi;i. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISE8. 161 
 
 result, if any, consequent upon the new 1 * invention over old modes. 
 If it can be shown that there are benefits and advantages derived by 
 the use of the new mode over the old, these are such as are to be taken 
 into consideration 1 " upon the question of damages. 
 
 You have heard the testimony of the experts which has been offered. 
 I shall not go over or call attention particularly to it. Their estimates 
 and opinions are not always reliable 17 and very certain. But still they 
 are competent and admissible on the question of damages, and proper 
 to be taken into account by the jury in attempting to arrive at the 
 actual damages which the plaintiff has sustained. This is also a ques- 
 tion of fact which belongs to the jury, and with which I do not desire 
 to interfere. 
 
 ALEXANDER VON HUMBOLDT. 
 
 [An Address by Prof. Francis Lieber, at a Meeting called by the New York Geo- 
 graphical Society, held on the evening of June 2, 1859, in the Hall of the New 
 York Historical Society.] 
 
 k 9 "TiiE whole earth is the monument of illustrious men." 
 ^*J There are passages in the works of antiquity which, to our 
 ears and minds, have the sound and the depths of inspiration. They 
 impress themselves on our souls, and corresponding occasions on the 
 paths of our lives restore them to visible letters. Such seem to me 
 these words of Pericles, and such the occasion which has brought us 
 together in this place. What Pericles said, in his funeral speech, of 
 the men who had fallen, not for the defense but for the glory of 
 Athens, seems to apply in a double sense to Alexander von Humboldt. 
 Wherever death occurs or is remembered, there is solemnity ;' nor can 
 we- wholly free ourselves even from mourning when a revered man has 
 
 is upon the new. The is omitted under 250, 3. See HEW in the Standard* 
 Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 "to be taken Into consideration. The En-hook of taken, (Ten) is omiW 
 ted to secure the advantage of phrase-writing, and into is omitted under 250, 8. 
 reliable See this Reader, p. 92, 16 3 . 
 
 JO ' solemnity. See this Reader, p. 117, 28 5 , 2. 
 2 nor can we. p. 169, E. 12, b. 
 
102 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 lelt us, however full his measure of a favored life may have been. 3 He 
 lived so long and so large a life that generations over the whole globe 
 had grown up familiar with his name, and we were so accustomed to it 
 that our very intellects feel a degree of discomfort at presenting to our 
 minds the world henceforth as existing without him. Yet it is one of 
 the noblest delights for those who reflect and love to be grateful, to 
 trace the chief components of the monument of illustrious men to 
 their authors to find whence came the discoveries, inventions, con- 
 ceptions, institutions, and endeavors of ages in the field of culture, 
 freedom, and truth. Who has not enjoyed the pleasure of finding the 
 spots on the charts of human progress, where you put down your 
 finger and say : Here is Aristotle, here are the Waldenscs, here the 
 causes and the effects of the University and of tracing the lines of 
 civilization in different directions from point to point ? And this de- 
 light we may enjoy when meditating on the period of which Humboldt 
 was one of the most distinct exponents we may enjoy it even now, 
 although he has left us but yesterday ; for God allowed to him days so 
 long that he passed into' history before he passed away from among 
 us. Many of my young friends have asked me as their teacher, and, 
 indeed, many other friends have repeated the question, as I conversed 
 with them on that news which on its arrival attracted more interest 
 than the advice of the threatening contest in the plains of Italy Was 
 he not the greatest man of the century? I do not believe it fit for 
 man to seat himself on the bench in the chancery* of humanity, and 
 there to pronounce this one or that one the greatest man. How many 
 men have been called the greatest ! But if it is an attribute of great- 
 ness to impress an indelible stamp on an entire movement of the col- 
 lective mind of a race ; if greatness, 
 
 44 
 
 in part,' consists in devising that which is good, large, and 
 noble, and in perseveringly executing it by means which, in 
 
 8 may liavc been. Emb being used as a word sign for may be be-n is writ- 
 ten by adding the En-hook, have being omitted and to be supplied. 249; 250, 3. 
 The best Old expression of this phrase was Em 3 -Vee-Ben ; i. e., the New expression 
 is more than three times as fust as the Old. 
 
 4 troin point to point. 250, 3, example from to. 
 
 ' that lie passed Int >. A t is omitled here for the sake of phrase-writing 
 (286, 3), as also in the subsequent phrases before he passed away ; Great-ext man. 
 
 la the chancery. See CIIAXCEKT in the Standard-Phonographic Dic- 
 tionary. 
 
 1 i i In part 24*5, 1 . The Old form for Part was Pee-Ret ; but the best form 
 ^*~* both alone and in phrase-writing is Pret. It also is the best form for part 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 163 
 
 the hands of others, would have been insufficient, and against obstacles 
 which would have been insurmountable to others ; if the daring soli- 
 tude of thought and loyal adhesion to its own royalty is a constitu- 
 ent of greatness ; if rare and varied gifts, such as mark distinction 
 when singly granted, showered by Providence on one man ; if modest 
 amenity gracing these gifts, and encouraging kindliness to every one 
 of every nation that proved earnest in his pursuit whether he had 
 chosen nature or society, the hieroglyphics or the liberty of America, 
 the sea and the winds, or the languages, astronomy, or industry, the 
 canal or prison discipline, geography or Plato ; if, in addition, an 
 organizing mind a power of evoking activity in the sluggish and 
 sagacity and unbroken industry through a life lengthened far beyond 
 that which the psalmist ascribes to a long human existence ; if a good 
 fame, encircling the globe on its own pinions, and not carried along 
 by later history, if these make up or prove greatness, then indeed we 
 may say, without presumption, that our age has been graced by one 
 of the greatest men so favored an exemplar of humanity that he 
 would cease to be an example for us had he not manifested through his 
 whole life of ninety years that unceasing labor, unvarying love of 
 truth and advancement, and that kindness to his fellow-beings, which 
 are duties, and in which every one of us ought to strive to imitate him. 
 What an amount of thinking, observing, writing, traveling, and dis- 
 covering he has performed, from that juvenile essay of his on the 
 textile fabrics of the ancients, to the last line of his " Cosmos," which 
 reminds us of Copernicus reading the last proof-sheet on his death-bed, 2 
 shortly before his departure ; or of Mozart, who directed with dying 
 looks the singing of a portion of his requiem, which he had in part 
 composed on his death-bed ! Let us one and all, young and old, sym- 
 bolize by his name the fact that, however untrue assuredly the saying 
 is that genius is labor, it is true that the necessary factor or coefficient 
 of genius and of any talent is incessant diligence. We are ordained 
 not only to eat the bread of our mouth in the sweat of our brow, but 
 to earn in the same way the nourishing bread of the mind. This is no 
 world of trifling, and Humboldt, like the Greeks, whose intellectuality 
 he loved to honor whose Socrates loved to say, Arduous are all noble 
 things was a hard-working man, far harder working than most of 
 those who arrogate the name to themselves. He ceased to work, and 
 
 in the following words: Compartment, 'com':Pret-Ment; Depa>-t-ed, rs, Dee-Pret; | 
 Uepitrtment, Dee-Pret (Ment) ; Impart, Em-Fret. See In particular and In part 
 in the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary. 
 
 - ori Ills death-bed. 25. 
 
164: SECOND STANDARD-rilOXOGKAPHIC READER. 
 
 to work hard, only when he laid himself down on that couch from 
 which he never rose again. It is not considered inappropriate, I be- 
 lieve, on occasions like this, to give distinctness to the picture by 
 stating personal observations. Allow me, then, to relate a very sim- 
 ple, yet a characteristic fact. I visited Humboldt at Potsdam, in the 
 year 
 
 1844, when he had reached, therefore, the age of 75 ; for you 
 know that he was born in that memorable year of 1769, in 
 which Cuvier was born, and Wellington, and Chateaubriand, 1 and 
 Napoleon, and Canning, and Walter Scott, and Mackintosh just ten 
 years after Schiller 2 just twenty after Goethe. 3 Humboldt told me at 
 that time that he was engaged on a work which he intended to call 
 Cosmos; that he was obliged chiefly to write at night, for in the morn- 
 ing he studied and arranged materials, and in the evening he was 
 obliged to be with the king from 9 o'clock to about 11. After his re- 
 turn from the king he was engaged in writing until one or two o'clock. 4 
 Humboldt, when in Berlin or Potsdam, was retained if we may use a 
 professional term to join the evening circle of the king for the indi- 
 cated hours. It was all, I believe, he was expected actually to perform 
 in return for the titles, honors, and revenue which he was enjoying, 
 except that the monarch sometimes selected him as a companion for 
 his journeys. Humboldt described to me the character of these royal 
 evening reunions. Everything of interest, as the day brought it to 
 notice, was there discussed. The drawing of a beautiful live oak near 
 Charleston, which a fair friend had made for me, was taken by Hum- 
 
 45 
 
 Cliateanforlnnd. This name is pronounced Shat6brio t '- (,) indicating 
 the nasalization of the preceding vowel. Ii might have been written 
 Chet-Brend, as though pronounced Cbato'briand. See this Reader, p. 90, 15'. 
 
 a Sclilll-r. Pronounced SheTer. This does not violate the rule of 161, b ; for 
 this is not Shel, but Shier. Moreover, that is a rule of safety for the inexperienced 
 writer, but not necessarily to be o r served by the reporter, who, able to command 
 his pen or pencil, can as Bureiy distinguish by difference of inclination between 
 Shel and Shen when standing alone as between Chay and Ray, Shel being written 
 more inclined than Shen. This liberty becomes safer in ihe case of Schler, for 
 there is no separate outline Ish'shon to conflict with. It is also saf<-r in the case of 
 Shelder, because in the case of double-lengths the distinction of inclination is very 
 easy. 20T, R. 5. 
 
 Goethe. The sound of the German oe or 6 (63, as a German calls it) is the 
 sound of the rowel in first, erxt, earth. For its Standard-Phonographic sign, see 
 Coinp., p. 206, 24, Nos. 81 and 32. Goethe = Gce-te. 
 
 one or two o'clock. 350, 3. See this Reader, p. 74, 6 s . 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 165 
 
 boldt to that circle, where it attracted so much attention that he 
 begged me to leave it ; and he told me that the volume describing our 
 aqueduct, which my friend the author now the president of our col- 
 lege had given me at the time of its publication, and which I had 
 then sent him, had furnished the topic of discussion for an entire 
 week. "We collected," he said, "all possible works on ancient and 
 modern aqueducts, and compared, discussed, and applied for many 
 successive evenings." Is there, then, a royal road to knowledge, after 
 all, when a Hum boldt can be retained ? May I extend your supposed 
 permission of giving personal anecdotes, provided they are of a suffi- 
 ciently biographical character, such as Plutarch, perhaps, would not 
 have disdained to record ? I desire to show what interest he took in 
 everything connected with progress. I have reason to believe that it 
 was chiefly owing to him that the King of Prussia offered to me, not 
 long after my visit, a chair to be created in the University of Berlin, 
 exclusively dedicated to the Science and Art of Punishment, or to 
 Pcenology. I had conversed with the monarch on the superiority of 
 solitary confinement at labor over all the other prison systems, when 
 he concluded our interview with these words : " I wish you would con- 
 vince Mr. Von Humboldt of your views. He is rather opposed to them. 
 I shall let him know that you will see him." Humboldt and prison 
 discipline sounded strange to my ears. I went, and found that he 
 loved truth better than his own opinion or bias ; and my suggestion 
 that so comprehensive a university as that of Berlin, our common 
 native city, ought to be honored with having the first chair of Pcenol- 
 ogy (for which it was high time to carve out a distinct branch, treating 
 of the convict in all his phases after the act of conviction), was seized 
 upon at once by his liberal mind. He soon carried the minister of 
 justice along with him, and the offer to which I have alluded was the 
 consequence. On the other hand, a friend, whose name is, perhaps, 
 more interwoven with the history of our canal than that of any other 
 citizen, except Clinton, informs me that he had the pleasure of sitting 
 by the side of Humboldt at a royal dinner at Charlottsburg. During 
 the whole time, they were engaged in conversing almost exclusively on 
 our great canal, and that greater one which ought to unite in ever last- 
 in"; wedlock the 
 
 A /? sturdy Atlantic and the teeming Pacific, having now yearned 
 * " for one another for centuries. Humboldt spoke with a knowl- 
 edge of details and a sagacious discernment which were surprising to 
 my friend, well versed in all the details tf these topics. Although it 
 
166 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 has been stated 1 by high authority that the works of Humboldt show 
 to every one who can "read between the lines," an endeavor to pre- 
 sent nature in her totality, unconnected with- man, I can not other- 
 wise than state here that, on the contrary, it has ever appeared to me 
 that this great man, studying nature in her details, and becoming what 
 Bacon calls her interpreting priest, elevates himself to those heights 
 whence he can take a comprehensive view of her in connection with 3 
 man and the movements of society, with language, economy, and ex- 
 change, institutions, and architecture, which is to man almost like the 
 nidifying instinct to the bird. Humboldt's tendency in this respect 
 seems to me in its sphere wholly dissimilar to the view which his friend 
 Hitter takes of geography in connection with history. Humboldt, it 
 would seem, could hardly be expected to stand in a different relation 
 to the natural sciences. He was, with all his erudition and the grandeur 
 of his knowledge, eminently 4 a social man. I have found a passage in 
 a paper written by a diplomatist and highly-cultivated writer, Varn- 
 hagen von Ense* which, I feel sure, will be listened to with interest. 
 Von Ense describes his sojourn in Paris in 1810, and says : 
 
 "In the salons of Metternich* (at that time Austrian Ambassador 
 near the Court of St. Cloud) I saw Humboldt only as a brilliant and 
 admired meteor so much so, that I hardly found time to present my- 
 self to him, and to whisper into his ear a few of those names which 
 gave me a right to a personal acquaintance with him. Rarely has a 
 man enjoyed in such a degree the esteem of all, the admiration of the 
 most opposite parties, and the zeal of all in power to serve him. Na- 
 poleon does not love him. He knows Humboldt as a shrewd thinker, 
 whose way of thinking and whose opinion can not be bent ; but the 
 Emperor and his Court, and the high authorities in the state, have 
 never denied the impression which they received by the presence of 
 
 l P i although It lias been stated. p. 1C9, E. 12. See this Header, p. 
 U 63, xvi. 
 
 a unconnected with. 250, 3, and example With. 
 In connection -with 250, 3, and example With. 
 
 * a social. The rule of 161, 6, is conformed to here, for Shel does not stand 
 alone ; but the word social may be written by the reporter Iss-Shel even when 
 alone, if he is particular to write the Shel more inclined than Shen would natu- 
 rally be. See this Reader, p. 164, 45". 
 
 5 Variihagcn von Knsc Pronounced Farnha'gen fgn En'se. 
 
 Mettcrislch. Pronounced Met-ernic. For the Standard-Phonographic sign 
 for the sound <;, see the Compendium, p. 206, 24, No. 66. As to the sound, see p. 
 210, 25, No. 66. 
 
KEY TO THE REPORTING EXERCISES. 167 
 
 this bold traveler, by the power of knowledge, and the light which 
 seems to stream from it in every direction. The learned of all nations 
 are proud of their high asso'ciate, all the Germans of their country- 
 man, and all the liberals of their fellow." * * * "It has been 
 rarely vouchsafed," continues Von Ense, " to a man in such degree as 
 to Hurnboldt, to stand forth in individual independence and always 
 equal to himself, and at one and the same time, in scientific activity 
 and in the widest social 1 and international intercourse, in the solitude 
 of minute inquiry, and in the almost confusing brilliancy of the soci- 
 ety of the day ; but I know of no one who, with all this, has endeav- 
 ored throughout his whole life to promote the progress and welfare of 
 our race so steadily, uniformly, and with such ample success." 
 
 So far Von Ense. This picture is, doubtless, true ; but we ought 
 not to recall it to our memory without remembering at the same time 
 one of his most prominent characteristics his simplicity and amenity, 
 so inherent in him that they were never dimmed, so far as I know, by 
 the luster of his talents or energy of his thought. The most perfect 
 image 
 
 k H of social refinement which I have to this day in my mind, is 
 * ' an early evening party at the villa of William von Hurnboldt, 
 near the Lake Tegel. Nature has not done much for that spot, but 
 refined simplicity, courtesy, and taste, easy interchange of thought and 
 experience, men of name and women of attractive elegance and high 
 acquirements, young and old, travelers, courtiers, soldiers, and stu- 
 dents, music, works of art, with green lawns, shrubbery, and winding 
 paths along smooth water and waving fields, are components of that 
 scene in the midst of which the 1 two illustrious Humboldts moved and 
 delighted others as much as they seemed to be gratified, 2 giving and 
 receiving as all the others did, 3 never condescending, never indicating 
 a consciousness that they encouraged the timid, but showing how 
 gladly they received additional knowledge from every one. There are 
 men here around me, of honored names in those sciences which Hum- 
 
 i sodal.-See this Reader, p. 164, 45 2 , and p. 166, 46 4 . 
 
 I n i in the midst of which, the. 286, 8. The t of midst is elided, in 
 "* ' accordance with 236, 3, and of is implied by joining. 
 
 * scemtd to be gratified. Seem is written here instead of the past tense, 
 Be is added by widening, and To is omitted. See this Eeader, p. 7T, 7 6 . 
 
 * us all the others did. See DUB in the Standard-Phonographic Dic- 
 tionary. 
 
168 SECOND 8TANDAED-PHONOGKAPHIC KEADEE. 
 
 boldt cultivated more especially as his own. 4 I hope they will indicate 
 to us how he infused a new spirit into them how he immeasurably 
 extended them, how he added discoveries and original conceptions ; 
 but I, though allowed to worship these sciences in the peristyle only, 
 and not as a consecrated* priest, crave permission to say a few words 
 even on this topic. Some h'fteen years ago, Humboldt presided over 
 the annual meeting of naturalists, then held at Berlin. In his open- 
 ing speech he chiefly discoursed of the merits of Linnaeus. He knew 
 of Linnaeus as Herodotus knew of Salamis and Thermopylae ; for the 
 life of the great Swede overlapped by some ten years that of Humboldt, 
 and all he there said of Linnaeus seems to me to apply to himself with 
 far greater force, and on an enlarged scale. In that speech, too, I re- 
 member he quoted his friend Schiller. Humboldt was, in a marked 
 manner, of a poetic temperament. I do not believe that without it he 
 would have been able to receive* those living impressions of nature, 
 and to combine what was singly received, in those vivid descriptions 
 o true and transparent that they surprise the visitor of the scenes to 
 this day. He had that constructive imagination 1 do not speak now 
 of inventive fancy without which no man can be great in any branch, 
 whether it belong to nature or to history. But yesterday an officer of 
 our navy, 7 whose profession has made him well acquainted with South 
 America, by sea and land, with the Andes one of the monuments of 
 our illustrious man* told me that he knew of no descriptions, or rather 
 characteristics, so true to living reality as " Humboldt' s Views of Na- 
 ture," which he had perused and enjoyed on the spot. The power of 
 collocation and shrewdness of connection, the knowledge of detail and 
 the absence of a desire to perceive things according to a system, the 
 thirst for a knowledge of the life of nature, and the constant wish to 
 aiake all of us share in the treasures of his knowledge his lucid style, 
 which may raise hu> ' ' Cosmos' ' to a German classic these seem to me 
 to characterize Humboldt in his studies of nature, besides all that which 
 ne has done as a professional naturalist. Humboldt' s name and life 
 .nay be termed, with strict propriety of language, international. He 
 
 * as his own. p. 162, B. 4. 
 
 * aa a consecrated. p. 112, B. 7, I>. 
 
 * he would have been able to receive. Sec this Beader, p. 104, 22" ; 
 comp., 249 ; p. 169, II 12 and B. 14. 
 
 of our navy. 25. 
 
 * of our Illustrious man. Man is vocalized here, so that it shall not be 
 rend Men, though a critical reporter would not need such aid for the correci read- 
 ing of the phrase-sign. 
 
KEY TO THE BEPOBTING EXERCISES. 169 
 
 read and spoke English and Italian. He spoke and wrote Spanish with 
 care and correctness, and French almost as well as 9 German. He lived 
 for entire peiiods of many years in Paris, and counted many French 
 among his best friends, 10 yet not at the expense of patriotism. In that 
 very speech at Berlin, 
 
 k which has been mentioned, ' he dwells with pleasure on the 
 ^ penetrating effect which the German mind has exercised en all 
 the physical sciences, no less than in the mental branches. Humboldt 
 was a dweller in kingly palaces a courtier, if you choose, 2 and the son 
 of a courtier without a taint of servile flattery or of submission. He 
 was rather the honored guest of royalty. He loved liberty, and con- 
 sidered it a necessary element of our civilization. He was a sincere 
 friend of substantial, institutional freedom. His mind often traveled 
 to this country ; and that he loved America, sometimes with sadness, 
 is sufficiently 3 shown, were it not otherwise well known, by the singular 
 love which the Americans bore him. To me that little piece of news 
 was inexpressibly touching, which simply informed us that our Minis- 
 ter in Berlin, with the Americans now present at that city a cluster 
 of mourners from afar formed part of his funeral procession the 
 only foreign nation thus represented. In his simplicity and genial 
 warmth he did what many a bold man would have hesitated to do. I 
 was present as a young and distant listener, when at Rome, imme- 
 diately after the Congress of Verona, the King of Prussia, Humboldt, 
 and Niebuhr conversed on the affairs of the day, and when the last- 
 mentioned 4 spoke in no flattering terms of the political views and 
 antecedents of Arago, who, it is well known, was a very advanced re- 
 publican of the Gallican school, an uncompromising French democrat. 
 Frederic William the Third simply abominated republicanism, yet 
 when Niebuhr had finished, Humboldt said, with a sweetness which I 
 vividly remember, " Still this monster is the dearest friend I have in 
 France." Humboldt had all his brother's views of the necessity of 
 
 almost as well as. The t of Almost is omitted under 236, 3, As is added 
 by enlarging the circle, and the hook of Well is omitted for the sake of phrase- 
 writing. 
 
 10 among Ills best friends. 236, 3; 164. 
 
 JO i which has been mentioned. p. 169, K. 12. 
 :( J a if you choose. p. 167, B. 2. 
 * Is sufficiently. p. 182, It. 4 
 last-mentioned. 236, 3. 
 
170 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC EEADEB. 
 
 the highest university education, and he gave impulse to many a sci- 
 entific, historical, or ethnological expedition, fitted out even by foreign 
 governments, for he was considered the counselor of all. But I can not 
 dwell 6 here any longer on his versatility and manifold aptitude. It is 
 proved by the literature of almost every branch. If we read " Earth 
 on Central Africa, " we find Humboldt ; if we read Say's "Political 
 Economy," we find his name ; if we study the history of the Nine- 
 teenth Century, we find his name hi the diplomacy of Prussia and 
 France ; if we read general literature, we find his name in connection 
 with Schiller and Madame de Stael ; if we look at modern maps, we 
 find his isothermal lines ; if we consult Grim's Dictionary of the Ger- 
 man Language, we find Humboldt as authority. That period has 
 arrived to which Croesus alluded in the memorable exclamation, " Oh, 
 Solon, Solon, Solon!" and we are now allowed to say Humboldt was 
 one of the most gifted, most fortunate, and most favored mortals 
 favored even with comeliness, with a brow so exquisitely formed that, 
 irrespective of its being the symbol of lofty thought, is pleasant to 
 look upon in his busts, as a mere beautiful thing favored even in his 
 name, so easily pronounced by all nations which were destined to pro- 
 nounce it. When we pray not only for the kindly fruits of the earth, 
 but also, as we ought to do, for the kindly fruits of the mind, let us 
 always gratefully remember that He who gives all blessed things has 
 given to our age and to all posterity such a man as Humboldt. 
 
 but I can not dvrclL / is omitted here under 250, 3, for the sake of 
 phrase-writing. Bee the Standard-Phonographic Dictionary under /. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 
 
 A. 
 
 page 67, note 22. 
 
 A supplied after Of and To 
 
 67, n!5 and 17. 
 
 Above all 
 
 141, n 27. 
 
 
 141, n27. 
 
 Accom-, objection to heavy dot for, answered 
 
 72, n4. 
 
 Actor sometimes represented by the verb. 76, n 1 ; 121, n 21 
 Admits that 
 
 ; 126, n 16 ; 140, n 2. 
 143, n 8. 
 
 Advantage of adding AH by a hook 
 
 ..68, n 26; 74, n 15 
 
 Affinity 
 
 ... . 117 n 5. 
 
 
 119 n3. 
 
 
 .127, n 17; 159, n 6. 
 
 
 146 n 5 
 
 Agassiz, Prof., estimates the age of a human foot and jaw. .... 
 
 91, n 5. 
 
 
 91, n 5. 
 
 Ah may be written in longhand 
 
 52, n 6. 
 
 All added by an El-hook or by enlarging an Ar-hook 
 
 ..62, xiv.; 141, n 27. 
 . .68, n 26; 74, n 15 
 
 All dhr . .. 
 
 167, n 3 
 
 
 83 n4 
 
 American, contraction for 107, n 
 
 3; 140, n 2; 148, n 5. 
 106, n 3. 
 
 American Bible Society Anniversary, Report of 
 
 American Bible Society, contraction for 
 
 107, n4. 
 
 A n expressed by a tick, value of the device 
 
 67, n 22 
 
 An supplied after Of and To 
 
 .. .67, n 15 and 17 
 
 
 74, n 14 135 n 16 
 
 
 . . . . 66 u 4 
 
 
 84 n 8 
 
 A nd (&) 
 
 . . . . 134 n 12 
 
 Anil distinguished from joined Of 
 
 .84 n 9- 144 n 17 
 
 And joined by horizontal or perpendicular tick . 
 
 66 n 7 
 
 And omitted , 
 
 155, n 2. 
 
 And prefixed to words in the Fourth Position 
 
 116, n 2; 138 n 18 
 
 And so forth 
 
 134 n 12 c 
 
 And Me, how it may be disposed of by the practiced reporter . 
 And what 
 
 ..13S,n8; 141, n 24. 
 123, n 8. 
 
 
 
172 INDEX OF THE NOTES. 
 
 And would i.'s, n 4. 
 
 Answer, how to indicate the beginning and end of, in Law-Reporting 119, n 4. 
 
 Anything and Nothing distinguished 139, n IT. 
 
 Applause, etc 119, n 4. 
 
 Applause and Laughter liS, n 7. 
 
 Are frequently expressed by an Ar-hook, or by enlarging a small El-hook. . 62, XT. ; 
 
 75, n 8. 
 
 Ar-hook implied 84, n 7 ; 129, n 4. 
 
 Ar-hook implied after Dbees 103, n 7; 112, n4; 118, n 8. 
 
 Ar-hook, small, enlarged to add All or Witt 6-', xiv. ; 73, n 8. 
 
 Are, how to be written when standing alone 142, n 2. 
 
 Around joined to Loot-ed 114, n 12. 
 
 As added by enlarging a circle 169, n 2. 
 
 .4 prefixed V8, n 4. 
 
 A prefixed to words in the Fourth Position So. n 3. 
 
 Association and Society distinguished when contracted 91, n 4. 
 
 As to distinguished from As to the 92, n 1. 
 
 At sometimes added by shortening 63, xvi. ; 68, n 29. 
 
 Audi Alteram Partem 95, n 7. 
 
 Aye 119, n 2. 
 
 B. 
 
 Baconian Philosophy 69, n 83. 
 
 .Be added to Em by widening 77, n 6; S7, n 1. 
 
 Beautiful traits of character 125, n 2. 
 
 Been thr and Be thr 74, n 19. 
 
 Being. 133. n 4. 
 
 Beneficent 144, u 16. 
 
 Beneficial 148, n 9. 
 
 Benefits of Reporting Studies and Practice 131, n 10. 
 
 Benjamin Franklin 141, n 18. 
 
 Black Republicans 124. n 10. 
 
 -Ble sometimes written with Bee instead of Bel 92, n8; 114, n 1; 123, n4; 
 
 132, n 15 ; 148, n 10; 161, n 17. 
 
 Brief Way and Tay enlarged 61, x.; 129, n 5. 
 
 Brief Way and Yay joined as simple w aud y 67, n 21. 
 
 But I cannot 170 n 5. 
 
 But it 74, n 16. 
 
 But not 109, n 13. 
 
 By the Learned Counsel for the Defendant 167, n 7 ; 153, n 1. 
 
 C. 
 
 Capable 92, n 3. 
 
 Chancery 162, n 6, 
 
 Change of Outlines or Direction for sake of Phrase-writing 139, n 1 ; 145, n 4 ; 
 
 147, n 3; 169, n 9. 
 
 Chapters and verses 9-, n 8. 
 
 Characteristics of the Reporting Style 61-63, 
 
 "Chase with the Speaker" to be avoided C4. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 173 
 
 Cheers, etc. mode of indicating 119, n 4 
 
 Circle between two strokes. . 87, n 2 ; 148, n 8. 
 
 Circle between curves 156, n 10. 
 
 Circle, large initial 6T, n!9; 127, n 21. 
 
 Classical and Reporting Studies Compared 181, n 10. 
 
 Con- and Com- implied ISO, n 8; 168, n 3. 
 
 ConjUct contracted 107, n 10. 
 
 Common, new word-sign for. 126, n 11. 
 
 Contra-o, etc., implied by proximity. 109, n 12. 
 
 Contractions for general use sometimes formed on the principle of special 
 contractions 136, n 15, 17, 19. 
 
 Contraction for Habea* Corpus 186, n 15. 
 
 Contractions general principles observed in making, in Standard Pho- 
 nography 129, n 6. 
 
 Contraction progressive degrees of 100, n 1 ; 107, n 4 ; 125, n 6. 
 
 Contractions sometimes vocalized 129, n 6, c. 
 
 Contraction value of a good one. 66, n 12. 
 
 CoiUi-i- joined 88, n 1. 
 
 Contributed 88, n 1. 
 
 Contribution 88, n 1. 
 
 Country, new word-sign for 187, n 8. 
 
 Court and Jury 154, n 6. 
 
 Cross-examination, how indicated 150, n 9. 
 
 Cwcter, pronunciation of. 74, n 20. 
 
 D. 
 
 Dagger ( f ) use of, in indicating outlines ,.58, par. 29. 
 
 Dashes with Hooks, how distinguished from shortened letters 71, n 13. 
 
 Daes, how written 76, n2; 78, n2; 149, n 4; 151, n 12. 
 
 Defendant, word-sign for 154, n 7. 
 
 " Democratic Party" contracted 118, n 13. 
 
 Derivative contractions or wor J-signs, positions of 186, n 2, Z>, c, and d. 
 
 Derivative word-signs SO, 9". 
 
 Derivative words sometimes contracted, and not the Primitives 129, n 6, b. 
 
 Described in his patent 157, n 8. 
 
 Description, phonographic example of 59-9. 
 
 Dhees-Em . 155, n 10. 
 
 Dtir and sometimes Tr and Dr added to straight lines by lengthening 62, xii. 
 
 Dhr=</T, their, etc., added by lengthening to straight lines 62, xii. ; 148, n 8. 
 
 Dhrt'ifir, tliert,^ etc., added by a heavy tick 61, xiii. 
 
 Different, Headings 188, n 9. 
 
 Different Values of Phonographic Letters distinguished 71, n 18. 
 
 Directions changed forsake of Ptirase-writing 128, n 23 ; 145, n 4. 
 
 Discrimination required in Note reading. 138, n 9. 
 
 Disdained to be 66, n 5. 
 
 Disparities in speed in the Old Phonography 85, n 5. 
 
 D ssolution and Desolation 127, n 20. 
 
 Distinguishing different values, etc. law of, stated 71, n 13. 
 
 Pouhle read:ng 188, n 9. 
 
 riutj of Reporters 85, n 8. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 
 
 E. 
 
 Ef-hook expressing Have, Eter, For*e, Ful-lyness .... 63, xvii ; 106, n 9 ; 113, n 5 ; 
 
 122, n 24- 
 
 Ef-hook ometimes added to curves 120, n8; 139, n 16. 
 
 Ef-Sem 87, n 2. 
 
 El-hook employed to add Att or Will 62, xiv. 
 
 El-hook, small enlarged sometimes to add Are, Were, Our 62, xv. 
 
 Ems-Ith 143, n 8. 
 
 England, new word-sign for 1ST, n 4. 
 
 En-hook omitted 107, n 3 ; 110, nl; 111, nT; 113, nC; 118, n 8; 120, n9; 
 
 122, n 20; 125, n 13; 181, n 12 ; 132, n 17; 140, n 2; 141, n 23; 143, n 10; 154, n 2. 
 
 Ens-circle between strokes 14S, n 7 ; 150, n 10 ; 157, n 9. 
 
 Entire and its derivatives 133, u 5. 
 
 Entitle-d contracted 159, n 8. 
 
 Es-sounds omitted 69, n34; 94, n 6; 134, n 11; 149, n5; 150, n 7. 
 
 Etc 134, n 12. 
 
 Example of Phonographic Description 58 9. 
 
 Et cetera and It is true 134, n 12, d. 
 
 Exceed-ing-ingly 160, n 1 1. 
 
 Exercises, errors in writing 52, par. 3. 
 
 Exercises, examples for close imitation and copying 57. 
 
 Exercises, method of studying 51-2, 
 
 Exercises to be written from Dictation 52, par. 2. 
 
 " Exhibits" in Law-Eeporting 150, n 8. 
 
 Extemporaneous speech, phrases of 113, n 7 ; 133, n 9. 
 
 Extracts, how indicated, etc 102, n 2. 
 
 F. 
 
 Farther and farther 89, n 6. 
 
 -Fer-red, etc. 94, n 4. 
 
 Final "Wuh-hook, rule for, stated. 104, n L 
 
 For a considerable time 94, n 1. 
 
 Fore added 84, n 5 
 
 Foreign names 90, n 3; 126, n 15; 164, n 1 
 
 Foreign languages, reporting of 101, n 1. 
 
 Form, how written in the Eeporting Style of Standard Phonography 117, n 3. 
 
 For our distinguished from From Ill, n 7. 
 
 For the omitted 153, n 1. 
 
 From omitted. S3, nl; 121, n 19, c; 162, n 3. 
 
 Fractions 89, n 8. 
 
 Ful-ly expressed by Ef sometimes 133, n 1 ; 145, n 2 ; 148, n 6. 
 
 -Fulness 93, n 2. 
 
 G. 
 
 Gay between Ing and other letters sometimes omitted 118, n 12. 
 
 General , 121, n 16. 
 
 - = <*neral contractions 70, n 8. 
 
 ~al Council 92, ni. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 175 
 
 Goethe, pronunciation of. 164, n 8. 
 
 Gordian knot cut 38, n 28. 
 
 Greatest speed of writing, how to attain it 58, par. 2. 
 
 G reek quotation, pronunciation of 101, 11 1 
 
 H. 
 
 Habeas Corpus 185. n 15. 
 
 Hud added by shortening 63, xvi. ; 142, n 30 ; 144, n 12. 
 
 Half-length Hook-letters distinguished from Hook-dashes 71, n 18. 
 
 Halving to add It, Had, What, Would, and sometimes At and Out 63, xvi. ; 
 
 159, n 5. 
 
 Hand, hesitating movement of, to be avoided 52, par. 2. 
 
 Hast S3, n 3. 
 
 Have added by the Ef hook 122, n 24. 
 
 Have implied after/ 110, n 2 and 3; 113, n 9 ; 119, n 14; 120, n5; 141, n IT. 
 
 Have omitted 73, n 9 ; 74, n 19 ; 110, n 2 and 3. 
 
 Jfate, when it should not be omit'.ed 111. n 3, c. 
 
 He expressed by a tick in the Reporting Style 60, iv., 1. 
 
 " Hear the other side," and why 94, n 7. 
 
 Hi* added to a Loop 144, n 13. 
 
 Hooks implied sometimes by offsets 155, n 12. 
 
 Hooks omitted 76, n 2 and 7; 81, n 3 and 4; 85, n 2; 83, n 3; 161, n2 and 16; 
 
 166, n 1 ; 169, n 1 and 9. 
 
 //oio expressed by a tick in the Eeporting Style 60, i v., 2. 
 
 Human Family 143, n 10. 
 
 I. 
 
 7, brief sign for 127, n 23. 
 
 /, how expressed in the Reporting Style 60, iv., 3. 
 
 /ornlted 120, n 15; 128, n 27, b; 170, n 5. 
 
 I would to God 113, n 7. 
 
 / written to imply Have 110, n 2 and 3. 
 
 Iinpioux and Impossible 145, n 20. 
 
 Implying and Supplying distinguished 67, n 15. 
 
 Implying, a remark upon 130, n 9, b. 
 
 Implying ing preceding a-n or the 72, n4; 142, n 31. 
 
 " thr 89, n7; 129, nl; 140, n 5. 
 
 Improvements, why mentioaed 154, n 7. 
 
 la order to constitute 158, n 10. 
 
 In, prefixed by an In-hook 108, n 7 ; 127, n 18 ; 148, nil. 
 
 1 In Hie first place 135, n 17. 
 
 i In (fit) relation and /n, real-ity 25, n 4. 
 
 I Incapable 114, n 1. 
 
 Indian's skull found at New Orleans, age of 91, n 5. 
 
 ]n:iiiite-ly, etc !-5. n 5. 
 
 1 In_' lengthened to add thr 117, n 4. 
 
 i Ing omitted 95, nlO; 128, n 29. 
 
 I 'ing' omitted 122, n 27; 184, nlO; 137, i 6; 159, n C. 
 
 i Ing thr 89, n 7; 
 
176 INDEX OF TIIE NOTES. 
 
 ingly 80, nl. 
 
 -ings 7 2, n 4. 
 
 Initial circle, large, saving of 6f, n!9; 127, n 21. 
 
 Initial circle implying an Ar-hook 10S, n 6. 
 
 Intelligencer, Phonographic, referred to 149, n 1. 
 
 Interfcre-d 160, n 12. 
 
 Interrogation, mark of, In Law-Reporting 149, n 2, b. 
 
 Interruptions 121, n 19. 
 
 Into omitted 161, n 16. 
 
 Introduction 55-64 
 
 Characteristics of the Reporting Style 60-64. 
 
 Example of Phonographic Description 63. 
 
 Key to the Pronunciation 53. 
 
 Phonographic Nomenclature 65-57. 
 
 Is prefixed by enlarging a circle 65, n 8; 169, n 8. 
 
 Iss-Shel may be used by the reporter even when alone 166, n 4. 
 
 It added by halving 68, xvl. ; 71, n 12 ; 75, n 5 ; 90, n 1 : 108, n 6 ; 111, n 8 ; 
 
 115, n 4 ; 128, n 1 ; 127, n 19 and 22 ; 147, n 4 ; 158, n 12 ; 166, n 1. 
 
 It added to the past tense of verbs ending in Mel, Nel, and Rel 156, n 4, 2, B, b. 
 
 It is a well-known fact .-. 128, n 23. 
 
 It is true and Et cetera 134, n 12. 
 
 It not 141, n 18. 
 
 Ith-Sem 87, n i. 
 
 J. 
 
 John Bull 124, n 9. 
 
 Joinings 83, n 4 ; 93, n 5 ; 125, n 5 ; 139, n 15 ; 144, n 15 ; 145, n 21 ; 147, n 1 ; 
 
 163, n 2 ; 163, n 7. 
 
 Joining sometimes requires change of outline! even of word-signs 147, n 8 ; 
 
 165. n 11. 
 
 Joining with a preceding Ens-circle 143, n 7. 
 
 Jury to be capitalized in transcribing 154, u 6. 
 
 K. 
 
 -Kay omitted 68, n 30 ; 72, n 5. 
 
 Kay-omitted 71,n8; 118,nlO; 118,nl2; 125, n 6. 
 
 Key to the Pronunciation 63. 
 
 b. 
 
 Large-hook letters, shortening of C6, n 2; 144, n 19. 
 
 Large initial circle, advantage of 67, n 19. 
 
 " " hook for ion Em, En, Ray 61, viii. 
 
 " " " instance of value 65, n 2. 
 
 letter when terminating verbs in the present tense.. . .156, n 4. 
 
 67, n 0. 
 
 121, n 22. 
 
 X^. 149, n 1. 
 
 149. 
 
 ind cross-examination .150, n 9. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 177 
 
 Law-Eeporting Punctuation in 150, n 11. 
 
 Lawyers' names, how indicated 152, n 14. 
 
 Legibility favored by indicating punctuation 75, n 3. 
 
 " by Standard-Phonographic method of implying Of. 65, n 8. 
 
 -Lossness 98, n 2. 
 
 Letters crossed for greater legibility 88, n 4. 
 
 Letters, crossing of, how indicated 63, par. 29. 
 
 Letters muat not be made too large 51. 
 
 Let thr 81, n 1. 
 
 Loir eabins 113, n 10. 
 
 Long stroke before the last figure of dates 76, n 3. 
 
 Loud laughter 121, n 22; 119, n 4. 
 
 .L<y 71, nil; 117, n 5, 3. 
 
 -Ly omitted 72, n 2; 75, n 4; 89, n 5. 
 
 M. 
 
 MaTtevtA Take 70, n 6. 
 
 Make it 98, n 4 
 
 Maybe 16.', n 3. 
 
 May have been 162, n 8. 
 
 Merely and Immorally 129, n 4. 
 
 Mett rnich 166, n 6. 
 
 Misrepresentation, what it is 95, n 7. 
 
 Mi-, may be omitted in nott -taking 154, n 1. 
 
 " prefixed to names in transcribing 121, n 20; 154, n 1. 
 
 Much 83, n 2 
 
 Multiply-ied, multitude 65, n ? 
 
 Must have been there 74, n 19 
 
 W. 
 
 Names, foreign, how written 90, n J 
 
 Nearly 129, u 4 
 
 -Next omi'ted 124, n 12 
 
 Never, Standard-Phonographic word-sign for 66, n 12 
 
 New Orleans, Indian skull found there 91, n 5 
 
 Nomenclature, Phonographic, use of 53, par. 8 
 
 explanation of 55-57. 
 
 None others 126, n 14. 
 
 North contracted 126, n 9; 146, n 7. 
 
 Northern 120, n 14 ; 123, n 7. 
 
 Sot added by an En-hook 109, n 1?. 
 
 Notes, discrimina ion required in reading ... 131, n 10. 
 
 11 Notes" of exercises written from dictation to be read rapidly E2, par. 4. 
 
 Notes on ihe exercises, object of 53. 
 
 ' Notes" taken from dictation to be transcribed 52, par. 5. 
 
 frothing and Anything 139, n 17. ( 
 
 I Numbers, how generally written 74, n 2 : 123, n 5; 154. ' 
 
 | Numerals, phonographic 
 
 1 Numerical denominations 1 
 
178 INDEX OF THE NOTES. 
 
 O. 
 
 Oand Oh 82, n 6. 
 
 ObJ;ct of comparing the Old and the New Phonography in the notes. 63; 151, n 7. 
 
 ObJ cted to 151, n 13. 
 
 OL.J ctions in Law-Reporting, how noted 151, n 13. 
 
 " to certain contractions answered 125, n 6 ; l-'7, n 23. 
 
 Of (t^n or the) omitted at the end of lines 69, n 31. 
 
 " expressed by a Vee-hook 84, n 8 ; 121, n 17. 
 
 1 t quently implied in the Reporting Style of Standard Phonography 61, vi. 
 
 " h wing 63, n 23- 
 
 " it.- 70, n 4; 74, n 1. 
 
 - advantage of 65, n 8 ; 67, n 17; 73, n 12. 
 
 " ttit omitted at the end of a line 84, n 1. 
 
 " ' new word-sign for 74, n 1 ; 126, n 10. 
 
 Offer distinguished from Form 106, n 6. 
 
 -O(jr- iphy-ic-ical 74, n 14. 
 
 Old * honography confusion of, in the representation of icho-*e-m 109, n 9. 
 
 " defect as to the representation of Or not, But not Iu9, n 18. 
 
 " " in the representation of phrases of extempora- 
 neous speech 113, n 7. 
 
 " did not imply To ". 63, n 2. 
 
 " " " provide word-signs for numerical denomina- 
 tions 74, n 1 S. 
 
 " disparities of speed in 85, n 5. 
 
 " its inferiority as to outlines 132, n 15. 
 
 " its mode of expressing a- 67, n 22. 
 
 " plan of, as to W and Y 67, n 21. 
 
 " rule of, as to joining 83, n 4. 
 
 " rule of, as to joining and 66, n 7. 
 
 " sacrificed uniformity and consistency 135, n 16. 
 
 Omission of vowels in the Reporting Style 61, i. 
 
 " words " " 63, xix, 
 
 " ing 95, n 10. 
 
 It 94, n 6. 
 
 t 106, n 5; 100, n 2. 
 
 OM addelby an En-hook 96, n 1. 
 
 Onf. and i he same 71 , n 7. 
 
 One omitted 72, n 3. 
 
 One or two 71, n 2. 
 
 Or not 109, n 13. 
 
 Or entitled 164, n 4. 
 
 " when joined 84, n 9. 
 
 Other expressed by the Dher-tick 62, xiii. ; 112, n 1 ; 126, n 14 ; 160, n 14. 
 
 "expnssed by lengthening.... 62, xii. ; 111, n 2; 113, n 6; 117, n 4; 119. n 17; 
 
 14S, n 8 ; 167, n 3. 
 
 igns thus formed Ill, n 7; 1*0, n 4. 
 
 -ography by an Ar-hook or by en- 
 
 : 111, n 7 ; 141, n 27 ; 125, n 2 ; 167, n 1. 
 r xvi. ; 96, n 12 ; 130, n 5 ; 142, n 29 ; 
 159, n 5. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 179 
 
 Outlines changed sometimes in phrase-writing 189, n 1. 
 
 Overlapping sometimes resorted to in phrase-writing. .94, n 1 ; 121, n 18 ; 128, n 6 ; 
 
 159, n 7. 
 
 P. 
 
 Parentheses 137, n 7. 
 
 Parenthetic curres uses of, in Phonographic Nomenclature 58, par. 30. 
 
 Parti-coloring yarn 155, n 9. 
 
 Part-ed 162, n 1. 
 
 Party, in special contractions, added to Em by widening 119, n 16. 
 
 Past participles before which Have may be omitted 110, n 3, and 111. 
 
 Past tense of verbs ending in Mel, Nel, Eel. 156, n 4. 
 
 Patience, results of 52, par. 6. 
 
 Patent-ed, word-sign for 154, n 3. 
 
 PeP distinguished from PletoidVPee 112, n 9. 
 
 Period in reporting testimony 149, n 2. 
 
 Perpendicular tick for <t n-d 66, n 7. 
 
 Phonographic Description, explanation of. 89. 
 
 Nomenclature, use of 53, par. 3. 
 
 Numerals, how distinguished sometimes 76, n 3 ; 78, n 2. 
 
 Phonography in the Law-Courts 149, n 1. 
 
 Phraseoijraphic power of Standard Phonography 64 
 
 Phrase- writing 112, n 3 ; 113, n 7 ; 125, n 8 ; 128, n 25 ; 158, n 2 ; 138, n 10 ; 
 
 139, n 1 ; 140, n 4, 7, 9, and 11 ; 143, n 6 ; 1-14, n 14 ; 145, n 22 and 23 ; n 1 and 4. 
 
 Phrase-writing facilitated by Standard Phonography 64 
 
 " over-lapping in. .94, n 1 ; 121, n 18 ; 182, n 12 ; 135, n 18 ; 136, n 20 ; 
 
 137, n 5. 
 
 " progressive degrees of 100, n 1. 
 
 " Mr. B. Finnan's estimate of its value 63, xxi. 
 
 Place, contraction for, in phrases like In tiie first place 136, n 19 (&). 
 
 Platonic philosophy 69, n 83. 
 
 Position-adaptation of 72, n 6 ; 109, n 11 ; 116, n 1 ; 118, n 11 ; 131, n 11 ; 
 
 132, n 16 ; 133, n 8 ; 143, n 3 ; 157, n 8. 
 
 " distinction between the Third and Fourth in case of the hori- 
 zontals 65, n 1. 
 
 Position of signs formed by prefixing Our by an Ar-hook or by enlarging 
 
 the small El-hook Ill, n 7. 
 
 Position of a contraction for a number of related words 136, n 2. 
 
 " " sometimes determined by the rule of the Corre- 
 sponding Siyle 137, n 2, e. 
 
 Position zero 115, n 4. 
 
 Pi>~J3"r why written Pee-Eay in the Reporting Style of Standard Phonog- 
 raphy 70, n 1. 
 
 Pitman's (Isaac) use of disjoined ticks criticised 71, n 4. 
 
 Pre-eminente, Prominence, and Permanence 141, n 19. 
 
 Preface 51. 
 
 Present for the past tense, principle and instances of . . .61, vii. ; 69, n 35 ; 73. ,p-" 1 
 
 " 
 
 Present tnnse frequently written for the past tense in the Kepo 
 6tandard Phonography 
 
180 INDEX OF THE NOTES. 
 
 Prof. Agassiz' estimate of the age of a human foot and jaw d Bcover*d in 
 Florida ................................................................. W,n& 
 
 .Progressive degrees of phrase-writing and contraction .................... 100, n 1. 
 
 Pronunciation, Key to ......................................................... 58. 
 
 * of Luke x. 16 ............................................ 101, n 1. 
 
 Pro-slavery .......... ................................................... 119, n 1. 
 
 Prosperity and Prospect ................................................ 120, n 6. 
 
 Proximity to imply Of only, advantage of ................................ 67, n 17. 
 
 Punctuation in note-taking ............................................... 75, n 3. 
 
 Question, best mode of indicating in law-reporting ....................... 149, n 2. 
 
 Quest! on-ed .............................................................. 88, n 2. 
 
 Questions by the Court and by a Juror, how indicated .................. 150 n 9, b. 
 
 Quotations ........................................... ................... 126, n 1 2. 
 
 " from foreign languages, how disposed of ....................... 101, n 1. 
 
 " " accessible books, " " ....................... 102, n 2. 
 
 R. 
 
 Kate of reading or speaking from memory ............................. 108, n 2, I. 
 
 Bay-Ter and Kay-Der ..................................................... 84, n 7. 
 
 Beading notes of the exercises written from dictation ................... 52, par. 4. 
 
 " " a difficulty in, avoided ..................................... 75, n 3. 
 
 " rate of ....................................................... 103, n 2, <f. 
 
 Eeferences, how they are made in this work ................................... 54. 
 
 " in reporting ................................................ 102, n 2. 
 
 Repeated quotations usually not taken in full ........................... 102, n 2, c. 
 
 Bepetitions, mode of expressing in Standard Phonography ........ 63, xx. ; 89, n 6 ; 
 
 101, n 2; 118, n; 12-!, n 30. 
 Beporting exercises ......................................................... 1-48. 
 
 " " Keyto ................................................ 65-170. 
 
 " Notes on .............................................. 65-170. 
 
 " foreign languages ............................................. 101. n 1. 
 
 " of American Bible Society Anniversary ....................... 106, n 3. 
 
 " study and experience and the study of the Classics compared.. 131, n 10. 
 " Style, general characteristics of ..................... . ........... 60-68. 
 
 " what it is, and what it is not .................................. 95, n 8. 
 
 " word-signs and contractions, method of study ....................... 51. 
 
 " " " " must be familiarized ............ 51, p:ir. 4. 
 
 Roman contracted ............................. . ...................... ____ 93, n 4. 
 
 Round, joined to Look .................................................. 114, n 12. 
 
 " Bough places made smooth" by Standard Phonography .............. ... 86, n 5. 
 
 117, n 5. 
 
 188, n 12. 
 ..16(5, n4. 
 .127, n 21. 
 
INDEX OP THE NOTES. 181 
 
 Secetsion added by Ses-eshon 12T, n 24. 
 
 Second Reader, design of 51. 
 
 8eem-ed 167, n 2. 
 
 Selections for the exercises, principle of miking them 54. 
 
 SWA joined 88, n 3 ; 115, n 2. 
 
 Aexsion ii'idcd by Iwreshon 127, n 24, f>. 
 
 Sliler written upwa d when alone 164, n 2. 
 
 Shon andTiv hook 66, n 9. 
 
 Shortened hook-letters distinguished from hook-dashes 71, n 13. 
 
 Shus-li-ness, words ending in, contracted 70, n 8; 124, u 11. 
 
 Size of writing best lor speed . 51. 
 
 Slavery 119, nl; 14S, n 5. 
 
 Small El or Ar hook enlarged to add a consonant 61, ix. 
 
 Soci al 166, n 4. 
 
 Society, 88, n 4. Society, when contracted, distinguished from Association 
 
 contracted 91, n 4. 
 
 So much 83, n 2. 
 
 Spacing to indicate omission 105, n 2. 
 
 Speaker, chase with, how to avoid 64. 
 
 " how to get up close with, as with a bound 64 ; 85, n 5. 
 
 Speakers, change of 121, n 19. 
 
 Speaker's name, how indicated... 152, -n 14. 
 
 Special contractions to be devised by the reporter 118, u 13. 
 
 " " principle and instances.. 69, n33; 74, nl4; 8%n4; 92, n 2; 
 93, n 4 : 107, n 4 ; 113, n 8 and 9 ; 113, n 13 ; 119, n 1 and 3 ; 120, n 10, 11, and 14; 
 V21,nl6; 123,n2; 123, n 7 ; 124,n9; 129,n2; 130, n 7; 133, n 7; 136, n2; 138, u4; 
 141, n 28 ; 142, n 1 ; 141, n 18 ; 146, n 7 ; 148, n 5 ; 154, n 4 ; 155, n 1 ; 156, n 5 ; 160, n 10. 
 Special contractions employed for general purposes by the experienced re- 
 porter 129, n 2; 142, n 1 ; 144, n 18. 
 
 Standard Phonography greatly superior to other systems in respect of 
 
 phrase writing 64; 133, n 9. 
 
 Standard Phonography, adequacy in the representation of phrases of com- 
 mon speech 118, n 7. 
 
 " " advantages of, referred to 71, n 10. 
 
 " how it makes the rough places smooth 85, u 5? 
 
 " " its mode of expressing repetitions 128, n 80. 
 
 " object of mentioning in.-tances of its superiority ..154, n 7. 
 
 u " superiority of, as to outlines often where no new 
 
 principles are involved 132, n 15. 
 
 " " uniformity of 94, n 4 ; 135, n 16- 
 
 " " word-signs of, how constructed 77, n 4. 
 
 Stars 85, n 4; 116, n 7. 
 
 Stationary 66, n 9. 
 
 Straight lines lengthened to add thr (tr and dr) 62, xii. 
 
 " You and We prefixed to 62, xi. 
 
 Study of the Classics and of Iteporttng 181. n 10. 
 
 Substantially as described 156, n ". 
 
 Such are 141, n 27. 
 
 Such will 141, n 27. 
 
 Supplying and Implying distinguished 67, n 15. 
 
 Surely 129, u 5. 
 
182 INDEX OF THE IfOTES. 
 
 T. 
 
 Tacitus, quotation from 95, n 7. 
 
 Take It 93, n 4. 
 
 Testimony, notes of, to be freely vocalized l.%0, n 11. 
 
 Than had 144, n 12. 
 
 That distinguished from WWi it (Dhet) 115, n 4. 
 
 Titan frequently added by an En-hook. 68, xviii. ; SS, n 5 ; 140, n 8. 
 
 " omitted 77, n 5. 
 
 Tlie emphasized 73, n 11. 
 
 " omitted 161, n. 15. 
 
 " sometimes omitted 70, n 2, 7. 
 
 " " written separately 68, n 24. 
 
 Therefore, added 84, n5; 9S, n 1. 
 
 There have 108, n 5. 
 
 These great results 10S, n 7. 
 
 TJiey were added by lengthening 14i, n 16. 
 
 Third Position distinguished from the Fourth in case of horizontals. 65, n 1. 
 
 " " for half-lengths. 107, n 1. 
 
 This immense 87, n 2. 
 
 Thr added to present tenses of verbs ending in Mel, Nel, Kel 156, n 4. 
 
 " (<r, dr) added to straight lines by lengthening 02, xii. ; ~1. n 17 ; 109, n 10 ; 
 
 119, n 17 ; 160, n 9. 
 
 " added by a tick sometimes 62, xiii. ; 73, n 7 ; 94, n 3 ; 96, n 12 ; 143, n 5. 
 
 To alL 72, n 1. 
 
 " (Pletoid-) prefixed to straight lines in the same direction 112, n 9. 
 
 To le added to Em 167, u 2. 
 
 To before ascending letters, and how it may be implied 66, n 14 
 
 " frequently implied in the Reporting Style of Standard Phonography 61, v. ; 
 
 84, n 6 ; 129, n 1 ; 130, n 9, b; 133, n 2 ; 167, n 2. 
 
 To have 'been added to Em 77, n 6. 
 
 To himself. 65, n 1. 
 
 To implied before horizontals, remarks on C5, n 1. 
 
 " " by a principle in Standard Phonography 63, n 23 ; 85, n 3 ; 106, n 8 ; 
 
 109, n 10 ; 113, n 5 ; 141, n 21. 
 
 " " instances of 66, n 5 : 85, n 3. 
 
 To it thprefore 109, n 10. 
 
 remitted for the fake of phrase- writing. . .106, n 5 ; 10T, n 2 ; 120, n 13 ; 122, n 25 ; 
 123, n 3 ; 125, n 1 ; 129, n 3 ; 132, n 14 ; 133, n 8 ; 134. n 11 and 14 ; 140, n 12 ; 141, 
 n 26 ; 150, n 7 ; 156, n 6 ; 153, n 10 ; 162, n 5 ; 167, n 1 ; 169, n 4 and 9. 
 
 To omitted 162, n 8 ; 167, n 8. 
 
 Too much 83, n ?. 
 
 To onr " 69. n 36. 
 
 To the 84, n 6 ; 92, n 1 ; 140, n 13. 
 
 Tr and Dr added by the advanced writer to straight lines by lengthening . . .62, xil. 
 
 Transcribing law reports ...149. n 2, ?i, r, d. 
 
 Trctn*fer-red, etc 94, n 4. 
 
 Two 74, n 2; 1M, n 5 ; 164, n 4. 
 
 T-j, how disposed Df ! n Standard Phonography 117, n 5 ; 140. n 8 ; 143. n 4 ; 
 
 147, n 2; 161, n 1. 
 
INDEX OF THE NOTES. 183 
 
 U. 
 
 Us, principle of joining, in Standard Phonography 68, n 25 ; 120, n 12. 
 
 Uniformity 94, n 4; 117, n 3 ; 126, n 18. 
 
 Upon gome parts of it 116, n 5. 
 
 Uses distinguished 71, n 13. 
 
 Uncon- joined 124, n 11. 
 
 Unconscious , 124, 11 11. 
 
 V. 
 
 Varnhagen Von Ense 160, n 5. 
 
 Vet-hook to add Have 113, n 6. 
 
 Verb for the Actor 7, n 1. 
 
 Versss and chapters, how indicated 98, n 3. 
 
 Vocalization in the Eeporling Style 146, n 6; 160, n 12; 16S, n 8. 
 
 Vowels generally omitted in the Reporting Style 61, i. 
 
 W. 
 
 Washington 125, n 14. 
 
 Was that , 145, n 21. 
 
 Way, brief, enlarged 61, x. ; S2, n 5. 
 
 We frequently prefixed by a Way-hook even to straight lines 61, xi. ; 81, n 4 ; 
 
 111,n4. 
 
 We may le (Wemb) 87, n I. 
 
 We icere and We wuld 114, n 11. 
 
 Well in phrase-writing 128, n 28. 
 
 " hook of, omitted in phrase-writing. 169, n 9. 
 
 Were expressed in Standard Phonography by an Ar-hook or by enlarging 
 
 a small El-hook 62, xv. 
 
 Were and Are added by an Ar-hook, method of distinguishing 66, n 11. 
 
 Were, the principle of adding by an Ar-hook shown to be new 66, n 11. 
 
 Western Roman Empire 100, n 1. 
 
 What added by a final Wuh-hook 104, n 1 ; 111, n 6 ; 123, n 8 ; 136, n 1. 
 
 " " halving . .63, xvi. ; 9i>, n 2 ; 95, n 9 ; 104, n 1 ; 122, n 28 ; 128, n 27. 
 
 Wfuitever (Tef ) joined to But (Tetoid 2 ; 120, n 15. 
 
 Whether or not 154, n 7. 
 
 Which they 93, n 5. 
 
 Which were so 66, n 11 ; 141, n 25. 
 
 While, Old form for, criticised 86, n 5. 
 
 Who, etc 120, n 7. 
 
 Wio-sc-m, how represented in Standard Phonography 109, n 9. 
 
 TF/ty, O!u form for, criticised 86, n 5. 
 
 Widnninsj of Em 119, n 16. 
 
 Will added by an El-hook or by enlarging a small Ar-hook 62, xiv. ; 70, n 8. 
 
 ft ith it 115, n4. 
 
 With omitted 8, n 4 ; 89, n 9 ; 106, n 7 ; 166, n 2 and 3. 
 
 " prefixed to Em, etc., by a Way-hook 143, n 7. 
 
 With what 69, n 32. 
 
 Word-sign, the advantage of a good one 66, n 12. 
 
184: INDEX OF THE NOTES. 
 
 Word-signs and contractions of the Reporting Style must be learned thoroughly. 51. 
 
 " nsed as prefix-signs 1*J, n 6. 
 
 " ai.d contractions may sometimes be vocalized 77, n 4 ; 98, n 4 ; 99, n 8. 
 
 "Words omiltcil 77, n 5 ; 83, n 1 ; 84, n 1 ; 85, n 2 ; 88, n 4 ; 89, n 9 ; 96, n 13 ; 
 
 105, n 1; IOC, n 7; 120, n 15; 149, n3; 155, n2; 158, n 1; 160, n 9; 161, n 15 and 
 16 ; 162, n 4 ; 101, n 4 ; 166, n 2 and 3. 
 
 Would added by a Wuh hook 104, nl; 153, n 4; 168 n 6. 
 
 " " halvi g 68, xvi. 
 
 n'ouldeeem 71, n 18; 1^8, n 9. 
 
 Writing exercises from dictation 52, par. 2; 53. 
 
 " size of, mu*t not be too large 51. 
 
 Wub-hook final, rule of, stated 104, n 1. 
 
 T. 
 
 Tay, brief, enlarged 61, x. 
 
 Yes, sir 149, n 6. 
 
 you expressed in phrase-writing by Yen sometimes 60, iv., 4 ; 115, n 5 ; 118, n 15. 
 
 " sometimes written by a Yuh hook 62, xi. ; 96, n 11 ; 145, n8; 169, n 2. 
 
 You were and You would 114, n 11. 
 
 Z. 
 
 Zero-position 115, n 4. 
 
INDEX OF THE EXERCISES AND KEY 
 
 OF THE 
 
 SECOND STANDARD-PHONOGRAPHIC READER. 
 
 NOTE. par = para graph; t = top; m = middle; b = bottom; tm = between top 
 and middle ; mb = between middle and bottom. Figures over 48 refer to pages of 
 the Key ; under 49, to pages of the Engraved Exercises. 
 
 A. 
 
 Abolitionists, who are they? 31 tin; 126. 
 
 Abolition of Slavery, why not expressly provided for by the Framers of 
 
 th- Constitution 83 mb ; 135 b. 
 
 Age of the Human Kace 18-15; 88-91, 
 
 " All men created equal," etc. what did it mean ? 86 t ; 142. 
 
 American Bible Society 23-28 ; 10T-118. 
 
 Anatomy, Comparative, use of, in restoring the history of the primeval 
 
 earth 5 b ; 74 t 
 
 Ancient and Modern Philosophy compared 8-4 ; 65-70. 
 
 Ancient Philosophers, business of 3 m ; ti8. 
 
 A New Education needed 81 tm ; 125 b. 
 
 Ansted, Prof. quotation from 5; 78-75. 
 
 Aristotle's View of Creation 12 t ; 84 m. 
 
 B. 
 
 Baconian Philosophy, its object and effect 8 b ; 69. 
 
 Bacon, Lord, what he proposed 8 b ; 69. 
 
 Baltimore Democratic Convention of 1860 Mr. Gaulden's speech in 2S ; 118. 
 
 Bible, different copies of 13 t; 86 m. 
 
 Blacks, were they citizens under the Constitution? 37 tm; 146. 
 
 Blood, the circulation of, proved by Harvey 6 7; 75-73. 
 
 Buck's Thtvlogii'.al Dictionary quoted 11-18 ; 84-88. 
 
 C. 
 
 Cahill, Eev. Dr. abstract of a lecture by 17; 95. 
 
 Catholic Church claimed 10 be infallible 17 ; 95. 
 
 Change wrought by Death 10 m ; 82 t. 
 
 Charge to trie Jury 40 ; 154. 
 
 Chief Justice Tuney's Discovery 86 b ; 142 ; 87 ; 145. 
 
186 INDEX OF THE EXFRCISE8 AND KEY. 
 
 Chronology 18 ttn; 8T tm. 
 
 Church of Komi;, its infallibility discussed 15; 17 : 91 ; 95 
 
 Church of Rome, what it claims 15 b; 91 b. 
 
 Circulation of the Blood, evidences of >'.-1 ; 75-73. 
 
 Compensation to the Slaveholder 31 m ; 126. 
 
 Conflict between Ideas 24; 107. 
 
 Creation 11-13 ; 84-SS. 
 
 " different dates for, given by different copies of the Bible 18 t ; 86 m. 
 
 " Rev. Dr. Pye Smith's theory of 8 t ; 7< m. 
 
 Creative Power of Deity 13 t; 86m. 
 
 D. 
 
 Declaration of Independence, importance of 85m ; 141. 
 
 Discoveri-rs, their usual treatment 7 m ; 7T m. 
 
 Disowning the lawfulness of Slavery, results of 87 mb ; 146. 
 
 Dissolution of the Union 31 mb ; 127 b. 
 
 E. 
 
 Edinburgh 7?rtV?r, extract from 8-4 ; 65-70. 
 
 Kffects of the Baconian Philosophy 8 b ; 69 b-70. 
 
 Evidence offered by traces of animal life in the strata of the earth 6 t ; 75 t. 
 
 Evidences of the Circulation o." the Blood 6-7 ; 75-78. 
 
 Extinct animals, traces of, in the earth's strata C t ; 75 t 
 
 F. 
 
 Framprsof the Constitution were they guilty of hypocrisy? 84 b: 139 b. 
 
 Franklin, Benjamin, petitioned for the Abolition of Slavery 86 mb ; 144. 
 
 Fugitive-servant clause of the Constitution does it refer tu Slaves? 84 m ; 139. 
 
 G. 
 
 Ganlden, of Georgia, speech of, in the Baltimore Democratic Convention . .28 ; 118. 
 
 Geology .5; 73-75. 
 
 Gerrit Smith, speech of, claiming that there can be no law for Slavery 80 ; 124. 
 
 Greek Quotation 21 t; 101 b. 
 
 II. 
 
 Hamilton, Alexander his remark about the sacred rights of mankind . .86 m ; 144. 
 
 Handsome set of little children ,.J9 mb; 121 b. 
 
 Harvey, discoverer of the Circulation of the Blood 7 ; 76 m. 
 
 Heliopolis (Egypt), investigations ai 14 m ; '!> m. 
 
 History, primeval, restored 5 b ; 73-74 t. 
 
 Horncr, Mr. Leonard his researches in the Nile valley 14 t n ; -8 b. 
 
 Human Race, age of. .' .. 18-15; SS-91. 
 
 Humboidt, Alexander Von 43-43 ; 161-170. 
 
INDEX OF THE EXERCISES AND KEY. 187 
 
 I. 
 
 Uleas, " irrepressible conflict" between 24 t ; 107. 
 
 Infallibility, no foundation for, in Reason or Scripture 16 mb ; 93 m. 
 
 Infallibility of the Catholic Church, what it means 17 m ; 95 !. 
 
 Infallibility of the Church aainst the 15; 91. 
 
 " " For 17;95. 
 
 Intellect, brilliant triumph of 5 b ; 78 b. 
 
 Intolerance, are its bars broken down ? 26 b ; 111 b. 
 
 J. 
 
 fay, John, Chief Justice of the United States what he said of Slavery.. 36mb ; 145. 
 
 K. 
 
 Key to the Keporting Exercises G5-170. 
 
 Ii. 
 
 Laws of Nature, stability of 17 mb ; 96. 
 
 Law-Reporting .39; 149. 
 
 Liberty, Genius of, can it shriek? 28 b; 119. 
 
 Lieber, Prof. Francis, an Address by 43-48 ; 161-170. 
 
 Logic 4 ; 70-73. 
 
 M. 
 
 Man, Glory and Dignity of 81 tm ; 126. 
 
 Mann, Hon. Horace what he snid about Religion and Science 8 ; 78-80. 
 
 Memphis (Egypt), chronological investigations at 14 mb ; 89 b. 
 
 jr. 
 
 New States did the Constitution give them the right to have Slavery ?. .34 tm ; 137. 
 
 Ko Law for Slavery 30 ; 124. 
 
 Non-intervention, a Slave-breeder's idea of 29 mb ; 122 t. 
 
 O. 
 
 Orthodox View of the World's Salvation 24 tm ; 103, 
 
 Our Friends in Heaven 9-11 ; 80-63. 
 
 P. 
 
 Patience of Harvey in philosophical investigation t tm ; 77 t. 
 
 Philosophers, ancient, business of 3m; 68. 
 
 Philosophy of Health, extract from 6-7; 75-78. 
 
 " Seneca's view of 3 tm ; 68. 
 
188 INDEX OF THE EXERCISES AKD KEY. 
 
 Platonic Philosophy, aim of 3 mb; 69. 
 
 Politics 28 -88 ; 118-143. 
 
 Posidonius and Seneca 8 im ; 67. 
 
 Priests can they make a mistake in Faith ? 20 t ; 100 L 
 
 Pro-Slavery interpretations of the Constitution by Anti-Slavery men . . .85 t ; 189 b. 
 
 R. 
 
 Rameses II., Statue of, when erected 14 mb; 89 rab. 
 
 Reasoning Process, sameness of, in all cases 4 b ; 71-78. 
 
 Religion and Science 8-10; 78-80. 
 
 Kijjuteof Mankind, where written 86 mb; 144. 
 
 S. 
 
 Sassnett, Dr. Wm. J., an Address by 28-23; 107-11>. 
 
 Science not Sectarian 8b; 79 b. 
 
 " the Interpreter of Nature 9 mb ; 80 b. 
 
 Secession, Gerrit Smith's view of 81 mb; 127 b. 
 
 Seneca's view of Philosophy 8m; 63. 
 
 Slaveholders, character of 80 mb ; 124. 
 
 Slavery, a practical way to protect. 29 m ; 121 i. 
 
 " how long was it to continue? 88 mb; 136 m. 
 
 " no law for 80 ; 124. 
 
 " remedy for 88 m ; 148. 
 
 " the institution of, claimed to be the chief source of the prosper- 
 ity and intelligence of the White Race 29 t; 120 t 
 
 Smith, RKV. Dr. Fye his theory concerning the Garden of Eden 8t; 78m. 
 
 Stowe, Mrs. Harriet Beecher, quoted 9-11; 80-S. 
 
 Supreme Being alone infallible. 16 mb ; 93 m. 
 
 Supreme Court, what it says respecting laws against rights and fun- 
 damental principles 82 b ; 182 mb. 
 
 T. 
 
 The Bible claimed to be the grand instrumentality for saying the world . 26 tm ; 112. 
 The Bible recognized as coming from God, notwithstanding different 
 
 constructions 27 mb ; 116 m. 
 
 The Christian Religion said to be the source of all that is truly good in 
 
 Human Naiure 27 t ; 1 IS t 
 
 The Constitution is it a bargain between the Whites nd Blacks ? 82 m ; 130. 
 
 The Constitution is it a bargain between the Whit s of the North and 
 
 the Whites of the South?.. 82 m; 181. 
 
 The Constitution is it a law for Slavery ? 81 b ; 12S b ;-82 t ; 129. 
 
 " Pro-slavery imerpretations of, by Anti-Slavery men. 35 t ; 139 b. 
 
 " was it intended to favor Slavery ? 32 b ; 132. 
 
 " " " by the Framers or by the People to favor 
 
 Slavery? 33 t; 183. 
 
 Theological preconceptions, tenacity of 8m; 79 m. 
 
INDEX OF THE EXERCISES AND KEY. 189 
 
 The way to govern men 26 b; 114 tnb. 
 
 Traces of Animal Life in the strata of the earth evidence offered thereby. .6 ; 75 U 
 
 T7. 
 
 Union, dissolution of 81 mb; 12T. 
 
 W. 
 
 Wash ington 80 m ; ] 44 t 
 
 W hateley's Elements of Logic, extract from 4 ; 70-73. 
 
 World's Salvation, Orthodox and Rational views of the 24 tm ; 108, 
 
 Vfrilot Habeas Corpus, effect of, on Slavery 88 m; 1364. 
 
UNIVERS/A 
 
 
 u 
 
 3 1158 01126 1079 
 
 I 1 ^JR i I 111 I 
 
 :UNIVER% v^lOSANGElfrx 
 
 "* 'O (S -^**. - * 
 
 -r> o 
 
 2 a 
 
 UBRARYQc. ^-lIBRARYQr 
 1 1